2.4 Dispersion . . . . . . .

149

3 Heat 155

3.1 Thermometry . . . . . 155

Contents
3.2 Heat transfer . . . . . . 159

3.3 Heat measurement . . 164

1 Mechanics 3 3.4 Heat expansion . . . . 177

1.1 Measurements . . . . . 3 3.5 Gas laws . . . . . . . . 179

1.2 Molecular properties . 7 3.6 vapours . . . . . . . . . 185

1.3 Mechanical properties 15 3.7 Heat Engines . . . . . 189

1.4 Forces . . . . . . . . . . 22
4 Electricity and magnetism191
1.5 Energy . . . . . . . . . 27
4.1 Electrostatics . . . . . 191
1.6 Pressure . . . . . . . . 33
4.2 Electric Cells . . . . . . 204
1.7 Motion . . . . . . . . . 44
4.3 Current electricity . . . 206
1.8 Power . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.4 Magnetism . . . . . . . 231
1.9 Archimedes/floatation . 77
4.5 Magnetic effect of I . . 236
1.10 Centre of gravity . . . . 84
4.6 Electromagnetism . . . 249
1.11 Machine . . . . . . . . . 90

1.12 Waves . . . . . . . . . . 99
5 Modern Physics 265

2 Light 125 5.1 Atomic structure . . . . 265

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . 125 5.2 Cathode rays . . . . . 267

2.2 Reflection . . . . . . . . 129 5.3 X-rays . . . . . . . . . . 275

2.3 Refraction . . . . . . . 137 5.4 Radioactivity . . . . . . 277

1
CONTENTS CONTENTS

Physics; Problems and Solutions 2 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

Chapter 1

Mechanics
25
A. 10 g cm−3
Contents 35
B. 30 g cm−3
1.1 Measurements . . . . . . 3
C. 10 g cm−3
1.2 Molecular properties . . 7 25
1.3 Mechanical properties . 15
D. 35 g cm−3 A
1.4 Forces . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.5 Energy . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.6 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 33
V = 35 − 25
1.7 Motion . . . . . . . . . . . 44 = 10cm3
M
1.8 Power . . . . . . . . . . . 74 D =
1.9 Archimedes/floatation . 77 V
25
1.10 Centre of gravity . . . . 84 = gcm−3
10
1.11 Machine . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.12 Waves . . . . . . . . . . . 99 2. Three of the fundamental physical
qualities are
A. density, mass and time.
1.1 Measurements B. length, time and mass.
C. length, time and weight. B
Section A (Objectives) D. volume, temperature, mass.
3. Which one of the following groups
1. The following readings were recorded consists of vectors only
when measuring the density of a
A. momentum, acceleration, work,
stone:
energy.
Mass of stone = 25g,
B. speed, velocity, displacement,
Volume of water = 25cm3 . energy. C
3
Volume of water and stone = 35cm . C. displacement, velocity, accel-
What is the density of the stone? eration, force.

3
1.1. MEASUREMENTS CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
D. velocity, work, power, momen- 6. A tank 2m tall and base area 2.5m2
tum is filled to the brim with a liquid
which exerts a force of 40,000N
4. The hands of an image of an un-
at the bottom. Calculate the den-
numbered clock face in a plane
sity of the liquid.
mirror indicates the position of
4,000
6.20. the actual time is A. 25×2×10 kgm−3
40,000 −3
A. 5.40. B. 2.5×2×10 kgm
40,000 −3
B. 6.20. C. 25×2×10 kgm
C. 6.40. 40,000 −3
D. 2.5×2 kgm B
D. 7.40. C
Mirror
F = W = mg
= 40, 000
F 40, 000
?w / ? m = =
Image Object
g 10
M
5. Liquid Y of volume 0.40m3 and den- D =
V
sity 900kgm−3 is mixed with liq- 40,000
10
uid Z of volume 0.35m3 and den- =
2 × 2.5
sity 800kg m−1 . 40, 000
= kgm−3
Calculate the density of the mix- 10 × 2 × 2.5
ture. 7. A piece of material of mass 200grams
A. 800kg m−3 has a density of 25kgm−3 . Calcu-
B. 840 kg m−3 late its volume in m3 .
200
C. 850kg m−3 A. 25
200
D. 900kg m−3 C B. 1000×25
1000×25
C. 200
1000×200
total mass D. 25 B
D =
total volume
0.4 × 900 + 0.35 × 800
= M
0.4 + 0.35 V =
360 + 280 D
= 200
0.75 = kg ÷ 25kgm−3
640 1000
= 200
0.75 = m3
= 853.33 ≈ 850 1000 × 25

Physics; Problems and Solutions 4 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.1. MEASUREMENTS
8. A tin containing 6 × 103 m3 of 11. Two solid cubes have the same
paint has a mass of 8kg. If the mass but their edges are in the
mass of the empty tin with the ration 4:1 What is the ratio of
lid is 0.5kg, calculate the density their densities?
−3
of the paint in Kgm .
A. 1:4
8×0.5
A. 6×10−3
B. 1:8
7.5
B. 6×10−3
C. 1:16
8×106
C. 6×10−3
D. 1:64 D
8.5×106
D. 6×10−3 B

M
m D1 V1
D = = M
v D2 V2
8 − 0.5 V2 l23
= = = 3
v V1 l1
7.5 " #3
= l2
6 × 10−3 =
l1
9. Length, mass and current are = 43 = 64
A. units of measurement hence the ratio is 64:1 or 1:64
B. derived quantities
12. A box of dimensions 0.2m by
C. fundamental quantities
0.3m by 0.5m is full of a gas of
D. measured in metres, newtons density 200kg/m3 . The mass of
and amperes respectively C the gas is
10. Convert 25cm3 into m3 A. 3 × 10−2 kg
A. 2.5 × 105 B. 6.0 × 100 kg
B. 2.5 × 102 C. 2 × 102 kg
C. 2.5 × 101 D. 6.7 × 103 kg B
−5
D. 2.5 × 10 D

M = ρ×v
25cm3 = 25cm × 1cm × 1cm
25 1 1 = 200 × 0.2 × 0.3 × 0.5
= m× m× m = 6.0 × 100 kg.
100 100 100
= 2.5 × 10−5 m3

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 5 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.1. MEASUREMENTS CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
13. A set of apparatus that is suit- 0.45
=
able for measurement of the vol- 9000
ume of an irregular object includes: But V = L × W × h
V
w =
A. overflow can, measuring cylin- h׳
L ´
der, irregular object and string. 0.45
9000
=
B. measuring cylinder, irregu- 0.5 × 0.01
lar object, overflow can, flask. 0.45
=
9000 × 0.005
C. overflow can, irregular object,
string, retort stand and bu-
rette. 16. The width of a metre rule is ac-
curately measured by a
D. Burette, overflow can, irreg-
ular object, string, measur- A. micrometer screw gauge
ing cylinder, retort stand. B B. vernier caliper
14. Which of the following can be C. tape measure
used to measure the diameter of D. metre rule A
a bicycle spoke accurately?
17. A piece of metal of mass 120 g
A. Metre rule. is placed in a 100 ml measuring
B. Vernier caliper. cylinder containing 20ml of wa-
ter. Find the density of the metal
C. Tape measure. if the water level rises to the 50
D. Micrometer screw gauge. D ml mark.
15. A rectangular block of tin is 0.5m A. 1.2 g cm−2 .
long and 0.01m thick. Find the B. 2.4 gmc−3 .
width of the block if its mass and
C. 4.0 g cm−3
density are 0.45kg and 9000kgm−3
respectively. D. 6.0 g cm−3 C

A. 0.005 × 0.45 × 9000m

B. 0.45 1ml =1cm3
9000×0.005 m
0.005 (50 − 20) · 1gcm−3
mdisp.water =
C. 0.44×9000 m
0.45×0.005
=
30g
D. 9000 m B
mmetal =30g
m 120
D = =
m v 4
V = −3
= 4gcm
d
Physics; Problems and Solutions 6 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.2. MOLECULAR PROPERTIES
18. What is meant by mass of a body? 4. When a crystal of potassium per-
Mass is quantity of mat- manganate is carefully placed at
ter a body contains the bottom of a beaker contain-
ing water it spreads uniformly in
the water after some days due to
1.2 Molecular properties A. diffusion.
B. capillarity.
Section A (Objectives)
C. surface tension.
D. Brownian motion. A
1. When water spreads on a glass plate,
the forces between its molecules 5. Soap is used to wash clothes be-
and glass molecules are due to cause it

A. surface tension. A. increase capillarity in the clothes.

B. adhesion. B. reduces capillarity in the clothes

C. cohesion. C. increases surface tension al-

lowing water to penetrate the
D. viscosity B dirt easily.
2. Surface tension in a liquid may be D. reduces surface tension allow-
weakened by ing water to penetrate the dirt
easily. D
A. Lowering the temperature
B. Adding soap solution 6. Brownian motion experiment shows
that molecules of gases are
C. Increasing the amount of liq-
uid A. stationary.
D. Increasing the density of the B. in motion in one direction only.
liquid B C. in constant random motion.
3. When potassium dichromate dis- D. more closely packed than molecule
solves at the bottom of a water in liquid. C
container, it spread slowly through-
7.
out water by a process called
Oil patch
Lycopodium powder
A. Evaporation
° ?
B. Diffusion
C. Capillarity ¡
µ
¡
Beaker containing
D. Convection. B water
Fig. 6

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 7 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.2. MOLECULAR PROPERTIES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
An oil drop of volume 10−3 cm3 D. surface tension B
forms a patch on water as shown
in fig. 6. The area of the patch is 10. A needle may float on a clean
0.785 cm2 . If it is one molecule water but sinks when some de-
thick, what is the size of the molecule? tergent is added to water because
the detergent.
A. 4.06 × 104 cm
B. 7.85 × 104 cm A. reduces the density of water

C. 9.53 × 104 cm B. increase adhesive force between

the needle and water molecules.
D. 1.27 × 10−3 cm D
C. Lowers the surface tension of
water.
Volume D. makes water surface slippery.
thickness =
area
10−3 cm3 11. The particles in a solid at room
= temperature are
0.785cm2
= 1.274 × 10−3 cm
A. close together and vibrating.
8. When mercury is spilt on glass B. close together and stationary.
it forms small spherical droplets C. far apart and moving at ran-
because its dom.
A. density is high. D. Close together and moving at
B. surface tension makes its sur- random. A
face elastic.
12. Water wets glass because
C. molecules are small.
A. adhesion forces between wa-
D. cohesive force is greater than
ter and glass molecules are
adhesive force with glass. D
less than cohesion forces.
9. A blue copper sulphate crystal B. adhesion forces between wa-
placed at the bottom of a beaker ter and glass molecules are
containing water is found to spread more than cohesion forces.
throughout the water after some-
time due to C. surface tension forces between
water and glass molecules are
A. osmosis. more than adhesion forces.
B. diffusion D. surface tension forces are less
C. capillarity than cohesion forces. B

Physics; Problems and Solutions 8 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.2. MOLECULAR PROPERTIES
13. In a Brownian motion experi- 16. Give two observations which show
ment, the the existence of surface tension.

A. smoke particles are seen mov- 1. Some insects can walk

ing about with uniform ve- on water
locity.
2. soap bubbles can be
B. motion observed is caused by formed easily
the air molecules colliding with
the smoke particles. 3. a steel needle can be
made to float on water.
C. size of particles are found to
increase the motion.
17. State two factors which affect sur-
D. smoke cell has a vacuum within face tension of a liquid.
it. B

14. The force which hold the molecules (1) Temperature

in a water drop together are called. . . . (2) Impurities like camphor,
soap, etc
A. Surface tension.
B. Adhesive forces.
18. Distinguish between cohesion and
C. Cohesive forces. adhesion
D. Electrostatic forces C
Cohesion in the force
15. When smoke is introduced in a of attraction between
smoke cell and observed under a molecules of the same
microscope, it is observed as par- kind while Adhesion is
ticles moving at random. This is the force of attraction
mainly because the particles. between molecules of
different kind.
A. are hot.
B. collide with one another 19. Sketch diagrams to show the level
C. collide with air molecules. of liquid in a capillary tube that
is immersed in a liquid which has
D. collide with the walls of the
greater.
smoke cell. C

(i) Cohesion than adhesion

Section B (Structured)
(ii) adhesion than cohesion

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 9 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.2. MOLECULAR PROPERTIES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(i) for greater Cohesion is raised.
than adhesion (i) Smoke molecules are ob-
Convex meniscus
served as white specks
¾ Capillary tube
moving in a zigzag mo-
tion.
?
¶
¶ % (ii)The zigzag motion be-
%
comes faster.
¿ %¶ ¿¿ 21. State one factor which determines
K¿ %¶
Liquid the rate of diffusion of a gas.
(ii) for greater adhesion
Density or molecular mass of
than cohesion
the gas
Concave meniscus
22. Explain why in the Brownian mo-
¡ ¾
¡
¶
¶ tion experiment, smoke particles
¶ are observed to be in random mo-
?
¶
¶ tion.
¿
¿
¿ This is due to the forces
¿ of attraction and repulsion
K ¿
Liquid
between the smoke particles
and air molecules.
20. The diagram in fig. 9 shows an
arrangement for observing Brow- 23. ’
nian motion.

microscope

Glass cell ¥
¥
smoke particles

º· w :
1 z À»»»
»
i
q : z
¹¸

Fig. 9 Fig. 9

(a) Explain
A pin is placed on a bloating pa-
(i) the observations made. per which is on the surface of wa-
(ii) What will be observed when ter as shown in fig. 9. Explain
the glass cell temperature what happen after some time.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 10 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.2. MOLECULAR PROPERTIES
The paper absorbs water Paper II (Essay)
and sinks leaving the pin
26. (a) Describe a simple experi-
floating on water.
ment to show the existence
24. Explain what happens when some of surface tension in wa-
soap solution is carefully added ter and state two factors
to the water. that affect it.
It reduces surface tension (b) A solution is made by dis-
hence it makes the pin sink. solving 1cm3 of cooking oil
25. The diagram in fig. 5 shows an in 199cm3 of methanol. When
arrangement for determining the 0.004cm3 of the solution is
size of an oil molecule. dropped on the surface of
water, an oil film of diam-
eter 12cm is obtained.
Oil film - s ¼ lycopodium powder (i) Estimate the thickness
on top of water

clean glass trough

of a molecule of the cook-
° ing oil.
fig. 5 (ii) State any assumption
made in b(i)
(a) State two assumptions made (c) Smoke confined in an il-
in the experiment. luminated cell is observed
- The oil films is through a microscope.
monomolecular (i) State what is observed.
- The oil film is circular (ii) What conclusions can
be drawn from the ob-
(b) If 1.8×10−4 cm3 of oil spreads
servations in (c) (i) above?
to form a patch of area 150cm2 ,
calculate the thickness of the Solution
patch.
(a) An experiment to show the exis-
tence of surface tension in water.
Volume
Thickness , h =
Area • get a very thin copper wire
and smear it with Vaseline
or grease
1.8 × 10−4 cm3
h = • place the greased thin cop-
150cm2 per wire on a paper and place
= 1.2−6 cm
it in ice water or very cold
h = 1.2 × 10−8 m water.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 11 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.2. MOLECULAR PROPERTIES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
• The paper will absorb water by
and sink leaving the thin cop-
V = πr2 h
per wire floating on water.
Since copper as a metal sinks in
water and here this thin copper Where h is the thickness of the
wire floats, then the surface of molecule
water acts like an elastic skin and V
h =
this is surface tension. πr2
Surface tension can be affected 2.0 × 10−5 cm3
=
by 3.14 × (6cm)2
• Temperature i.e decreases with = 1.77 × 10−7 cm
increase in temperature = 1.77 × 10−7 × 10−2 m
• Detergents i.e. decreases sur- = 1.77 × 10−9 m
face tension of water when (ii)One assumption made above
added to it. is that the film formed is one
(b) (i) 1cm3 of oil is dipped in 199cm3 molecule thick i.e. monomolec-
of methanol to form 200cm3 ular.
of the solution (c) (i) What is observed is a random
i.e 200cm3 of solution contains zigzag motion of bright specks
1cm3 of oil (smoke molecules)

1cm3 of solution contains 1 3 (ii)We conclude that the parti-

200 cm
of oil cles of gasses are ever in a
state of motion colliding with
0.004cm3 of solution contains 0.004
200 cm 3
each other, that is why we
of oil see the zigzag motion.
3 3
0.004cm of solution contains 0.00002cm
of oil 27. (a) (i) What is meant by the
term diffusion?
0.004cm3 of solution contains 2.0×
(ii) State factors on which
10−5 cm3 of oil
diffusion depends.
Volume of oil in 0.004cm3 of the (b) Describe an experiment
−5 3
solution is 2.0 × 10 cm to show diffusion in liq-
uids.
V = 2.0 × 10−5 cm3
(c) A porous pot containing
The oil film is assumed to be a air is connected to a wa-
cylinder hence its volume is given ter manometer. Explain

Physics; Problems and Solutions 12 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.2. MOLECULAR PROPERTIES
what happens if hydrogens (c) Hydrogen has smaller molecules
is let in the space surround- compared to those of air so the
ing the pot as showed in hydrogen molecules or the gas will
Fig. 1. enter to the interior of the porous
) Hydrogen pot at a faster rate increasing the
gas pressure there hence the manome
µ ter water is pushed out to show
6
Air Porous pot
a pressure difference.
¾ water in
manometer
Fig. 1 28. Smoke is confined in a smoke
cell and observed through a
Solution microscope. Explain what is
observed when the tempera-
(a) (i) diffusion is the movement of ture of the smoke cell is raised.
molecules from regions of high
concentration to regions of low Solution
concentration.
What is observed, is the zigzag
(ii) diffusion depends on
motion caused by the collision of
• density of the diffusing ma- the smoke molecules with air molecul
terials This motion is called Brownian
• temperatures motion.
(b)Experiment to show diffusion in When the temperature is increased,
liquids the zigzag motion is more fast i.e.
the molecules now move faster
• Place water in a clean con-
tainer 29. (a) Describe an experiment to
estimate the thickness of
• Using a capillary tube, place
an oil molecule.
a drop of potassium perman-
ganate at one point at the bot- (b) Explain the following ob-
tom of the water. servations.
• Leaving the system in that (i) When mercury and wa-
state for some time. You will ter are separately poured
find that the whole water has on glass, mercury does
changed to blue, the colour not wet glass but wa-
of potassium permanganate ter does.
which has diffused through (ii) When a detergent is
the whole water added to a clean water

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 13 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.2. MOLECULAR PROPERTIES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
surface, a needle float- • Then the thickness of the oil
ing on it (water surface) molecule is calculated as fol-
sinks. lows;
(c) A small steel ball is allowed From , Volume of oil drop, V,
to fall centrally down a tall is equal to the product Area
cylinder containing lubri- of Oil patch, A and thickness
cating oil. of the oil layer, h, then;
(i) Sketch the velocity-time
graph for the motion of V
h =
the ball A
1 3
(ii) Describe the features N cm
=
of the graph. Acm3
1
= cm
Solution NA
1
= × 10−2 m
NA
(a) • Get a 1cm cube fill it by count-
ing the drops of the oil that
can fill this 1cm cube,If they (b) (i) Mercury does not wet glass be-
are N drops then; cause it has a greater cohe-
Volume of one oil drop, V is; sional forces compared to its
1cm3 adhesional forces to glass. Wa-
V = ter wets glass because it has
N
1 a greater adhesion to glass
= cm3 compared to its cohesion.
N
• Place water on a tray and sprin- (ii) this is because a detergent
kle lycopodium powder on it reduces the surface tension
so as to enable a clear view that is holding it, the float-
of the oil patch. ing needle to a value that can
• Let one drop of oil drop on not support the needle which
the settled water in the tray. now sinks.
The oil patch will increase in
area till it increases no more.
(c) a small steel ball falling in lubri-
• Measure or estimate the area cating oil.
of the oil patch and call it Acm3 .
The oil layer is assumed to
be monomolecular. (i) its velocity time graph is;

Physics; Problems and Solutions 14 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.3. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Velocity
6 A. brittleness
V◦ B. stiffness
C. ductility
D. stability C
1. A material that can be rolled into
-
time sheet or drawn into wires with-
out breaking is said to be
Where V◦ is terminal veloc-
ity A. Strong
(ii) the graph shows that the steel B. Elastic
ball increases its velocity to C. Ductile
a maximum constant value D. Brittle C
called its terminal velocity.
2. A rod of cross-sectional area 40cm2
In the first case where the
needs a tensile force of 2N to break
ball’s velocity increases, there
it. What is its breaking stress?
is a net force, F, acting on it
given by A. 0.005N m−2
F = W − U − Viscous drag B. 0.05N−2 m−2
C. 5N m−2
where W and U are its weight
D. 500N m−2 D
and Upthrust respectively.
In the second case where the
ball’s velocity is constant (ter-
A = 40cm2
minal velocity), the net force
= 40cm × 1cm
acting on it is zero i.e. 40 1
= m× m
W = U + Viscous drag 100 100
40
= m2
10000
F
1.3 Mechanical properties Stress =
A
2N
= 40 2
Section A (Objectives) 10000 m
= 500N m−2

14. A beam may be designed with 3. A load of 4N stretches a spring by

much of its central part removed 0.5cm, calculate the extension when
in order to improve on its a load of 8N is applied.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 15 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.3. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
A. 0.25cm. C. Glass, cast iron, stone
B. 1.0cm. D. Rubber, polyester, copper wire
C. 2.0cm. 6. In a wire supporting a load, stress
D. 4.0cm B is given by

A. Strain
Area
F1 F2
= B. Area
e1 e2 Force
F2 e1 C. Force × Area
e2 =
F1 D. Force D
Area
8N
= × 0.5cm 7. Reinforced concrete is stronger
4N
= 1cm than ordinary concrete because
concrete and steel are
4.
A. both brittle materials
X Y
B. both docile materials.
T ¢
T ¢
T ¢ C. strong in tension and com-
T
T ¢
¢ pression respectively.
T ¢
P R D. strong in compression and ten-
Q sion respectively D
Fig. 6
8.

The diagram in fig. 6 shows a ,

,
framework of a bridge. Which of 1 ,
,
the girders are ties? , 2
,
3,
, j
A. XQ, QY, PX, YR ,
,
,
B. PQ, QR, XY
C. XQ, QY
Fig. 4
D. PX, YR B
Fig. 4 shows an arrangement of
5. Which of the following are all brit- three planks on a vertical frame.
tle materials? Which planks can be replaced by
A. Leather, rubber, thread. ropes?
B. Clay, glass, wood C A. 1and 3

Physics; Problems and Solutions 16 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.3. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
B. 1 and 2 Steel is not brittle
C. 3 and 2 11.
D. 1, 2 and 3. B y *
· P T
9. ·
·
Q T
T
Y *

R
?

The regions P, Q and R are re-

spectively.
A. tension, compression, neutral
axis.
B. Neutral axis, compression, ten-
The diagram shows three iden- sion.
tical spring balances X, Y and Z C. Compression, neutral axis, ten-
arranged as shown in Fig. 5 sup- sion.
porting a load of 10N. Each bal- D. Tension, neutral axis, com-
ance weighs 10N. At equilibrium, pression. C
the spring Z is extended by e me-
tres. The extensions of X and Y 12. An object is said to behave elas-
are tically when
X(m) Y (m)
A. its elastic limit is exceeded.
A. 2e e
2
B. e e A B. its breaking point is reached.
C. 2e 2e C. equal increases in the force
D. 3e 3e applied to it produce equal
changes in length.
10. Which of the following are brit-
tle substances? D. the potential energy stored
in it is used to permanently
A. Dry clay, steel and wood. D deform the object. C
B. Chalk, steel, plastic and glass
13. A ductile material is that which
C. Glass, chalk, concrete and steel
D. Dry clay, glass, chalk and con- A. is fragile. C
crete B. is not elastic.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 17 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.3. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
C. can be moulded into any shape. C. (ii) and (iii) only.
D. easily breaks under compres- D. (i), (ii) and (iii). A
sion.
17. A mass of 0.2kg produces an ex-
14. The purpose of threads in tyres
tension of 8cm in a spring. The
is to make them
force required to produce an ex-
A. attractive. tension of 6 cm is
B. stronger.
A. 0.75N.
C. reduce friction.
B. 1.50N.
D. grip the road surface. B
C. 2.70N.
15.
D. 24.00N. C
Force D
6
C E
AB

F1 F2
=
- x1 x2
Extension F1
F2 = × x2
Fig. 4 e1
(0.2 × 10) × 8
Fig. 4 shows how the extension =
6
of a copper wire varies with the = 2.667
applied force. Point B represents
A. proportional limit. Section B (Structured)
B. Elastic limit.
C. Breaking stress. 18. Explain with the aid of a sketch
D. Yield point. diagram, how a notch weakens a
beam of a brittle material.
16. The strength of a material de- A notch acts as a weak point
pends on the when it is put under tension.
under compression
(i) nature of the material.
W
(ii) diameter of the material.
(iii) length of the material. tension

A. (i) only. 19. State two ways in which con-

B. (i) and (ii) only crete may be made stronger.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 18 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.3. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
1. by adding to it iron bars K - Tension force
which are strong under
N - Compressional force
tension.
Q - Compressional force
2. by adding in it more
appropriate cement to R - Compressional force
make it more stronger
under compression. 22. .

B C
20. Distinguish between a strut and ­ ¢¢
­ ¢
a tie. A ­­ ¢ D
A strut is a girder under E
compression while a tie in a Fig. 13
girder under tension.
Fig. 13 shows a frame work of
21. girders. Identify any two gird-
ers which are in
di (i) Tension
¥
Q ¥
Q
Q
s y
AE and ED
R PP XX K
PP q
P (ii) Compression
l
l AK
A
LOAD AB and BE(even EC,BC
l
di
l N
and CD)
23. Define the following terms
Fig.8
(i) Strain
(ii) Stress
The diagram in fig. 8 shows the
arm of a crane used for lifting (i) strain is the ratio of
heavy loads. extension to original
Name the force acting on struc- length.
ture; (ii)stress is the force per
unit area
K
24. The curve in Fig. 7 shows the
N force versus extension graph for
a copper wire. Describe what is
Q
happening between points A and
R B.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 19 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.3. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
The wire undergoes plas- Where

tic deformation where its 



A is elastic limit


atoms or molecules slide  B is proportionality
over each other. 



C is yield point and


 D is breaking point
Paper II (Essay)
(ii)the graph has two main
25. (a) State Hooke’s law of elas- parts; The elastic region
ticity OA; where Hooke’s law is
(b) Different loads, W, are ap- obeyed and The inelas-
plied to the end of an elas- tic region AD where the
tic wire and the correspond- material undergoes plas-
ing extension, e, of the wire tic deformation (Hooke’s
recorded law is not obeyed)
(c) From the question we have;
(i) Sketch a labeled graph
e against W l0 = 5.0 × 10−2 m
(ii) describe briefly the fea- e = 2.0 × 10−3 m
tures of the graph in (b) When F = 1.8N
(i)
From Hooke’s law
(c) A spring of natural length
Force F is proportional to ex-
5.0×10−2 m extends by 2.0×
tension e,
10−3 m when a force of 18N
acts on it. Calculate the F α e
extension when a force of F = ke
10N is applied to the spring.
where k is the spring constant
Solution or elastic constant.
F
(a) Hooke’s law states that the ⇒k =
e
extension of an elastic mate- 1.8N
rial is directly proportional =
2.0 × 10−3 m
to the force applied on it, pro- = 900N/m
vided the elastic limit is not hence F = ke becomes
exceeded. F = 900e
6 A C
B
D
e
If the force of 10N extends
the spring by e
O -
(b) (i) W From F = 900e

Physics; Problems and Solutions 20 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.3. MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
10 = 900e Hence the body changes shape.
10 6 900
= e (b) (i) strength is the ability of
900 6 900 a material to resist dis-
10
= e tortion when a force is ap-
900 plied on it.
10
e = (ii) strength of a material de-
900
e ' 0.0111m pends on
e ' 1.11cm • the young’s moduli of
the material
26. (a) With the aid of a diagram, • the surface texture i.e.
describe the effect of a shear does it easily develop
force on a body. a notch or is it smooth.
(b) (i) What is meant by strength (c) an experiment to verify Hooke’s
as applied to a mate- law
rial?
• suspend a spring from a
(ii) State the factors on which rigid support as shown be-
strength of a material low
depends.
(c) Describe a simple experi-
ment to verify Hooke’s law
using a spring.
(d) (i) What is concrete? ¤ Ruler
¤£ ¢¡
(ii) State any three char- £ -

acteristics of concrete
which make it a desir-
able building material.
• read the initial position of
Solution the pointer on the ruler
as P◦
(a) the effect of a shear force on • Hang a small mass, m, from
a body is, it makes the body the free end of the spring
slide along one of its sides e.g. and measure the new po-
Force
- sition as P
• measure the extension x
Fixed as x = |P − P◦ |
² N • repeat the above procedures
No shear force
With shear force for various increasing val-

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 21 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.4. FORCES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
ues of masses, m, and record concrete can not burn
your results as shown like wood
m P x W • It can be moulded into
any desired shape
• It is weather resistant
i.e. it remains strong
in wet and dry condi-
tions.

where;
P is new pointer position 1.4 Forces
x is extension in metres
W = mg is weight and 1. Which of the following are true
m is mass in kg statements about friction?
• plot a graph of weight against
extension, a straight line (i) it does not oppose motion.
will be obtained. (ii) It causes wearing of surfaces.
6
(iii) It decreases as weight of a
body increases.
Weight (iv) It can be reduced by apply-
ing oil between surfaces.

-
A. (i) only.
Extension B. (i) and (iii) only.
This shows that the ex- C. (ii), (iii) and (iv) only.
tension is proportional to
D. (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) C
the force (weight) applied
which is Hooke’s law. 2. .
(d) (i) Concrete is a stone-like
material which is obtained 4N 3N
6 6
by mixing sand, cement,
3N ¾ - 3N
water and gravel then left
to dry. ?
(ii) • It is a very strong ma- 5N
Fig. 6
terial under compres-
sional forces. Five forces of 5N, 3N, 4N, 3N and
• It is fire resistant i.e. 3N act on a body as shown in

Physics; Problems and Solutions 22 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.4. FORCES
Figure 6. Find the resultant force If R is the resultant, then
on the body. √
R = 52 + 122
√
A. 2N = 25 + 144
√
B. 7N = 169
C. 12N = 13
D. 18N. A 5.
10N 10N
↑ (4 + 3) − 5 = 2N → 3 − 3 = 0N ? ?
resultant is 2N ¾ ¾ -
15N
5N 25N
K L
3. 10N 10N

10N ? ?
6 ¾ - - ¾
500N 510N 205 200N
M N

¾ - Fig. 3
40N 60N
? Fig. 3 shows forces applied on
10N each of the identical blocks of the
Fig.6 same mass. The block which has
the greatest net force is
Forces of 60N, 10N, 40N and 10N
act on a body as shown in Fig. 6. A. K
In which direction does the body B. L
move? C. M
A. upwards. D. N A or B
B. downwards. The vertical force in all the 4 di-
C. to the left. agrams is constant i.e. 10N, the
horizontal forces are
D. to the right. D
K = 15 + 5 = 25
4. Two forces of 5N and 12N act on a
L = 25
body at right angles. Find their
resultant. M = 510 − 500 = 10
N = 205 − 200 = 5
A. 7N
B. 13N
hence L and K had the maximum
C. 17N horizontal force and hence great-
D. 169N B est net force

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 23 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.4. FORCES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
6. A. 1N
6N B. 5N
C. 7N
º·
?
8N - ¾
16N D. 11N B
¹¸
Fig. 5 ↑6−2=4
−→ 3N
The diagram in fig. 5 shows three √
forces of 8N, 6N and 16 N acting R = 32 + 42 = 5
on a particle X. The magnitude 8. In which of the following situa-
of the resultant force is tions is minimum frictional force
A. 10N required?

B. 14N A. sliding down a slope.

C. 18N B. walking along a road.
D. 30N A C. Leaning a ladder against a
wall.
net horizontal force is 16 − 8 =
8N D. designing brake blocks for a
bicycle. A
net vertical force = 6N
Magnitude of the resultant force 9. Two forces of 4N and 3N act at
R is a point at right angles to each
√ other. Find the magnitude of the
R = 2
6 +8 2 resultant force.
√ √
= 36 + 64 = 100
A. 1N
= 10N
B. 5N
7. C.7N
6N D. 12N = 5
6
¾ e
3N P
?
2N R

µ 4N
6
Fig. 1
-
In the diagram in Fig. 1, the mag- 3N
nitude of the resultant force act- √ √
ing on a body P. is R= 32 + 42 = 25 = 5 B

Physics; Problems and Solutions 24 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.4. FORCES
10. Which of the following is true for Using trigonometric defi-
an object under shearing forces? nitions of tan θ and cos θ,
we have;
A. The object does not change in
shape. (i) Q
Q
B. The layers of the object tend = tan 600
to slide on one another. P
Q = P tan 60
√
C. The object gets twisted. = 50 × 3
√
D. The object tends to shorten. = 50 3
= 50 × 1.732
B ∼
= 86.6N

Section B (Structured) (ii) R

P cos 60
=
R 1
11. What is a vector quantity? R 1
=
This is a quantity which P cos 60
shows both magnitude P
R =
and direction. cos 60
50
=
12. Fig. 7 shows the resultant R of 0.866
two forces P and Q. R makes an = 57.74N
angle of 60o with the horizontal
and P is 50N . 13. .

@ @ )string
R @
Fig.7 µ 6Q Magnet -
@
@
@
@@
} 60◦ @ k
¾Meta sphere (iron)
W - @
P
Fig. 7
Fig. 7

The diagram in Fig. 7 shows a

Find the magnitude of:
metal sphere of weight W in equi-
librium. Complete the diagram
(i) Q
to show the forces acting on the
(ii) R metal sphere.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 25 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.4. FORCES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
in the diagram above. Determine
@ )string
@
- @ the magnitude of the resultant
Magnet @ @ Á T
@ Fm
@
force on B.
@ Y
@ k
@ ¾Metal sphere net upward force,
(iron)
?
mg P = 170 − 250
= −80N
where;
T is tension in the string
horizontal force,
M g is the weight of the
metal sphere Q = 340 − 300
= −60N
Fm is magnetic force of at-
traction
14. State two effects that a force can Resultant, R
have on a body. q
R = P 2 + Q2
1. It makes it move q
R = (−80)2 + (−60)2
2. It may deform it √
= 6400 + 3600
15. Give two examples of a vector. = 100N
• momentum and
• acceleration or
Paper II (Essay)
• velocity and
17. (a) What is meant by dynamic
• force
friction
16. (b)Describe, with the aid of
170N a diagram, an experiment
6
to determine the limiting
friction between two sur-
300N ¾ w
B
- 240N faces in contact
(c)State any one factor which
affects friction
?
250N (d) Give one application of fric-
tion
Four forces of 170N , 240N , 250N (e) Describe an experiment
and 300N act on a body B, as shown to demonstrate friction com-

Physics; Problems and Solutions 26 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.5. ENERGY
pensation using an inclined (e) An experiment to demonstrate
plane. friction compensation using
an inclined plane.
Solution • Place an object like a box
(a) Dynamic friction is the type on a horizontal plane.
of friction which acts on a body • rise one side of it slowly
in motion. till the box starts to slide,
the angle of inclination just
(b)An experiment to determine
when it starts to slide is
the limiting friction between
a measure of the force of
two surfaces in contact;
gravity that is overcom-
• let the two surfaces be that ing friction i.e. the an-
of the box and that of the gle of inclination is pro-
surface where the box is portional to friction.
resting l
• place the box on the sur- TT ³³
@ ,
face and tie a small weigh- Box @, £B
TT £ B
£ B
ing machine on it.
• Pull the box via the other
end of the weighing ma-
chine as shown below;
-
1.5 Energy
Fd
¾
Ffriction Section A (Objectives)
• when the box just starts
to move, record the read- 1. A body of mass m kg and at height
ing of the weighing ma- h m from the ground has
chine. this reading is the
value of the limiting fric- A. total gravitational potential
tion between the two sur- energy = mh. B
faces. B. the greatest gravitational po-
(c)Normal reaction on the sur- tential energy when at height,
face or the nature of the sur- h.
face (surface texture) C. the greatest potential energy
(d) Friction is used in writing, when it just drops to the ground.
stoping and starting motion, D. the least potential energy when
etc at height 12 h to the ground.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 27 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.5. ENERGY CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
2. The energy transformations in- The diagram in fig. 3 shows an
volved in a bicycle dynamo is oscillating pendulum bob. Which
of the following statements is true
A. electrical to chemical.
about its motion?
B. potential energy to chemical
energy. A. The kinetic energy at B is equal
C. chemical to light energy. D to the kinetic energy at A.
D. kinetic energy to electrical en- B. The kinetic energy at B is less
ergy. than the potential energy at
3. The energy transformations in- A.
volved in a bicycle dynamo is C. The kinetic energy at B is equal
to the potential energy at A.
A. electrical to chemical.
C
B. potential energy to chemical
energy. D. The kinetic energy at B is greater
than the potential energy at
C. chemical to light energy.
A.
D. kinetic energy to electrical en-
ergy. D 6. Which of the following forms me-
4. Which one of the following state- chanical energy
ments is true about energy trans- A. electrical energy and kinetic
formation? energy
A. A steam engine changes heat B. Potential energy and nuclear
energy into mechanical energy. energy
B. A thermopile changes electri- C. Nuclear energy and kinetic
cal energy to heat energy. energy
C. A dynamo changes electrical D. Potential energy and kinetic
energy to mechanical energy energy D
D. A microphone changes elec-
trical energy to sound energy. 7. In which of the following devices
is kinetic energy converted to elec-
A trical energy?
5.
A. an accumulator.
B. An electric motor.
e Ae
Highest level C. A combustion engine
eB
Fig. 3
Lowest level
D. A dynamo D

Physics; Problems and Solutions 28 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.5. ENERGY
8. A body of mass 25kg falls freely
from a height of 10 metres to the »»
»
XX
ground. Calculate its velocity as »X
»
X
» Spring
XX
» ½
X z »
»
XX ½
it hits the ground. »X
»
X
»½=
XX
»»
»
XXX
A. 4.47 ms−1 ½
Mass

½
½
=
B. 10.0 ms−1
C. 14.14 ms−1
Y z
D. 2500 ms−1 C Fig. 4

A mass attached to the end of

a spring moves up and down to
1
mV 2 = mgh maximum and minimum points
2 q X and Y as shown in fig. 4 above.
v = 2gh When the mass is at X the
√
= 2 × 10 × 10
v = 14.14ms−1 A. kinetic energy is maximum,
potential energy is minimum.
9. The energy changes that take place B. kinetic energy is zero, poten-
when a stone falls freely from rest tial energy is maximum.
to the ground can be orderly ar- C. kinetic energy is equal to po-
ranged as: tential energy.
D. kinetic energy and potential
A. Kinetic energy Potential en-
energy are both zero. B
ergy Sound energy Heat en-
ergy 11. Which of the following statements
B. Sound energy Potential en- is true about an electric motor?
ergy Kinetic energy Heat en- It changes
ergy
A. kinetic energy to electrical en-
C. Potential energy Sound en- ergy.
ergy Kinetic energy Heat en- B. electrical energy to light en-
ergy ergy.
D. Potential energy Kinetic en- C. electrical energy to kinetic en-
ergy Heat energy Sound en- ergy.
ergy D
D. chemical energy to electrical
10. energy. C

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 29 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.5. ENERGY CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
12. A ball of 1kg bounces off the 14. An electric motor of efficiency
ground to a height of 2m after 90% operates a water pump. If
falling from a height of 5 m, find it raises 0.9kg of water through
the energy lost. 10m every second. Calculate the
electrical power supplied to the
A. 5J motor.
B. 20 J.
A. 8.1W.
C. 30 J.
B. 81W.
D. 50 J. C
C. 90 W.
D. 100 W. D
Elost = mg∆h
if supplied power is x
= 1 × 10 × (5 − 2)
= 30J mgh
90% of x =
t
90 0.9 × 10 × 10
13. Which of the following is the cor- x =
100 1
rect order of energy changes or 100 0.9 × 10 × 10
conversions in a generator? x = ×
90 1
x = 100
A. Heat energy in cylinder ⇒
Kinetic energy in pistons ⇒
electrical energy. Section B (Structured)
B. Chemical energy from fuel ⇒
Heat energy in cylinders ⇒ 15. A ball A of mass 2kg is released
Kinetic energy in pistons ⇒ from a wall at a height of 0.8m
Rotational kinetic energy in above a rough horizontal surface
the dynamo ⇒ electrical en- along a smooth inclined plane as
ergy shown below;
C. Chemical energy ⇒ Rotational
A
kinetic energy in the dynamo |
Smooth plane
6 A
⇒ Rotational kinetic energy AÀ
0.8m
A
in pistons ⇒ Electrical energy. A
rough horizontal plane

? AP ®
D. Electrical energy ⇒ Rotational ¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡
kinetic energy in dynamo ⇒
Rotational kinetic energy in (i) Find the velocity of the ball
pistons ⇒ sound energy. B at point P.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 30 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.5. ENERGY
From the law of conserva- J. Find the force that acts on the
tioon of energy, loss in po- body. (03 marks)
tential energy is equal to the
gain in kinetic energy. W = F ×D
1 2 W 30
mv = mgh F = =
2 D 5
q = 6N
v = 2gh
√
= 2 × 10 × 0.8 Paper II (Essay)
= 4ms−1
18. .A
º· C

(ii) Find the frictional force re- r

P ¹¸ R
quired to bring the ball to rest
in a distance of 2m along the
rough surface. B
Fig. 1
The diagram in Fig. 1 shows
aqssuming that the 4m/s is
a large smooth bowl ABC. Ex-
along the horizontal plane,
plain what happens when a
using the law of conserva-
ball is released from P
tion of energy, we have;
Kinetic work done Solution
=
energy by friction
1 2 When released from P it losses
mv = F × d it potential energy as it gains ki-
2
1 netic energy which is maximum
× 2 × 42 = F × 2
2 at B.
16 = 2F Past B it rises reducing in speed
F = 8N (kinetic energy) but gaining equiv-
alent potential energy.
There is loss of energy due to fric-
16. Define the Joule. tion with the bowl and air resis-
A joule is the work done tance.
in moving a force of 1N The ball returns and repeats with
through a distance of 1m in decreasing height till when it comes
the directions of the force. to rest at B

17. The work done to move a body 19. (a) (i) State the principle of con-
through a distance of 5 m is 30 servation of energy.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 31 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.5. ENERGY CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(ii) Illustrate the princi-
ple in (a) (i) with refer-
ence to a simple pen-
dulum in a vacuum.
(b) A ball of mass 3.0kg falls ¶³ ¶³
from rest at a height of 4.0m A ¶³
µ´ ¶³E
µ´
B ¶³
onto a horizontal surface µ´
C D
µ´
µ´
and rebounds to a height
of 2.0 m. If we use P.E to mean poten-
(i) Find the kinetic energy tial energy and K.E to mean
just before the ball hits kinetic energy then;
the surface; and just af- The total mechanical energy
ter the collision. Ex- at A i.e.
plain the difference be- P.E at A + K.E at A
tween the two energies.
= P.E at B + K.E at B
(ii) What is its initial mo-
mentum? = P.E at C + K.E at C
= P.E at D + K.E at D
= P.E at E + K.E at E
Solution = Total energy

Or from A to B the body is

losing potential energy and
(a) (i) Principle of conservation of en-
gaining kinetic energy.
ergy states that energy can
neither be created nor be de- From C to E it is loosing ki-
stroyed but it just changes from netic energy and gaining po-
one form to another. tential energy.

(ii) For a simple pendulum in avac-(b) from the question

cum its total energy (i.e. me-
chanical energy) remains con- m = 0.3kg
stant at all points as it oscil- Initial height , H = 4.0m
lates or swings. For the dia- Rebound height , h = 2.0m
gram below; Remember me-
chanical energy is the sum (i) Just before the ball hits the
of potential energy and kinetic ground, its kinetic energy, (K.E.)
energy. is equal to its initial poten-

Physics; Problems and Solutions 32 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.6. PRESSURE
v
u
tial energy i.e. u2
× 12
t
=⇒ V =
1 2 0.3
K.E. = mv √
2 = 80
= mgH = 8.944ms−1
= 0.3 × 10 × 4
= 12Joules Hence Initial momentum, mV ,
is;
Just after the collision, its ki-
netic energy (K.E.) is the same mV = 0.3Kg × 8.944ms−1
as its potential energy at the = 2.6832Kgms−1
rebound height i.e.
1 2
K.E. = mv 1.6 Pressure
2
= mgh
= 0.3 × 10 × 2 Section A (Objectives)
= 6Joules

The difference between these 1. Turbulent flow of a fluid in a pipe

two values of kinetic energy may be caused by
is the energy dissipated or lost
(i) Making the pipe narrow
as;
(ii) Laying the pipe steeply
• Light, if sparks are formed
• Sound, it sound is heard (iii) Making the fluid to flow and
at rebound uniformly.
• Other forms of energy A. (i) only
Kinetic energy just before re- B.(i) and (ii) only
bound is equal to the sum of
C.(ii) and (iii) only
Kinetic energy just after re-
bound and Energy losses D.(i) , (ii) and (iii) A
(ii) Its initial momentum is the 2. In a liquid, pressure is
product of mass and initial
velocity of the body, i.e. mV A. transmitted in a specific di-
But initial kinetic energy, K.E. rection
1 B. transmitted in all directions.
K.E. = mV 2
2 C. decreased with depth.
1
12 = mV 2 D. decreased with density. B
2
Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 33 Physics; Problems and Solutions
1.6. PRESSURE CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
3. 5. A rectangle block of metal weighs
3N and measures (2 × 3 × 4)cm3 .
0.010m What is the greatest pressure it
can exert on a horizontal surface?
0.020m 0.015m

Fig. 5 A. 5.0 × 103 Nm−2

B. 3.75 × 10−2 Nm−2
A box is placed on top of a table C. 2.5 × 103 Nm−2
as shown in Fig. 5, with the di-
mensions indicated. If its mass D. 7.5 × 10−1 Nm−2 A
is 40kg, find the pressure it ex-
erts on the table.
F
40 Pmax =
A. 0.020×0.015
Amin
40 2 3 6
B. 0.015×0.010 A1 = · = m2
100 100 10000
40×10 2 4 8
C. 0.020×0.015 A2 = · = m2
40×10 100 100 10000
D. 0.020×0.010 C 3 4 12
A3 = · = m2
100 100 10000
6
Amin =
F 10000
P = 3N
A P =
mg 6 2
= 10000 m
A = 5000 = 5.0 × 103
40 × 10
=
0.02 × 0.15
6. The mass of a cuboid of dimen-
4. Pressure in a liquid is indepen- sions 4m × 2m × 3m is 48kg.
dent of the The minimum pressure it can ex-
ert is
A. density of the liquid.
A. 20 Nm−2 .
B. Depth below the surface of
B. 40 Nm−2
the liquid.
C. 60 Nm−2 .
C. Pressure exerted on the sur-
face of the liquid above. D. 80 Nm−2 B

D. Cross sectional area and the

shape of the vessel contain- F
ing the liquid. D Pmin =
Amax
Physics; Problems and Solutions 34 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.6. PRESSURE
mg B. 13600×730×10
= 1000
Amax 13600×730
C.
48 × 10 1000×10
= 13600×10
4×3 D. 1000×730 B
= 40

7. In a hydraulic machine P = hρg

730
A. an object displaces its own = × 13600 × 10
1000
weight of fluid. 730 × 13600 × 10
=
B. the pressure transmitted in 1000
a fluid is the same in all di-
rections. 10. A metal cylinder contains a liq-
C. the volume of fluid compressed uid of density 1100kgm−3 . The
is proportional to the applied area of the base of the cylinder
force. is 0.005m2 and the height of liq-
D. an object experiences an up- uid is 5 m. Calculate the force
thrust equal to the weight of exerted by the liquid on the base
fluid displaced. B of the cylinder.

8. Which of the following is true about A. 27.5N

a manometer? B. 55N
C. 220 N
(i) it uses mercury because mer-
cury is a good conductor of D. 275N D
heat.
(ii) It is used for measuring gas F = W = mg
pressures.
= ρvg
(iii) The maximum height of mer- = ρAhg
cury it can support is 760mm.
= 1100 × 0.005 × 5 × 10
A. (i) and (ii) only = 275N
B. (i) and (iii) only. 11. Which one of the following state-
C. (ii) only ments is false? The pressure in
D. (ii) and (iii) only. a liquid
A. at any one point in a liquid
9. What is 730mmHg in Nm2 ?
would not change even when
13600×100×10
A. 730 more liquid is added.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 35 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.6. PRESSURE CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
B. at any one point depends only 13. Which of the following is true
on the depth and density. about pressure in liquids? It
C. at any one point acts equally A. increases with the surface area
in all directions. of the liquid.
D. increases with depth. A B. it directly proportional to the
12. depth.
C. depends on the shape of the
Mercury
6 container.
D. is the same at equal depths
in all liquids. B
6
68cm
14.
A ¨¥
6
3cm
µ´ ¨¥ ?
38cm Mercury 6
?& ?
% w£
74cm
?
££ £¯¯¯¯¯ 6
Fig. 5 ££ £¯¯¯¯¯ ¢ 2cm
£ £¯¯¯¯¯ ¢ ?
Fig. 3
In fig. 5, a fixed mass of dry air
is trapped in bulb A. Calculate The diagram in fig. 3 shows a
the total pressure of the air in A, mercury barometer. What is the
given that atmospheric pressure value of the atmospheric pressure?
is 76cm of mercury. A. 74 cm.
A. 30 cm Hg B. 76 cm.
B. 38 cm Hg C. 77 cm.
C. 46 cm Hg D. 79 cm. A
D. 114 cm Hg D
15. An empty bottle is immersed in
a hot bath and then closed with
a coin as shown below.
P = H +h
ª Coin
= 76 + (68 − 38) Bottle
R
= 76 + 30
= 106cmHg Bath
À­
­
There is no correct option but the 7
¶
answer close to it is 114cmHg Hot water ¶

Physics; Problems and Solutions 36 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.6. PRESSURE
4 2
The bottle is then immersed in a 200 × 100 × 100
m =
cold water bath and turned up- 10
side down. The coin. . . = 0.016kg
m = 0.016 × 1000g
A. does not fall off because the
= 16g
pressure inside the bottle is
greater than that outside the
17. Calculate the increase in pressure
bottle.
which a diver experiences when
B. Does not fall off because the he descends 30 m in sea water of
pressure outside the bottle is density 1.2 × 103 kg m−3 .
greater than that inside the
bottle. A. 3.0 × 102 Nm−2
C. Will fall off because the pres- B. 1.2 × 104 Nm−2
sure inside the bottle is equal C. 3.34 × 104 Nm−2
to that outside the bottle. D. 3.34 × 105 N m−2 D
D. Will fall off because the pres-
sure inside the bottle is greater
than that outside the bottle. ∆P = ∆hρg
B
= 30 × 1.2 × 103 × 10
16. A rectangular block of dimen- = 3.6 × 105
sion 4cm × 2cm × 1cm exerts a
maximum pressure of 200Nm−2 The value nearest to this is 3.34×
when resting on a table. Calcu- 105
late the mass of the block. 18. The diagrams below show the pos-
A. 4g. sible shapes of water dams.
¡
¡
B. 16g. ¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
water ¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
C. 40g. (i) ¡
¡

D. 400g. B ­
­ ­­
­
water ­¿¿­
(ii) ­¶¶

F ¥
Pmax = water ¥
Amin (iii) ¥
mg
=
A Which shapes(s) is/are preferable?
m × 10
200 = 4 2
100 × 100
A. (i) and (ii) only.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 37 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.6. PRESSURE CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
B. (ii) and (iii) only. 1. Density of the fluid
C. (i) and (iii) only. 2. Diameter, size or
D. (iii) only. B shape of the moving
body.

Section B (Structured) 21. Explain briefly how a person is

able to drink using a straw.
Atmospheric pressure
19. The diagram in fig. 8 below,
acts on the surface of the
shows an instrument used for mea-
drink pushing it up the
suring gas pressure in a labora-
straw to the drinker’s
tory.
mouth.
Atmospheric pressure
? Paper II (Essay)
¡ 6
¡
¡
¡
,
,
, 10cm
, 22. (a) (i) Explain why one feels
,
,
,
, more pain when pricked
,
,
¾ ,
,
, ?
,
·?
´
with a needle than when
· ´
to gas supply
Gas pressure · ´ pricked with a nail.
Fig. 8
(ii)State the assumption
made
Find the pressure in N m−2 of the
(b)With the aid of a labeled
gas if atmospheric pressure is 76cmHg.
diagram, explain how a force
[Density of mercury = 13.6×103 kgm−3 ]
pump works.
gas pressure, P (c)Calculate the pressure ex-
P = P◦ + hρg erted on the ground by a
box of mass 10kg when cor-
= Hρg + hρg
responding area of contact
= (H + h)ρg is 2m2 .
= (760 + 100)ρg
= (860mm) ρg Solution
860
= × 13.6 × 103 × 10 (a) (i) The needle has a tip with
1000
= 116, 960P a a smaller area compared
to the nail hence under the
same force, the needle ex-
20. State two factors which affect erts more³or a much
´
higher
F
terminal velocity. pressure P = A compared

Physics; Problems and Solutions 38 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.6. PRESSURE
to the nail, therefore caus- • The atmospheric pressure
ing more pain. acting on the water sur-
(ii) The assumption made is face forces the water to rise
the force acting on the two up into the cylinder.
is assumed to be of the same All in all, the water is trans-
magnitude and normal to ferred to the cylinder in the
the area of the contact. first stroke via valve A.
(b) How a force pump works During the down stroke
chamber compressed air On moving the plunger down:
Plunger Valve A closes due to;
N ?
U
• Its weight and
• Weight of water above it.
Cylinder
R o Valve B opens because the ap-
o valve B plied force below it, is greater
??? A ??? ?
A than the force above it. When
A
AA valve B opens, it allows wa-
valve A
Delivery
ter to flow from the cylinder
tube
to this chamber. When this
This pump is operated by mov- chamber is full water rises
ing the plunger up and down in the exit pipe to a greater
manually or using a machine height depending on the force
or engine (e.g. an electric mo- applied on the plunger.
tor). When the up stroke is now
During the up stroke: performed and the cycle re-
Assuming it was empty, when peated, water flows up the cylin-
the plunger is moved up; der.
Valve B closes due to; (c)
• Its weight Force
Pressure =
• Weight of water above it(if Area
F
it is there), and P =
A
Valve A opens due to:- W
=
• The sucking nature of the A
mg
empty space (nature ab- =
A
hors a vacuum) or we can 10 × 10
say due to the low pres- =
2
sure region created. = 50pa

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 39 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.6. PRESSURE CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
orP = 50N m−2 (a) pressure is the force acting
normally or perpendicularly
on an area of 1m2
23. (a) Define the term pressure
OR
(b) (i) Describe how a simple
mercury barometer can Pressure is the force acting
be set up to measure the normally per unit area.
atmospheric pressure. (b) (i) how to set up a mercury
(ii) The difference between barometer
the atmospheric pres- • fill a long thin test-tube
sure at the top and bot- closed at one end with
tom of a mountain is 1× mercury.
104 N m−2 if the density
of air is 1.25kgm−3 , cal-
culate the height of the ´´
mountain.
´´
(c) (i) State the principle of
±°
transmission of pressure
in fluids. • Cover it with a short
(ii) Give one assumption beaker ensuring that it
on which the principle is air-tight.
is based.
(iii) State two applications
´
of the principle. ´´
´
´´
(iv) In fig. 1, piston A has
diameter of 14cm while ´°
´
±
B has diameter of 280cm.
If a force of 77N is ex- • Invert the set up such
erted on piston A, cal- that the tube is on or
culate the force exerted in the beaker and pour
by piston B. in mercury.
Piston B
Torricellian
¨ ¥ vacuum
j

Piston A

Fluid
j
Fig. 1
• The mercury thread in
Solution the tube may touch the

Physics; Problems and Solutions 40 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.6. PRESSURE
top of the tube or not; of air
if it does not touch the
∆PHg = ∆Pair
top, that space created
is a vacuum1 . ButP = hρg
The height of the mercury ∆P = (∆h)ρg
thread in the tube from HHg ρHg g = Hair ρair g
the surface of the mercury but this pressure differ-
in the beaker is a mea- ence is known to be 1 ×
sure of the atmosphere pres- 104 N m−2
sure acting on the mercury
surface this height is called ∆PHg = ∆Hair ρair g
the barometric height. 10 N m−2 = ∆Hair × 1.25 × 10
4

Atmospheric pressure

1 × 104
²¯ =⇒ ∆Hair =
1.25 × 10
¡
¡
6 = 800metres
H◦

¡ since this difference in height

¡
² ¡
¡¡
of air is from the top and
¡
bottom of a mountain, then
??? ? ?? ?? the height of the moun-
¡
¡
tain is 800 metres .
The value of the atmosphere (c) (i) the principle of transmis-
pressure P◦ is obtained as sion of pressure in fluids
states that; when a fluid
P◦ = H◦ ρg (liquid or gas) is held in
where a container at rest and a
H◦ is barometric height force is applied at any point
ρ is density of mercury used on the fluid, pressure is
g is the acceleration due equally transmitted to all
to gravity. parts of the fluid in all di-
(ii) height of a mountain, rections.
Pressure difference in terms (ii) The above principle as-
of the height of mercury sumes that all parts of the
is equal to pressure dif- fluid are at the same height
ference in terms of the height above the ground. Or it
1
But it is not a true vacuum because it contains
assumes pressure does not
some mercury vapour depend on depth.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 41 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.6. PRESSURE CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(iii) this principle is applied hence the force exerted by
in piston B is 30800N
• Hydraulic brakes
24. (a) (i) Define pressure and state
• Hydraulic press
its units.
• Hydraulic jake
(ii) With the aid of a dia-
(iv) Applying Pascal’s prin- gram, describe how you
ciple, would show that the pres-
Pressure under piston A sure of a liquid is inde-
is equal to Pressure trans- pendent of cross-sectional
mitted to piston B area and shape
Force on A Force on B (b) Two manometers P and
=
Area of A Area of B Q contain a liquid X, and
FA FB
= water respectively at the
Area of A Area of B
same level. They are then
connected to a thistle fun-
FA nel covered with a rubber
FB = × Area B
Area A membrane as shown in fig.
Area B
= FA × 3.
Area A P Q
6 6
h1 h2

Area B πrB2 ? 6
d
?
But = > ? ¯
Area A πrA2 Liquid X 3 }¯ Water
M
Dilute acid
Thistle funnel
rB2 Fig. 3
= 2
rA When the thistle funnel is
³ ´2
dB lowered into a beaker con-
2
= ³ ´2 taining a dilute acid of den-
dA
2 sity 1200kgm−3 , the heights
2
dB h1 and h2 are 15cm and 12cm
=
d2A respectively, Find the:
à !
dB 2 (i) ratio of the density of
=
dA liquid x to that of wa-
ter,
à !
dB 2 (ii) depth d of the thistle
hence FB = FA ×
dA funnel below the sur-
à !
280cm 2 face of the dilute acid.
= 77 ×
14cm
= 30800N Solution

Physics; Problems and Solutions 42 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.6. PRESSURE
(a) (i) Pressure is the force act- (i) for the manometer, con-
ing normally on an area sidering the pressure at
of 1 m2 or pressure is the the points which are at the
force acting normally per same depth in liquid x and
unit area. water;
its units are N m−2 or pas-
P◦ + h1 ρx g = P◦ + h2 ρw g
cals
h1 ρx g = h2 ρw g
(ii) an experiment to show
that pressure in a liquid h1 ρx = h2 ρw
ρx h2
is independent of cross-sectional =
area and shape of a con- ρw h1
12cm
tainer. =
15cm
• poor water in the con- = 0.8
tainer shown below,
A
B C D The ratio of the density
of liquid x to that of wa-
ter is 0.8.
(ii) the depth, d;
The water level will be
at the same height from P◦ + dρdil g = P◦ + h2 ρw g
the bottom for all the
dρdil. g = h2 ρw g
tubes A, B, C and D.
This shows that;
– Pressure does not de- h2 ρw g
d =
pend on cross sectional ρdil. g
area otherwise the level h2 ρw
=
of water in A would ρdil.
not be the same as 12
m × 1000
= 100
that in C. 1200
– Pressure does not de- = 0.1m
pend on the shape of = 10cm
the container other-
hence the depth d is 10cm.
wise the level of wa-
ter in tube B would 25. (a) Explain each of the follow-
not be the same as ing observations.
that in C. (i) An inflated bicycle tube
(b) From question h1 =15cm, h2 may burst when left in
=12cm a hot place.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 43 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(ii) Large water reservoirs of gravity is near the ground
are much wider at the making it more stable oth-
base than at the top. erwise the tank will not
(b) Fig. 3 shows the struc- be stable and it can eas-
ture of a force pump. ily be overturned by the
water.

Plunger - 500N (b) (i) when the plunger is moved

?
up, valve P closes due to
= Air
weight of water above it.
3
9 Cylinder C And valve M opens due to
P
0.4m2 higher atmospheric pres-
M sure allowing water to en-
Water level
? ? ? ? ? ? ter into the first cylinder.
When the plunger is moved
Fig. 3
down valve M closes and
P opens due to the higher
(i) Describe the action of
pressure exerted by the plunger,
the pump.
allowing the water prevoiusly
(ii) If a downward force lifted to enter cylinder C.
of 500N is exerted on The effect is, water from
the plunger whose sur- the well has been pumped
face area is 0.4m2 cal- to cylinder C.
culate the pressure which
(ii)
forces water into cylin-
der C . F = 500N
A = 0.4m2
Solution
P = ?
(a) (i) this is because when this F
But P =
bicycle tube is heated, the A
molecules of the gas in it 500N
=
begin to move with a greater 0.4m2
speed, this lead to higher = 1250N m−2
pressure which results into P = 1250P a
the bursting of the tube.
(ii) large water reservoirs are
much wider at the base 1.7 Motion
than at the top so as to
ensure that their centre Section A (Objectives)

Physics; Problems and Solutions 44 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
Missing graph

1. Which of the following physical 50

properties changes when a body

is moved from the earth to the 40

moon?

Distance (m)
30
A. Mass
B. Volume 20

C. Weight
10

D. Density C
0
2. A car of mass 1200kg moving with 0 2 4 6 8
Time (s)
10 12 14 16

a velocity of 60ms−1 collides head-

on with another car of mass 1000kg Which of the following statements
at rest and they stick together. are true?
Calculate their velocity after col-
lision. (i)the dog’s time for the race was
6s.
1200+1000
A. 1000×60 ms−1 (ii)the dog overtook the man 9.6s
B. 1200+1000
ms−1 after the man started running
1200×60

C. 1000×60
ms−1 (iii)the man’s speed does not change
1200+1000
after 10s.
1200×60
D. 1200+1000 ms−1 D (iv)the dog run as shorter dis-
tance than the man.
momentum after collision ie equal
to momentum before collision A. (i), (ii) and (iii)

(m1 + m2 )V = m1 U1 + m2 U2 B. (i) and (iii) only.

m 1 U1 C. (ii) and (iv)
V =
m1 + m2 D. (iv) only. A
1200 × 60
=
1200 + 1000 4. The product of mass and accelera-
tion is
3. A man runs a race against a dog.
the distance-time graph for the A. Force
race is shown below; B. Inertia

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 45 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
C. Velocity D. Motion is a retardation. C
D. Momentum A 8. When a steadily increasing force
5. The ticker-time tapes below show is applied to a moving object, all
the motion of four trolleys trol- the following change except
leys moving from left to right. Which A. Acceleration
one of them is accelerating?
- direction of motion B. Momentum
u u u u C. Speed
A.
u u u u u u D. Mass D
B.
u u u uu 9. When a car is suddenly brought
C.
to rest, a passenger jerks forward
u u u u u
because of
D. Fig.1 A
A. inertia
6. A body of mass 2 kg initially mov-
B. friction
ing with a constant velocity of 10ms
−1
is subjected to a force of 5N for C. gravity
2s. The change in momentum of D. momentum A
−1
the body in kgm is
10. A body moves with uniform ac-
A. 10. celeration if
B. 20 A. its momentum remains con-
C. 30 stant.
D. 50 A B. it covers equal distances in
equal times.
C. the velocity changes by equal
∆(mv) = F t = 5 × 2 amount in equal times.
= 10N s D. the net force on the body is
= 10kgms−1 zero. C
11. Which one of the following state-
7. A straight line through the origin
ments is true when a stone of mass
of a velocity-time graph shows that
2kg and that of 1kg are released
the
from the same point at the same
A. Velocity is uniform. time?
B. Distance is increasing uniformly. A. both masses will hit the ground
C. Acceleration is uniform. at the same time.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 46 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
B. the 2 kg mass will hit the ground D. y + xt B
first.
Using the first equation of mo-
C. the 1kg mass will hit the ground tion V = U + at
first.
D. they fall with different speeds. V = U + at
V −U
⇒a =
A t
y−x
12. A cyclist traveling at a constant P =
t
acceleration of 2ms−2 passes through
two points A and B in a straight 14. A car of mass 1200kg moving
line. If the speed at A is 10ms−1 with a constant velocity of 60ms−1
and the points are 75m apart, find is retarded uniformly to rest in
the speed at B. 12s. Calculate the retarding force.

A. 15.8ms−1 . A. (1200 × 12)N

B. 17.3ms−1 . B. (1200 × 5)N

C. 20.0ms−1 . C. (1200 × 10)N

D. 400.0ms−1 . C D. (1200 × 60)N B

√ F = ma
V = U 2 + 2as
√ = 1200 × a
= 102 + 2 × 2 × 75 "
V −U
#
√ = 1200 ×
V = 400 t
= 20 0 − 60
= 1200 ×
12
= 1200 × −5
13. A body moves with a uniform ac- = −(1200 × 5)
celeration of P ms−2 . If its initial
velocity is x ms−1 and it travels 15. The gradient of a velocity-time
for t s to attain a final velocity graph represents the
of y ms−1 , find the value of P in A. speed of the body.
terms of x, y and t.
B. velocity of the body
A. x + yt C. acceleration of the body.
y−x
B. t D. the distance covered by the
C. y+x body. C
t

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 47 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
16. A Newton is defined as the C. 50cm s−1
A. unit of force D. 100cm s−1 D
B. force which produces an ac-
celeration of 1ms−2 .
C. Force which gives a mass of d
1kg an acceleration of 1ms−2 . v =
t
D. Force which gives any mass 10cm
=
an acceleration of 1ms−2. C 4T
10cm
17. An object thrown from an aero- = 4
50 s
plane reaches a constant veloc- 500
ity known as terminal velocity be- =
4
cause the = 125cms−1 .
A. weight of the body at a given
place does not vary. The only answer near to this is
B. sum of the upthrust and the 100cm/s
viscous force will be equal to
the weight of the body. 19.
C. sum of the upthrust and the
viscous force on the body is Velocity
constant. 6

D. upthrust experienced by the

body is constant. B -
A. Time
18. The ticker tape shown in fig. 4
was pulled through a ticker timer
Velocity
which makes 50 dots per second. 6

E ¾ 10cm -
F
j j j j j j -
B. Time
Fig. 4
Velocity
The speed at which the tape was 6

pulled is
A. 10cm s−1 -
Time
B. 25cm s−1 C.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 48 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
If the distance between succes-
Velocity
6 sive dots is 2cm, calculate the speed
of the body.

-
A. 0.01cms−1
Time B. 50cms−1
D.
C. 100cms−1
Which one of the above sketches
D. 250cms−1 C
represents uniformly accelerated
motion? D
1 1
20. A body is said to be moving with T = = = 0.02s
f 50
uniform velocity when the rate D = 2cm = 0.02m
of change of distance
v =
A. acceleration with time is con- time
0.02m 1m 100cm
stant. v = = =
0.02s 1s 1s
B. velocity with time is constant. v = 100cms −1

C. distance with time is constant.

23. A lift accelerates uniformly from
D. displacement with time is con- rest for 3 s. It then moves at
stant. D uniform velocity for 15s then de-
21. A force of 1N acts on a mass of celerates uniformly for 2s before
0.05kg initially at rest. Its accel- coming to rest. Which of the fol-
eration is lowing velocity-time graphs rep-
resents the motion of the lift
−2
A. 0.05m s V
6
B. 0.5 m s−
C. 2 m s−2 .
¡
−2 ¡ -
D. 20 m s D A. 3 18 t(s)
V
6
L
L
L
F LL
a =
m -
1 B. 3 t(s) 18 20
= V
0.05 6
L
= 20 L
L
LL
22. A tape is pulled through a ticker -
timer which has frequency of 50Hz. C. 3 t(s) 18

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 49 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
V
6
Displacement (m)
6

-
D. 3 t(s) 18 20 D
-

D. Time(s)
24. Which of the following displace- A
ment time graphs shows a car
moving away from traffic lights 25. A ticker timer is connected to
at a steady speed? the mains supply of frequency 40HZ .
find the time it takes to print three
consecutive dots.
Displacement (m) A. 0.08s
6
B. 0.25s
C. 0.050s
D. 0.75s C
The space between 3 dots is 2.
-
t = 2T
A. Time(s) 1
= 2×
Displacement (m) f
6 2
=
40
= 0.05s

26. Fig. 4 shows a velocity-time graph

- for a moving body. Which of the
Time(s) following statements is true about
B the motion of the body?
Displacement (m) Velocity
6 6

A B
¢
¢
¢
¢
¢
- ¢ -
0
Time(s) Time
C. Fig. 4
Physics; Problems and Solutions 50 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
A. Velocity of the body is con- 29. Find the force required to give a
stant between O and A. mass of 500g an acceleration of
B. Velocity of the body is con- 2 × 10−2 ms2 .
stant between A and B. A. 1 × 10−2 N.
C. The body is accelerating be- B. 1 × 101 N.
tween A and B.
C. 1 × 102 N
D. The body is not accelerating
D. 1 × 104 N. A
between O and A.

B
F = ma
27. A boxer while training noticed 500
that a punch bag is difficult to = × 2 × 10−2
1000
set in motion and difficult to stop. F = 1 × 10−2 N
What property accounts for this
observation?
A. size 30. The graph in fig. 1 describes the
motion of a particle. Between which
B. Inertia. points is the particle at rest?
C. Friction. distance (m)
6
D. Weight of the bag B Q R

B
28. A body of mass 25kg falls freely B
P B
from a height of 10 metres to the B
B
ground. Calculate its velocity as B
B S-
it hits the ground.
O
Time(s)
A. 4.47 ms−1 Fig. 1

B. 10.0 ms−1 A. 0 and P.

−1
C. 14.14 ms B. P and Q
−1
D. 2500 ms C C. Q and R
D. R and S. C
1
mV 2 = mgh 31. Eggs packed in a soft, shock-
2 q absorbing box are placed in a car.
v = 2gh When the car suddenly starts or
√
= 2 × 10 × 10 stops moving, the eggs do not crack
v = 14.14ms−1 because

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 51 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
A. no force acts on them. A because the slope of graph A
B. the force acts on them for only which is velocity goes on decreas-
a short time. ing as time increases and this means
retardation.
C. the force is small and acts for
a longer time. 34. A body of mass 20kg moves with
a uniform velocity of 4 ms−1 from
D. the force causes fast change
rest. Find its momentum.
of momentum. C
A. 5kg ms−1
32. A bullet of mass 0.02kg is fired
B. 80kg ms−1
with a speed of 40 ms−1 . Calcu-
late its kinetic energy. C. 160kg ms−1
D. 320kg ms−1 B
A. 0.4J.
B. 0.8J.
C. 16J Momentum = mass × velocity
= 20kg × 4ms−1
D. 32J C
= 80kgms−1

35. A car starts from rest and accel-

1 erates uniformly at the rate of
Ke = mV 2
2 2 ms−2 for 14 of a minute. Find
1
= × 0.02 × 402 the velocity of the car after this
2
= 16J time.
A. 0.5 ms−1
33. B. 12 ms−1
º·
Distance
6 A
C. 15 ms−1
º·
¹¸
B D. 30 ms−1 . D
º·
¹¸
C
º·
¹¸
D
¹¸ V = U + at
1
- = 0 + 2 × ( × 60)
Time 4
= 0 + 2 × 15
= 30
Which of the distance-time graphs
above represents abody retard- 36. The graph in figure 1 shows a
ing? A speed-time graph of a body

Physics; Problems and Solutions 52 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
6 6
30
V

20 -
speed A B. t
A
ms−1 A 6
10 A
A V
A
A
A - -
0 2 4 6 8 C. t
Fig. 1 Time (s)
6

Calculate the distance traveled V

during retardation
-
A. 20 m. D. t

B. 40 m. A
C. 80 m 38. A force of 10N acts on a body
D. 100 m. A and produces an acceleration of
2ms−2 . The mass of the body is
distance is equal to area below
the velocity-time graph, the re- A. 0.2kg
tardation region is a triangle. B. 5.0kg.
1 C. 20.0kg
d = bh
2 D. 50.0kg. B
1
= × (6 − 4) × 20
2
= 20m
From F = M a
37. A boy throws a ball up in the air F
m =
and it goes up and falls back to a
his hand. Which one of the fol- 10N
m =
lowing sketches of velocity-time 2ms−2
= 5kg
graphs represents the motion of
the ball up to the time it is re- 39. The time period of a simple pen-
ceived back? dulum
6
A. decreases as the length of the
V ·· pendulum decreases.
·
·
· - B. increases as the mass of the
A. t pendulum bob decreases.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 53 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
Velocity (ms−1 )
C. increases as the mass of the 6
pendulum bob increases.
D. decreases as the length of the
pendulum increases. A
r
l
T = 2π g -
time(s)
40. The velocity-time graph for a car
is as shown in fig. 2. Which of the following best de-
scribes the motion represented by
100 6
¯
¯ B the velocity-time graphs shown
80 B
¯ B in the diagram above?
80 ¯ B
¯ B
60 ¯ B
A. decelerated motion.
Velocity (ms−1 ) ¯
40 B
¯ B B.Uniformly accelerated motion.
20 ¯ B
0
BB - C.Non-uniformly accelerated mo-
0 20 40 60 80 80 100
Time (s)
tion.
Fig. 2
D.Uniform velocity motion C

Find the total distance the car 42. When a stone is thrown horizon-
travels tally from a high tower, which
of the following explains its mo-
A. 2.0 × 103 m. tion.
B. 3.0 × 103 m. (i) vertical acceleration is con-
C. 4.0 × 103 m. stant.
D. 7.0 × 103 m D (ii) vertical acceleration is increas-
ing.
(iii) horizontal velocity is constant.
1
d = 40(120) + 40 × 100 A. (i) only.
2
1 B. (i) and (ii) only.
+ × 20 × 100
2 C. (iii) only.
= 2400 + 4000 + 1000
= 7, 400 D. (i) and (iii) only. D
= 7.4 × 103 43. Which of the graphs below best
describe the motion of a stone which
41. falls freely from a height of 20m?

Physics; Problems and Solutions 54 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
Distance(m)
20m
6 Duration of the eleventh second
is 1s
- 1
A. 0 Time(s) S = ut + at2
Distance(m) 2
6 1
= 20 × 1 + × 2 × 12
20m

2
- = 20 + 1
B. 0 Time(s)
= 21
Distance(m)
20m
6
45. A stone of mass 2.5g is thrown
- with an average force of 5.0N. Find
C. 0 Time(s)
Distance(m) the average acceleration in ms−1
20m
6
A. 5.0 × 104
- B. 2.0 × 10−3
D. 0 Time(s) C
C. 2.5m−1
The slope which is velocity must D. 2.0 × 103 D
be increasing, from a slope of zero
at a height of 20m. and this is in
figure C. F
a =
m
44. A car is uniformly accelerated from 5
rest and after 10s, acquires a speed =
2.5 × 10−3
of 20 ms−1 . How far does it move = 2 × 103
during the eleventh second?

A 20m
46. An object of mass 2kg moving at
B. 21m 5 ms−1 , collides with another ob-
C. 100m ject of mass 3kg which is at rest.
Find the velocity of the two bod-
D. 121m B
ies if they stick together after col-
lision.

V −U A. 1.0ms−1
a =
t B. 2.0ms−1
20 − 0
= C. 2.5 ms−1
10
= 2ms−2 D. 5.0 ms−1 B

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 55 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
= 5
   
initial  final h = H − ∆h
 =  
h = 20 − 5
momentum momentum
2 × 5 = (3 + 2)V = 15
V = 2 Section B (Structured)

47. A bullet of mass 5g is fired at a 49. An object of mass 2kg is mov-

speed of 400 ms−1 How much en- ing with a velocity of 1ms−1 . It
ergy does it have? is then acted on by a force of 5N
through a distance of 16m.
1 2
A. 2 × 5 × 10 × 400 Joules Calculate;
1 3
B. 2 × 5 × 10 × 400 Joules (a) The acceleration produced by
1 −3
C. 2 × 5 × 10 × 400 × 400 Joules the force.
1 2
D. 2 × 5 × 10 × 400 × 400 Joules
From F = ma
C It has kinetic energy F
a =
m
ke = mv 2 5
=
1 2
= × 5 × 10−3 × 400 × 400 = 2.5N kg −1
2
or a = 2.5ms−2
48. A stone is released from a height
of 20m above the ground. Find (b) The final velocity of the ob-
its height above the ground when ject.
its speed is 10 ms−1
A. 5m V = ?
B. 10m U = 1m/s
C. 15m a = 2.5ms−2
s = 16m
D. 20 m C
V2 = U 2 + 2as
= 12 + 2 × 2.5 × 16
1 2 = 1 + 80
mg∆h = mv
2 v2 = 81
1 v2 √
∆h = v = 81
2g
1 100 v = 9m/s
= ×
2 10
Physics; Problems and Solutions 56 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
(c) the work done by the force.
d
V =
³t ´
Work = F × d 8
m
= ³100 ´
= 5 × 16 5
50 s
= 80J −1
= 0.8ms

50. (a) What is meant by uniformly The time taken is measured

accelerated motion? from the middle of the 4cm
length to the middle of the
It is the motion where ac-
8cm length
celeration is constant or it
is the type of motion where 1
t = 3 12 ×
the rate of change of velocity 50
with time is constant. = 0.07s
V −U
a =
(b) Fig. 10 shows dots made on t
a ticker tape pulled by a trol- 0.8 − 1
=
ley through a ticker-timer. 0.07
a ≈ −2.857ms−2

w w w w w w w w It is deceleration because it
4cm
is negative.
¾ -¾ 8cm -

Fig.10
51. An object is released from rest at
a height of 20cm above the ground
Describe the motion of the trol-
ley, if the frequency is 50Hz.
(i) Describe the energy charges
The trolley accelerates at a which take place.
V −U
rate a given by a = t , cal- It has potential energy which
culated as follows; changes to kinetic energy as
d it falls, on hitting the ground
U = it becomes sound, light and
³t ´
4
m other energy forms.
= ³100 ´
2
50 s (ii) Calculate the speed with which
= 1ms −1 the object hits the ground.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 57 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
Kinetic energy gained is (i) Sketch a velocity –time graph
equal to the potential en- of the motion.
ergy lost 6
25

1 2 Velocity (m/s)
mv = mgh
2 q
v = 2gh
√
= 2 × 10 × 20 -
= 20ms−1 5 13
Time (s)

(iii) Find the total distance trav-

52. (a) What is uniform velocity? eled.
This is the rate of change 1
of displacement with time D = LW + bh
2
which is constant 1
= 5 × 25 + × 25 × 8
(b) A car traveling at 20ms−1 is 2
= 225m
accelerated for 10s at 2ms−2 .
Calculate the total distance
Paper II (Essay)
covered during this time.
54. (a) State Newton’s laws of mo-
1
S = U t + at2 tion
2
1 (b) A block of mass 50kg is pulled
= 20 × 10 + × 2 × 102 from rest along a horizon-
2
= 200 + 100 tal surface by a rope tied
= 300m to one face of the block as
shown in Fig. 1.

53. (a) What is meant by uniform ve- 50kg -

220N
locity? 120N ¾
it is the rate of change of Fig. 1
displacement with time (i)Find the acceleration of
which is constant. the block
(b) a car traveling with a uni- (ii)Calculate the distance
form velocity of 25ms−1 for moved by the block in
5s brakes and then comes to 4.0s.
rest under a uniform decel- (iii)What is the reaction
eration in 8 s. of the surface on the block.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 58 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
(iv)Compare the work done
by the tension in the rope
(ii) Using S = ut + 12 at2
during the 4.0s interval
with kinetic energy gained. 1
S = 0×4+ × 2 × 42
2
Solution = 0 + 42
= 16m
(a) Newton’s laws
• First law states that a body
will stay in its state of rest (iii) From third law of mo-
or uniform motion in a straight tion
line unless a force acts on Reaction = −weight
it.
= mg
• Second law states that the
= 50 × 10
rate of change of momen-
tum is directly proportional = 500N
to the force acting on the
body. (iv) Work done by tension in
• Third law of motion states the rope, WR
that all forces exist in op-
WR = Tension × distance
posite pairs or for every
action there in an equal = 220 × 16
and opposite reaction. = 3520Joules
(b) (i) The tension in the rope is
220N . The friction force
between the block and the Kineticenergy = K.Eg
horizontal surface is 120N.
Net force, F 1
K.E.g = mV 2
F =220N − 120N 2
butV = u + at
F =100N
= 0 +2×4
But F =ma
= 8m/s
ma =100N
1 2
50kg × a =100N K.Eg = mv
2
100N 1
a = = × 50 × 82
50kg 2
= 2N/kg = 1600Joules
ora = 2ms−2

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 59 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(v) The tension in the rope 25ms−1 , find the average force
does more work than the exerted on the cylinder.
gain in the kinetic energy,
the difference is the work Solution
done against friction or work
(a) (i) Velocity is the rate of change
done by friction
of displacement with time
Wf = 3520 − 1600 (ii) Momentum is the prod-
= = 1920J uct of mass and velocity
of the body in the direc-
tion of the body.
or (b) An iron ball dropped from a
Wf = F × D cliff takes 2.5s to reach the
= 120 × 16 bottom of the cliff.
= 1920J (i) The speed with which it
strikes the bottom
Using the first equation
55. (a) Define the following: of motion
(i) Velocity V = U + at
(ii) Momentum
But U =, 0m/s it was dropped,
(b) A small iron ball dropped
i.e. dropped from rest.
from the top of a vertical
a = 10ms−2 because it is
cliff takes 2.5s to reach the
falling down. Remember
bottom of the cliff. Find
that if it was thrown up
(i) the speed with which it would be −10ms−2 and
it strikes the bottom. t = 2.5s
(ii) the height of the cliff. hence
(c) Explain briefly why a per- V = U + at
son feels heavier than usual
= 0 + 10 × 2.5
at the instant a lift starts
accelerating upwards. = 25ms−1
(d) A valve of a cylinder con- (ii) height of the cliff is the
taining 12kg of compressed distance moved by the iron
gas is opened and the cylin- ball. We can use the sec-
der empties in 90s. If the ond equation of motion or
gas flows out of the noz- the third equation of mo-
zle at an average speed of tion.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 60 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
Using the second equation speed of gas at nozzle, V =
of motion 25ms−1
1 To get the average force act-
h = U t + at2
2 ing on the body, we use the
1 second law of motion, which
= U t + gt2
2 states that the rate of change
−1
ButU = 0ms of momentum of a body is equal
1
h = 0 + gt2 to the force acting on it i.e.
2
1 2
= gt Force = mV − mU
2
1
= × 10 × (2.5)2
2
= 0.5 × 10 × 6.25 but initially the gas in the
container is at rest hence ini-
= 5 × 6.25
tial momentum is zero
h = 31.25m
mV
OR Average force =
t
Using the third equation 12 × 25
=
of motion, we have 90
= 3.33N
V 2 = U 2 + 2as
V 2 − U2 56. (a) State the principle of con-
=⇒ s =
2a servation of linear momen-
252 − 02 tum.
=
2 × 10
625 (b) A trolley P of mass 150g
= moving with a velocity of
20
s = 31.25m 20ms−1 collides with another
stationery trolley Q of mass
(c)When a lift starts accelerat-
100g. If P and Q move to-
ing up with acceleration, a,
gether after collision, Cal-
the net force acting on the
culate:
floor of the lift due to our weight
increases from mg to m(g+a) (i) the momentum of P be-
hence one feels heavier. fore collision,
(d)From the question mass of com- (ii) the velocity with which
pressed air , m = 12kg P and Q move after col-
time taken to empty the cylin- lision.
der, t = 90s (c)

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 61 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
V (ms−1 )
30
6 mass of trolley, Q, mq
mq = 100g
time (s)
- 100
0
5 10 12 = kg
1000
-10 1
= kg
10
Fig. 1

Fig. 1 represents a veloc- Initial velocity of trolley P, Up =

ity - time graph for the mo- 20ms−1
tion of a car. If the mass
let the common velocity be V ms−1
of the car is 500 kg, find;
(i) Momentum of P
(i) the distance it traveled
from the start of its mo- = mass × velocity
tion. = m p × Up
(ii) The time it takes to 150
= kg × 20ms−1
get back to the start- 1000
ing point if its velocity = 3kgms−1
is then maintained con- (ii) Total momentum before
stant, collision is equal to total
(iii) The momentum of the momentum after collision
car just before deceler- Total momentum before col-
ation. lision is
Solution = mq Uq + mp Up
(a) the principle of conservation 100 150
= ×0+ × 20
of linear momentum states that 1000 1000
when two or more bodies col- = 3
lide their total momentum be-
fore collision is equal to their total momentum after col-
total momentum after colli- lision is
sion provided no external forces
acts on them. = (mq + mp ) V
à !
(b) from question , 100 150
= + ×V
mass of trolley P, mp 1000 1000
250
mp = 150g = V
1000
150 1
= kg = V
100 4

Physics; Problems and Solutions 62 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
equating the two, we have (ii)

1 Total distance
3 =
V Time =
4 velocity
3×4 = V 235m − 10m
=
V = 12ms−1 10s
225
=
(c) (i) Distance traveled is equal 10
= 22.5seconds
to Area below the veloc-
ity time graph for the given (iii)Momentum
figure we have the areas
A1 , A2 and A3 as shown = mass × velocity
below = 500kg × 30ms−1
= 15000kgms−1
6
30
57. (a) Define displacement.
Velocity in ms−1 A1
(b) Two vehicles A and B ac-
- celerate uniformly from rest.
0 5 10
A2 12 15 Vehicle A attains a max-
time in seconds
-10
imum velocity of 30ms−1
Total distance, d in 10s while vehicle B at-
tains a maximum velocity
d = area A1 + area A2 of 40ms−1 in the same time.
1 1 Both vehicles maintain these
= h(a + b) + bh
2 2 velocities for 6s. They are
1 1 then decelerated such that
= · 30 · (10 + 5) + · 10 · 2
2 2 A comes to rest after 6s
= 225 + 10
while B comes to rest af-
= 235metres ter 4s.
hence the total distance (i) Sketch on the same axes
traveled is 235 metres a velocity-time graph for
Note that the Area A2 would the motion of the vehi-
be negative if we were ob- cles.
taining displacement, but (ii) Calculate the velocity
here distance, a scalar quan- of each vehicle 18s af-
tity, should not be nega- ter the start.
tive, so we take its mag- (iii) How far will the two
nitude. vehicles be from one an-

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 63 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
other during this mo-
ment in (ii) above?
V = U + at
(d) Describe a simple exper-
= 30 + −5 × 2
iment to measure the ac-
celeration due to gravity. = 30 − 10
= 20ms−1
Solution
(a) Displacement is the distance
moved in a given direction velocity of vehicle B after
6 18s from the start is; us-
B
40 ing
A
Velocity 30
in ms−1

- t = 18 − 16
(b) (i) 0 10 16
time in seconds
20 22
= 2 seconds
(ii) deceleration of A, aa
V −u
aa =
t V = U + at
−30
= = 40 + −10 × 2
6
= −5ms−2 = 40 − 20
= 20ms−1
deceleration of B (iii) how far these vehicles
V −u will be from the one an-
ab =
t other, is obtained as the
0 − 40
= difference in the distance
4
moved by the two vehicles.
= −10m/s2
Distance moved by vehi-
cle A in 18 s, dA is equal
using the first equation of to area below the velocity-
motion. time graph
the velocity of vehicle A 1
after 18s from start is; us- dA = h(a + b)
2
ing 1
= · 30 · (22 + 6)
2
t = 18 − 16 = 420 metres
= 2 seconds Also distance moved by ve-
hicle B in 18 s, dB is equal

Physics; Problems and Solutions 64 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
to area below the velocity- • When you lastly count the
time graph twentieth oscillation stop
the stop clock.
1
dB = h(a + b)
2 • Read and record the time
1 for twenty oscillations i.e.
= · 40 · (20 + 6)
2 20T.
= 520 metres
distance between the two • Repeat the procedure for
vehicle after 18s = 520 − various lengths of the pen-
420 = 120 metres dulum, measure and record
(c) An experiment to determine time for twenty oscillations
acceleration due to gravity us- (20T) for various lengths
ing a simple pendulum of the pendulum bob e.g.
• Apparatus: a thread, a when length is 0.8m, 0.7m,
bob, clock, clamp, metre 0.6m, 0.5m, 0.4m, 0.3m etc.
ruler.
• Record your results in a
• Diagram; the apparatus
suitable table as shown be-
is arranged as shown be-
low.
low.¿
]3 Clamp
+ l/m 20T /s T /s T 2 /s2
ÁÀ
clock String 0.9
ª 0.8
s 0.7
µ
0.6
Pendulum bob 0.5
Method 0.4
• Measure the length (l) of 0.3
the pendulum bob (from
the centre of the bob). where
• Push the bob slightly, it l is length in metres, 20T
will begin to oscillate. time for 20 oscillations and
• Note, when it is on one T is the period
side and start the stop clock
and begin counting the os- • plot a graph l against T 2
cillations till it makes about , a graph like this below
20 oscillations. will be obtained;

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 65 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
Graph of l agianst T 2
(d) A ball of mass 0.25kg is
dropped from rest at a height
6
s
s
of 20m above the ground.
l in m
s
∆l (i) Calculate the time it
s
q
r ∆T 2 takes to reach the ground.
- (ii) If the ball bounced once
T 2 in s2 on hitting the ground
• obtain the slope (s) as and lost 20% of its orig-
∆l inal energy, calculate the
s= maximum height the ball
∆T 2
reached again.
• calculate the value of ac-
celeration due to gravity
Solution
(g) from g = 4π 2 s
(a) Acceleration is the rate of change
58. (a) Define the term accelera-
of velocity with time
tion.
(b)
(b) A body attached to a string
is swung in a vertical cir-
FD
cular path in air as shown 6
in fig. 1. q Fc ¾ v - FF
=
?
K W
String
q ~Body

N where
FD - is the driving force or
7
tangential driving force
Fig. 1
FC - is the centripetal force
Copy the above diagram
FF - is the centrifugal force
and on it indicate and name
W - is weight of the body
all the forces acting on the
body if the body is mov- (c) weight varies;
ing in an anti-clockwise di- • because the earth is not a
rection. uniform sphere, some parts
(c) Explain why the weight on its surface are close to
of an object on the Earth’s its centre than others
surface may vary from one • due to the rotation of the
place to another. earth.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 66 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
(d) from question m = 0.25kg and New available energy is
h = 20m equal to
(i) time it takes to hit the
ground when dropped. Us-
= 80% of initial energy
ing the second equation of 80
motion; = × 50
100
1 = 40 Joules
h = U t + gt2
2
Then we can now obtain
the new height using the
But U = 0ms−1 initially expression for potential en-
at rest ergy, P.E.;
1
h = 0 + gt2 P.E. = mgh
2
1 40 = 0.25 × 10 × h
h = gt2
2 40 = 2.5h
2h 40
=⇒ t2 = = h
g 2.5
v
u
u 2h 16 = h
t = t h = 16 metres
g
v
u
u2 × 20
= t hence the new maximum
10 height is 16 metres
√
= 4
= 2 seconds 59. (a) Distinguish between the weigh
and mass of a body.
hence it takes 2 seconds
(b) The force of gravity on the
(ii) new maximum height, if moon is one-sixth of that
20% of its original energy on the earth. Determine
is lost. the weight of a 12kg mass
Initial Energy, P.E on the moon.
P.E. = mgh (c) (i) Sketch the distance-time
= 0.25 × 10 × 20 graph for a body falling
= 50J freely from rest.
(ii) An object is released
from rest at a height of
If 20% is lost, then 80% 0.5km. How long does
is available. it take to reach the ground?

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 67 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
Solution Using the second equation of
motion
(a) Mass is the quantity of matter a 1
body contains while weight is the h = ut + gt2
2
force exerted by a body on a sup-
port where it is freely suspended. But U = 0ms−1 since it started
at rest
(b) acceleration due to gravity at the
moon gm
1
1 h = 0 + gt2
gm = gearth 2
6 1
1 h = gt2
= × 10 2
6 2h
10 −2 =⇒ t2 =
= ms g
6 vÃ
u !
u 2 × 500
2 t
t =
10
Weight of the 12kg mass at the t = 10 seconds
moon is

W = mgm
10 Hence it takes 10 seconds
= 12 ×
6 60. The table below shows the vari-
= 20N
ation of velocity with time for
(c) (i) distance - time graph for a body a body which has been thrown
falling freely from rest vertically upwards from the
surface of a planet.
6

Velocity(m/s) 8 6 4 2 0 -2
Distance
Time(s) 0 1 2 3 4 5

(i)What does the negative ve-

-
Time
locity mean?

(ii) from question (ii)Plot a graph of velocity against

time
h = 0.5km (iii)use the graph in b(ii) to
= 0.5 × 1000m find the acceleration due
= 500m to gravity on the planet.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 68 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
(iv) Use the graph in b(ii) to of the force of gravity, hence
find the total distance trav- g = −2ms−2
elled. (iv) Total distance, d
(v)If the body weighs 34N on
earth, what is its weight d = area below
1 1
on the planet? d = bh + bh
2 2
1 1
Solution d = ·4·8+ ·1·2
2 2
d = 16 + 1
(i) negative velocity meant that
the body is moving in the op- d = 17m
posite direction
(v) On earth
(ii) The graph of velocity against
time is W = mg
Velocity (m/s)

8 6 34 = m × 10
m = 3.4kg
6

on the planet
4

2
W = mgplanet
W = 3.4 × 2
0 -
1 2 3 4 5 W = 6.8N
Time (s)
-2

61. .
(iii)
V −U
g =
t
but V = −2m/s 6
20
U = 8m/s
t = 5s
−2 − −8
g = Velocity
5 ms−1
−10
g =
5
g = −2ms−2 5

it is negative because the body -

is moving upwards against grav- 3 10 14

ity or opposite the direction time in seconds

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 69 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
The figure above shows a speed- −20
=
time graph of a cyclist. 4
= −5ms−2
(i) Find the acceleration of
= −5ms−2
the cyclist between A and
B
(ii) Describe the motion of the
(iv) Distance traveled in the first
cyclist between B and C
ten seconds, is equal to the
(iii) Explain what is happen- area below the velocity-time
ing along CD graph with in those 10 sec-
(iv) Calculate the distance trav- onds which is equal to;
eled by the cyclist during
Area of Area of
the first ten seconds. = +
trapezium rectangle
1
Solution = 2 h(a + b) + L × w
1
= 2 (3.0)(5 + 20) + 20 × (10 − 3)
From the graph 1
= 2 × 3(25) + 20 × 7
(i) Acceleration a = 37.5 + 140
V −U = 177.5 metres
a =
t
(20 − 5)ms−1
=
3s 62. Fig. 5 shows dots produced
−1
15ms on a tape pulled through a ticker-
=
3s timer by a moving body.
= 5ms−2
Tape

Direction
®
¾ r r r r r
(ii) Between B and C the cyclist of motion
¾2cm ¾ 5cm -
is moving at a constant speed -

of 20m/s for 7 seconds (i.e. be- Fig. 5

tween 10s and 3s).

(iii) Along CD the speed of the The frequency of the ticker-
body is decreasing at a rate timer is 50Hz Calculate the
of acceleration of the body.
V −U
a = Solution
t
0 − 20
=
(14 − 10) Frequency, f = 50Hz

Physics; Problems and Solutions 70 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
Period, T Acceleration, a
1 V −U
T = a =
f t
1 (2.5 − 1)ms−1
= =
50 0.06s
= 0.02 seconds 1.5
= ms−2
0.06
= 25ms−2
The time taken is equal 3 peri-
ods i.e. 3T
t = 3T 63. (a) What is the difference be-
tween speed and velocity?
= 3 × 0.02s
= 0.06 seconds (b) The graph in fig. 4 show
the variation of distance
with time for a body. De-
Final velocity, V scribe the motion of the
d2 body.
V =
t2 6
5cm 300
= £ B
T £ B
5 £ B
100 m 200 £ B
= £ B
T Distance (m)
£ B
0.05m £ B
= 100
£ B
0.02s £ B
£ B
= 2.5ms−1 £ -B
8 16 24 32
Time (s)
Fig. 4
Initial velocity , U
d1 Solution
U =
t1
2cm (a) Differences between speed and
= velocity are;
T
2 Speed is a scalar quantity while
= 100 m
T velocity is a vector quantity
0.02m speed is the rate of change of
=
0.02s distance with time while ve-
= 1ms−1 locity is the rate of change of
displacement with time

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 71 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.7. MOTION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(b) Description of its motion; The Final common speed
body starts from rest and ac-
celerates to a speed of 300ms−1 v = 20ms−1
in 8 seconds. Then it main-
tains that speed for 16 sec- (i) the speed with which the bul-
onds and finally comes to rest let hits the wood;
in the next 8 seconds. Using the law of conservation
of momentum,
64. (a) A bullet of mass 20g is fired
into a block of wood of mass let
400g lying on a smooth hor- w - mean the wooden block
izontal surface. If the bul- b - mean the bullet
let and the wood move to- V - velocity after collision and
gether with speed of 20ms−1 ,
U - velocity before collision
calculate,
(i) the speed with which Total momentum before col-
the bullet hits the wood, lision is equal to the total mo-
(ii) the kinetic energy lost. mentum after collision, pro-
vided no external force acts
(b) State the energy changes on the two bodies
involved in (c) above.

Solution
mw Uw + mb Ub = mw Vw + mb Vb
(a) from the question
Mass of bullet
But Uw = 0ms−1 . because the
, mb = 20g wooden block was at rest. and
20
= kg Vw = Vb = V because after
1000 collision the bullet and the
1
= kg wooden block moved together
50
with a common velocity, V .
Mass of wooden block hence the above equation be-
comes;
mw = 400g
400 mw Uw + mb Ub = mw Vw + mb Vb
= kg
1000 0 + mb Ub = mw V + mb V
2
= kg mb Ub = (mw + mb ) V
5

Physics; Problems and Solutions 72 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.7. MOTION
à !
1 2 1 • Sound energy
Ub = + × 20
50 5 50 • Light energy if sparks are formed
1 21
Ub = × 20 • Kinetic energy of the bullet
50 50
=⇒ Ub = 21 × 20 and the block when moving
= 420ms−1 together
• Energy used to overcome fric-
hence the velocity with which tion
−1
the bullet hits the wood is 420ms
65. (a) Define inertia of a body.
(ii) Kinetic energy (K.E.) lost
    (b) Explain why a passenger
initial   Final  standing on the floor of a
= −
K.E K.E lorry jerks backwards when
the lorry starts moving for-
before collision only the bul-
wards.
let was moving, i.e. total ki-
netic energy before collision (c) A 7-tonne truck initially
is that of the bullet. After moving at a velocity of 50ms−1
collision the bullet and the accelerates to 80ms−1 is 3
wooden block were moving to- seconds. Calculate the force
gether as one body of mass on the truck that caused
(400+20)g the velocity change.
kinetic energy lost is equal Solution
to
(a) Inertia is the tendency of a
1 1
= mb Ub2 − (mb + mw )Vb2 body to stay at rest if it has
2 2
1 1 been at rest or to stay in mo-
2
= × × 420 tion in a straight line if it has
2 50Ã !
1 2 1 been moving, when a force is
− × + × 202 applied on it.
2 5 50
= 1764 − 84 (b) This is because of inertia; the
= 1680 Joules passenger tends to remain at
rest when the lorry moves,
hence he/she has to jerk so
hence the lost kinetic energy as not to remain or so as to
is 1680 Joules move with the lorry.

(b) the energy changes involved, are; (c)

From kinetic energy to; Force = ma

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 73 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.8. POWER CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
m = 7 tonnes 2. A crane raises a mass of 500kg
= 7 × 1000kg vertically upwards at a speed of
= 7000kg 10ms−1 . Find the power devel-
change in velocity oped.
a =
time A. 5.0 × 100
V −U
= B. 5.0 × 101
t
80 − 50 C. 5.0 × 102
=
3 D. 5.0 × 104 D
30
=
3
= 10ms−2
F ×d d
P = =F×
t t
F = ma = F × v = mg × v
= 7000 × 10 = 500 × 10 × 10
= 70, 000N = 5.0 × 104 W

3. A girl whose mass is 50kg runs up

a staircase 25m high in 4s. Find
1.8 Power
the power she develops.
50×4
Section A (Objectives) A. 25
50×10
B. 25×4
1. A crane lifts 4 bricks per minute 50×25
C. 4
through a height of 1.5 m. find
50×10×25
the power that is expended if each D. 4 D
brick weight 100N.
A 2.5W F ×d
B. 10.0W P =
t
C. 150.0W mg × d
=
D. 600.0W B t
50 × 10 × 25
=
4
F ×d
P = 4. A train traveling at a constant
t
100 × (1.5 × 4) speed of 200 m/s overcomes a re-
= sistive force of 8 kN. The power
60
= 10W of the train is

Physics; Problems and Solutions 74 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.8. POWER
A. (8 × 20) W. C. 2.5 × 105
B. (8 × 10 × 20) W. D. 8.0 × 105 B
C. (8 × 100 × 20) W.
D. (8 × 1000 × 20) W D
mgh
P = 80% of
t
F ×d 80 m
P = = × × gh
t 100 t
80
= F ×V = × 200 × 10 × 50
100
= 8k × 20
= 8.0 × 104
= 8 × 1000 × 20
7. An engine exerts a force of 2000N
5. A pump is rated at 400W. How
at a speed of 15 ms−1 . Find the
many kilograms of water can it
power developed by the engine
raise in one hour through a height
in Kw.
of 72m?
A. 0.8kg A. 30,000
B. 5.6kg B. 3,000
C. 33.3kg C. 300
D. 2000kg D D. 30 A

P t = mgh P = Fv
Pt
m = = 2000 × 15
gh
400 × 3600 = 30, 000
=
10 × 72
= 2000 8. A constant force of 5N acts on a
body and moves it through a dis-
6. Water flows over a large water tance of 20m in 10 seconds. cal-
fall of height 50m at a rate of culate its power
200kg s−1 and runs generator of
efficiency 80%. The power of the A. 2.5W
generator in watts is B. 10W
A. 2.5 × 104 C. 40W
B. 8.0 × 104 D. 100W B

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 75 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.8. POWER CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
11. A boy pulls a block of wood with
F ×D 5 × 20 a force of 30N through a distance
P = = of 300m in 2 minutes.
t 10
P = 10W Find the power he develops, if he
pulls the block at constant speed.
9. A mouse of mass 0.03kg climbs
30×300
through a distance of 2 m up a A. 2
wall in 4s. the power expended 30×300
B. 2×60
in watts is C. 30×2×60
200
A. 0.03 × 2 × 4 × 10 D. 300
B
2×60×30
0.03×4×2
B. 10
0.03×4×10
C. 2 F ×d
0.03×2×10 P =
D. 4 D t
30 × 300
=
2 × 60
F ×d
P =
t Section B (Structured)
0.03 × 10 × 2
=
4 12. A man whose mass is 75kg climbs
10. A water pump raises 2000kg of up a ladder of 6.5m high in 5s.
water through a vertical height Calculate the
of 72m in one hour. Calculate (i) workdone,
the power of the pump.
A. 40,000W. w = F ×d
B. 4,000W. = mg × d
C. 400 W. = (75 × 10) × 6.5
D. 40 W. C = 4875J

(ii) power expended

F ×d
P = w
t P =
mg × d t
= 4875
t =
2000 × 10 × 72 5
= = 975W atts
3600
= 400W

Physics; Problems and Solutions 76 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.9. ARCHIMEDES/FLOATATION
13. (a) Define joule.
This is the mount of work
(a) Define Power
done when a force of 1N
Power is the rate of doing moves through a distance
work of 1m from the point of
(b) Find the power developed when application of the force in
a crane lifts a load of 3000N the direction of the force.
through 5m in 5s.
(b) A boy of mass 45kg runs up
a flight of 60 steps. If each
F ×d
P = step is 12cm, find the work
t
3000 × 5 done against gravity by the
= boy.
5
= 3000W alts
W = F ×d
= mg × d
14. In a dam, 2.0 × 103 kg of water 12
à !
falls every second through a height = 45 × 10 · m × 60
100
of 20cm to operate an electric gen- = 450 × 7.2
erator.
= 3240J
(a) Calculate the power input to
the generator.
Power, P
1.9 Archimedes/floatation
work done
P =
time Section A (Objectives)
mgh m
P = = gh
t t
20
= 2 × 103 × 10 × m 1. When an inflated balloon is released
100
= 4000watts in air with its neck opened, it will

A. Rise up
(b) State the energy changes which
take place. B. Drop to the ground instantly
Potential energy → ki- C. Move in the opposite direc-
netic energy → electric tion to the escaping air C
energy D. Remain in one position

15. 2.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 77 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.9. ARCHIMEDES/FLOATATION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
9 wood A. upthrust on the solid is greater
in liquid N than M.
¾
water B. density of liquid M is greater
than that of N.

Figure 2 shows a bock of wood of C. density of liquid N is greater

volume 40cm3 floating in water than that of M.
with only Half of its volume sub- D. surface tension of liquid N is
merged. If the density of water less than that of M. B
is 1000 kgm−3 . Determine the
mass of the wood under water. 5. Which of the following are true
about a hydrometer?
A. 40 × 1000 kg.
(i) it measures density of liquid
B. 20 × 1000kg.
(ii) its sensitivity is improved by
C. 40 × 10−6 × 500 kg. narrowing its stem.
D. 20 × 10−6 × 500kg. D (iii)its readings increase upwards
on the stem.
1 (iv)Its buoyancy is provided by
mdsp.wtr = × 20 × 1gcm−3 the large bulb.
2
= = 20g
1 A. (i), (ii) and (iii) only.
mwd = × 20 = 10g
2 B. (ii), (iii) and (iv) only.
= 10 × 10−3 kg
C. (i), (ii) and (iv) only.
= 20 × 10−6 × 500kg
D. (ii) and (iv) only. C
3. A cork held under water rises to
6. A balloon is filled with hydrogen
the surface when released because
and released in the open air. It
the upthrust on it is
will rise
A. greater than the weight
A. to a certain height and then
B. less than the weight float.
C. equal to the weight B. to a certain height and then
D. equal to the weight of water drop.
displaced A C. to a certain height and then
burst.
4. A solid, Q, sinks deeper in liquid,
N, than in liquid, M, because the D. indefinitely. A

Physics; Problems and Solutions 78 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.9. ARCHIMEDES/FLOATATION
7. When a spherical ball falls through 9. (b) A solid weighs 25.0g in air and
a column of oil with a steady ve- 19.0g when submerged in wa-
locity, the total ter. Find the density of the
material of the solid.
A. downward force is greater than
total upward force.
ρ = Denisty
B. upward force is greater than  
total downward force. Relative  · 1000kgm−3
ρ = 
density
C. upward force is equal total
downward force. = R.D × 1000kgm−3
D. upward force is zero C

Section B (Structured) Wa
R.D. =
Wa − Ww
8. (a) State the principle of floatation. ma g
=
The weight of a float- ma g − mw g
ma
ing body is equal to the =
ma − mw
weight of the fluid dis-
placed.
(b) A cube of edge 0.1m floats in 25 × 10−3
R.D. =
a liquid of density 1200kgm−3 25 × 10−3 − 19 × 10−3
with a third of it submerged, 25
=
find the density of the mate- 6
rial of the cube.
Using the law of floata- hence,
tion i.e. the weight of the 25
cube, Wc , is equal to the ρ = × 1000kgm−3
6
weight of the liquid dis- = 4166.67kgm−3
placed, Wd .

Wc = Wd 10. (a) State Archimedes’ principle.

1 When a body is wholly or
V ρg = V ρL g
3 partially immersed in a fluid
1
ρ = ρL it experiences an upthrust or
3
1 an upward force equal to the
= × 1200 weight of the fluid displaced.
3
= 400kg/m3 (b) A rubber balloon of mass 5 ×
10−3 kg is inflated with hydro-

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 79 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.9. ARCHIMEDES/FLOATATION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
gen and held stationary by merged, what is the density
means of a string. If the vol- of the liquid.
ume of the inflated balloon is
5 × 10−3 m3 , calculate the ten- mass of liquid mass of
=
sion in the string. (Density displaced solid
of hydrogen = 0.080kgm−3 , Den-
sity of air = 1.150kgm−3 )
2
At equilibrium, sum of up- ρV g =
3
ward forces is equal to the
sum of downward forces act-
ing on the balloon. 4 2
ρ× × 10−4 × 10 =
5 3
T = U − mgb − mgH2 2
0.0008ρ =
= ρvair g − mgb − ρvgH2 3
³ ´
= 1.15 × 5 × 10−3 × 10
³ ´
−5 × 10−3 5 × 10−3 × 10 2 1
ρ = ×
−0.08 × 5 × 10−3 × 10 3 0.0008
= 833.33kg/m3
= 0.0575 − 0.00025 − 0.004
= 0.05325N
12.
11. A solid of volume 10−4 m3 floats (a) Define density.
in water (of density 103 kgm−3 ) with Density is mass per unit
2
3 of its volume submerged. volume
(a) Find the mass of the solid? (b) A balloon is filled with hy-
mass of a floating body mF drogen and sealed. Explain
is equal to the mass of the what happens when the bal-
water displaced md loon is released in air.
It rises up in air if its to-
mF = md tal weight is less than the
= ρV g up-thrust acting on it.
2
= 103 × × 10−4 × 10 13.
3
2
= kg (i) A body whose weight in air is
3
52N experiences an upthrust
(b) If the solid floats in another of 12N in a fluid. Find its ap-
liquid with 45 of its volume sub- parent weight.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 80 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.9. ARCHIMEDES/FLOATATION
(ii) What happens to the weight • Weigh the mass of the test
of the body at a much higher tube as M
altitude? • Place a known mass with
(i) apparent weight, mass, m, in it
WApp 40
WApp = Wair − Upthrust 30
= 52 − 12 20
w
= 40N 10

• Read the level of water in

(ii) at high altitude the measuring cylinder as
weight decreases V◦
because it is fur- • Dip the test tube in the
ther away from the water in the measuring cylin-
earth’s centre. der and leave it to settle.
Paper II (Essay) Take the new reading of
the water level as Vm
14. (a) (i) Describe an experiment • Get the volume V of wa-
to verify the law of flota- ter displaced as;
tion?
(ii) Give one example where V = Vm − V◦
the law of flotation is
applied • Repeat the above proce-
(b) (i) Define density. dure for various different
(ii) A piece of glass weighs masses in the test tube and
0.5N in air and 0.30N tabulate your results as
in water. Find the den- shown below;
sity of glass. M + m V mw

Solution

(a) (i) An experiment to verify the

law of floatation .
• Apparatus: You should have Where M + m is the total
a long test tube, small masses, mass of the floating body
measuring cylinder, and and mw = 1 × V = V g,
weighing scale. mass of water displaced.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 81 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.9. ARCHIMEDES/FLOATATION CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
The value of M + m will Wair
=
be found to be equal to the Wair − Wwater
mass mw of water displaced 0.5N
=
OR 0.5N − 0.3N
0.5N
If a graph of M +m against =
0.2N
mw is plotted, a straight = 2.5
line with a slope of unity
is obtained. But
 
6 density 
density = R.D. × 
of water
M +m
density of glass, ρ

- ρ = 2.5 × 1gcm−3
mw = 2.5cm−3
This shows that the mass = 2.5cm−3
of the floating body is equal
to the mass of the fluid OR
(liquid water) it displaces. Density of glass, ρ
(ii) the law of floatation is ap-
plied in a ship. A ship is made ρ = 2.5 × 1000kgm−3
of steel which sinks in wa- = 2500kgm−3
ter but this steel is made to = 2.5 × 103 kgm−3
ocupy a larger volume or space
so that it displaces a larger 15. A balloon is filled with 50m3
quantity of water hence in- of hydrogen and tied to the
creasing the upthrust acting ground. The balloon alone,
on it enabling it to float. and the container which it car-
(b) (i) Density is mass per unit vol- ries have a mass of 2.0kg. If
ume the densities of hydrogen and
air are 9.0×10−2 kgm−3 and 1.29kgm−3
(ii) Applying Archimedes prin- respectively, how much load
ciple, we say. can the balloon lift when re-
Relative density of a solid, R.d leased?
weight in air
R.D = Solution
upthrust in water
Physics; Problems and Solutions 82 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.9. ARCHIMEDES/FLOATATION
in this question. we are to use
Archimedes principle to obtain up-
thrust. From the question, we U = W
have; = mg
volume of hydrogen, H2 , V = 5m3 = ρV g
= ρair VH2 g
mass of balloon and container, mb =
2kg = 1.29 × 5 × 10
density of hydrogen = 9.0×10−2 kgm−3 U = 64.5N

density of air = 1.29kgm3

let the mass that can be lifted by
But U = mb g + mg + mH2 g
the balloon be m
64.5N = mb + mg + mH2 g
For the balloon to be in equilib-
rium, the net vertical force act-
ing on it must be zero or
mg = U − mb g
Upward downward
= −mH2 g
forces forces
= U − 2 × 10 − ρH2
but what are these forces?
×VH2 × g
Upthrust = U − 20 − 9.0 × 10−2 × 5 × 10
6
= 64.5 − 20 − 4.5
mg = 40N

Hence the balloon can lift a load

of 40N.

16. Explain why a ship floats in

water although it is made mainly
of metal.
?
Downward force
Solution

A ship made of a metal is made

Upthrust = mb g + mg + mH2 g
to float in water by making it have
but upthrust, U , is equal to weight, a large volume so that the vol-
W , of the fluid (air) displaced i.e. ume of water it displaces is large,

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 83 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.10. CENTRE OF GRAVITY CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
so that the weight of water dis- 2. .
placed is equal to the weight of
the ship, for the ship to float ac-
cording to the law of floatation. A
¾ 30cm -¾ 10cm-¾ 20cm -
B
Or because the metal is designed ¯
to ocupy a larger volume hence 2N 2N ¯ P
¯
reducing its average density to ¯
Fig. 4
a value less than the density of
water hence it floats on water. A light beam AB is in equilib-
rium when forces of 2N, 2N and
P act on it as shown in Fig. 4.
1.10 Centre of gravity Find the magnitude of P.
A. 5N
Section A (Objectives)
B. 4N
1. Fig. 5 shows a uniform metre C. 2N
rule of 0.1kg pivoted at the 80cm D. 1N A
mark. It balances horizontally
when a mass P is hang at the
95cm mark. Find the value of P. 20 × P = 2 × 40 + 2 × 10
80cm 95cm
20P = 100
¢AA
¢¢ A
P = 5N
P
Pivot
Fig. 5
3.

A. 0.08kg ¾ X -¾l -
B. 0.2kg u
? ·A ?
C. 0.4kg R · A
· W
A
D. 1kg B Fig. 5
Principle of moments says Fig. 5 shows a uniform beam in
ACW M = CW M equilibrium when a force R acts
0.1 × (80 − 50) = P × (95 − 80) on it at one end. Find the weight,
15P = 3 W, of the beam.
3 X
P = A. Rl
15
Rl
= 0.2 B. X

Physics; Problems and Solutions 84 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.10. CENTRE OF GRAVITY
l
C. RX
B. 0.025kg.
D. RX
D C. 0.100kg.
l
D. 0.125kg. A
Taking moments at the pivot
R×X = W ×l Taking moments at C
RX CW M = ACW M
W =
l
m × (25 − 5) = 5 × 0.1
4. A load of 500N is placed at 2m 20m = 0.5
from a pivot of a sea saw. At what 0.5
m =
distance from the pivot should a 20
weight of 250N be placed to bal- = 0.025kg.
ance the sea-saw?
6.
A. 0.5m 5N
6
B. 1.0m A
C. 2.0m ¢AA
D. 4.0m D ? ¢¢ A ? B
4N W
Fig. 3
ACW M = CW M
A uniform wooden beam of weight
500 × 2 = 250 × x W is pivoted at a distance 15 th of
500 × 2
x = its length from the end A and kept
250
= 4m in equilibrium by applying forces
of 4N and 5N as shown in Fig. 3.
5. The diagram in Fig. 1 shows a the force exerted by the pivot on
uniform half metre rule suspended the beam is
at point C.
A. 16
B. 15
5cm
¾ -
A
D B C. 10
?
C
?
D. 8 B
0.1kg M kg
Fig. 4
Net force = 0N
4+W = R+5
The mass m of the rule is
W = R+1
A. 0.020kg.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 85 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.10. CENTRE OF GRAVITY CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
taking moments about the pivot 8. A uniform metre-rule is pivoted
" # at its centre as shown in fig. 2.
1 4 1 1
l×4+ l×5 = l− l ×W 20cm
5 5 2 5 ¾ -
1 4 3
l×4+ l×5 = l×W ? ·L
5 5 10 · L ?
24 3 20N
Fig. 2
F
= W
5 10
W = 16 If the rule is in equilibrium, find
R = W −1 the value of F.
= 16 − 1 A. 4 N
= 15
B. 33.3 N
C. 50 N
7. Which of the following statements D. 100 N C
are true about two equal forces F
acting on a bar of length L, shown
in fig. 2 ACW M = CW M
F 50 × 20 = 20 × F
¾ l -
6 F = 50

? 9. The shaft in an engine is sub-

Fig. 2
F
jected to two parallel but oppo-
site forces of 500 N each as shown
(i) The resultant force on the bar
in fig. 3.
is zero.
- 500N
(ii) The forces cause a rotational
effect. x

(iii) The forces act in opposite 500N ¾

directions.
Fig. 3

(iv) The forces produce different

turning effects. The rotation is best stopped by
applying.
A. (i) only
A. two forces of 500 N acting at
B. (i) and (ii) only
right angles to each other.
C. (i), (ii) and (iii) only.
B. two parallel but opposite forces
D. (i), (ii) and (iv) only. C of 500 N.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 86 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.10. CENTRE OF GRAVITY
C. a single force of 1000 N i. net moment acting on
D. a single force of 250 N C a body is zero i.e. the
total sum of Anticlock-
wise moments is equal
Section B (Structured) to the total sum of clock-
wise moments

10. What is meant by the centre of ii. net force acting on it

gravity of a body. is zero i.e. net sum of
upward forces are equal
This is a point where the net to the net sum of down-
force due to the earth’s at- ward force or net sum of
traction acts on a body. eastward forces is equal
to the sum of westward
11. A uniform metre rule, pivoted at
forces
the 10cm mark, balances when a
mass of 400g is suspended at the
0cm mark as shown in fig. 7.
12. What is meant by centre of grav-
0cm 100cm
10cm
ity?
¢ } pivot I
400g ¢ metre rule
¢
Fig. 7 This is the point where the
resultant force acting on a
Calculate the mass of the metre body due to the earth’s at-
rule. traction acts.

Let m be the mass of the

meter rule, its weight acts
at the 50cm mark. Using 13. Define Moment of a force.
the principle of moments,
we have; This is the product of force
and its perpendicular dis-
m × 40cm = 400g × 10cm tance from the turning point.
400g × 10cm
m =
40cm
m = 100g
14. A uniform metre-rule is balanced
at the 30cm mark when a load of
11. State the conditions for a body to 0.8N is hang at the zero-mark.
bet in equilibrium. Find the weight of the metre-rule.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 87 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.10. CENTRE OF GRAVITY CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
Using the principle of mo- 16. Briefly describe an experi-
ments, the sum of clockwise ment to locate the centre of
moments is equal to the sum gravity of an irregular lam-
of anticlockwise moments ina.
20 30
W× = 0.8 × Solution
100 100
0.8 × 30
W =
20 An experiment to determine the
= 1.2N
centre of gravity of an irregular
lamina using the The plumb-line
15. A uniform beam of weight 2.5N method2 .
is pivoted at its mid-point P, as Apparatus;
shown in fig. 8. The beam re-
mains in equilibrium when force In this experiment we need a lam-
R and S act on it. If R is 5N. Find ina, a plumb line and a stand (or
the: a rigidly fixed rod)

(i) value of S. Method;

(ii) reaction at the pivot. In this experiments you perform

the following steps;
¾ 0.3m -¾ 0.5m -
? P ?
R S
• Make three holes A, B, and
Fig. 8 C near the edges of the irreg-
ular lamina as shown below.
Using the principle of mo-
• Tie the plumb-line on a thin
ments;
strong rod so that it suspends
S × 0.5 = R × 0.3 vertically
5 × 0.3
S =
0.5 s

"
S#
= 3N
Reaction
= R+S
at the pivot
= 5+3
= 8N • Suspend the lamina on the
same rod through the hole C
as shown below.
Paper II (Essay) 2
There is another method called the balancing
method

Physics; Problems and Solutions 88 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.10. CENTRE OF GRAVITY
• Hold the rule horizontally on
gC
r
a knife edge.
• Move it slightly to its raised
f side on the edge until it rests
A Á gB horizontally
• Mark the position of the knife
edge P on the rule when it
Position of the string rests horizontally.
(meridian)
• Tie a known mass with a string
• Trace the position of the ver- to one side of the rule.
tical plumb-line string on the • Change the position of the knife
lamina, as a line called the edge or the mass till the ruler
meridian. rest horizontally again as shown
• Suspend the lamina now through below:
P
the holes B and then A, draw-
ing their corresponding merid-
ians. The meridians will meet P ¾d1-¾ d2 -
at a single point. This point ? ?
mg Mg
of intersection of the merid-
ian is the centre of gravity of • Measure the distance of the
the lamina? mark P from the knife edge
as d1 and the distance of the
Centre of
gC gravity string holding the known mass
M from the knife edge as d2
= if m is the mass of the me-
f
A gB ter rule, from the principle
of moments.
Sum of clockwise moments,
17. Describe how you would mea- CWM is equal to the sum of
sure the mass of a uniform me- anticlockwise moments, ACWM
tre rule using a known mass CW M = ACW M
and a knife edge only.
M g × d2 = mg × d1
d2
Solution =⇒ m = M ×
d1
To measure mass of a uniform substituting in for M , d1 , and
meter rule using a known mass d2 the mass, m of the uniform
and a knife edge only. rule is determined.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 89 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.11. MACHINE CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
18. A uniform metre rule of weight(ii) At equilibrium, the sum of up-
1N is pivoted on a wedge 5cm ward forces is equal to the sum
away from one end and sus- of downward forces, i.e.
pended by a string 30cm from
the other end. T + R = 10 + 2 + 1 + 5
T + R = 18
¿¿
¿¿¿
¿
¿¿
¿¿¿
¿
¿
¿¿
¿¿
¿
¿ ¿
¿
¿
¿¿¿ string
¿¿
¿
¾30cm-
¼
R = 18 − T
- ¾ ¾25cm- ¾5cm-
10cm
¾- 15cm
R = 18 − 17.23
R = 0.46N
1N 5N R
10N 2N
Fig. 1

If the metre is in equilibrium 1.11 Machine

when weights of 10N, 2N and
5N are attached to it as shown 1. .
in fig. 1, Calculate the;
(i) tension in the string ¶³

(ii) normal reaction, R, at the µ´

N
²¯
90N
wedge. ±°

Solution º·

¹¸
(i) Taking moments at R,
210N

T (100 − 35) = 10(100 − 15) Fig. 1

+2 · 60
Calculate the efficiency of the pul-
+1(50 − 5) ley system shown in Figure 1 if
+5 · 25 the minimum effort needed to raise
a load of 120 N is 90N.
90
A.
65T = 850 + 120 210×3×100
210×3×100
+45 + 125 C. 90
90×3
B. 210×100
210×100
D. 90×3 D
65T = 1140
1140
T =
65
T = 17.54N V.R. = 3

Physics; Problems and Solutions 90 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.11. MACHINE
L 210 3. The maximum efficiency that can
M.A. = =
E 90 be obtained with four pulleys and
M.A. a mechanical advantage of 3 is
E = × 100%
V.R.
210 A. 100%
= 90
× 100%
3 B. 75%
C. 12%
210 D. 1.33% B
E = ÷ 3 × 100%
90
210 1
= × × 100%
90 3 VR = 4
210 × 100 M.A.
= E = × 100
90 × 3 V.R.
3
2. = ×
4
­­ ­­ ­­ ­­ ­­ ­­ ­­ ­­ ­­ ­­
= 75%
¿

4. Calculate the effort when a load

ÁÀ
º·^ 72N is raised using a block sys-
Effort
¹¸ tem of five pulleys and efficiency
80.
¿
A. 11.52 N.
ÁÀ B. 18 N.
Load
C. 57.6 N.
Fig.3
D. 288 N. B
What is the velocity ratio of the
pulley system shown in Fig. 3?
MA
A. 1 × 100 = E
VR
B. 2 E
MA = ×VR
100
C. 3 80
= ×5=4
D. 4 C 100
L 72
velocity ratio of a block and tackle = 4=
E E
system is equal to the number of 72
strings holding the lower block, E =
4
here Velocity ratio is 3. E = 18N

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 91 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.11. MACHINE CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
5. @
µ@
B
Axle
F
¡
µ
Crank Pedal 10m ¡@¡
@
¶ CCW N ¡
°f f ¡
µ @
@
?

Footµ
push
@ª 40N
@
CRANK OF A BICYCLE PEDAL 6
Fig. 2 ◦
A 30
Fig. 5
Fig. 2 shows a crank of a bicycle
pedal. The force a cyclist exerts A load of 40 N is pulled steadily
on a pedal varies from a mini- from A to B along an inclined plane
mum to a maximum. When does by a force F as shown in fig. 5.
the cyclist exert the maximum Find the velocity ratio of the sys-
turning effect? tem

A. crank makes 900 with the foot A. 1.0.

push. B. 1.2.
B. Crank makes 00 with the foot C. 2.0
push. D. 4.0 C
C. Cyclist is climbing a hill.
D. Cyclist is turning a corner. dE
V.R. =
dL
A
l
=
6. Which of the following statements h
is true of a wedge used as a sim- l
=
ple machine? l sin 30
1
=
A. A very small force is required sin 30
1
to lift a big load. = h1i
2
B. Work done is always so much. = 2
C. Effort on the wedge is applied
vertically. Section B (Structured)
D. There is no frictional force.
A 8. Draw a labeled diagram to illus-
trate the lever principle as ap-
7. plied to a wheel barrow.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 92 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.11. MACHINE
Effort
Pivot
10. ’
6

£Â¿ 450N
£ W
£
² ÁÀ r
A 150N
Load
r
9. The graph in fig. 7 shows the vari-
B
ation of the efficiency of a pulley Fig. 8
system with load.
Two gear wheels A and B with
100 6
80 and 20 teeth respectively lock
A
into each other. They are fas-
Efficiency tened on axles of equal diame-
%
ters such that a weight of 150N
-
attached to a string wound around
O
Load(N)
one axle raises a load of 450N at-
Fig. 7 tached to a string wound around
the other axle as shown in fig. 8.
Explain why; Calculate;
(i) part OA of the graph is al- (i) the velocity ratio,
most a straight line.
à !
number of teeth
(ii) from A the graph curves and on driven wheel
VR = Ã !
finally levels off before reach- number of teeth
ing 100%. on driving wheel
80
=
(i) Because some energy 20
= 4
is used to the moved
parts of the machine
and against friction is (ii) the efficiency, of the system.
constant.
L 450N
(ii)This is because always M.A. = = =3
E 150N
friction exists i.e. energy M.A.
s used to overcome it Efficiency = × 100%
V.R.
and to move some parts 3
of the machine hence = × 100%
4
the efficiency can not be = 75%
equal to 100%

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 93 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.11. MACHINE CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
11. What is meant by efficiency of a 14. The graph in Figure 1.1on page 98
machine? shows how load varies with
Efficiency is the ratio of effort in an experiment using
work done by the ma- a single pulley system of ve-
chine to the work done on locity ratio 5.
the machine. For a load of 450N, find the
Or efficiency is the ratio
(i) effort
of the work done by the
load to the work done by (ii) mechanical advantage
the effort (iii) efficiency.

12. Draw a single pulley system of Solution

velocity ratio 3.
º· from the graph, where load is 450N
¹¸R
k (i) the effort is 115N
(ii) the mechanical advantage,
q
¶³
Load
µ´ M.A. =
Effort
Load Change in load
=
Change in effort
i.e the number of strings Choosing the extreme points
holding the lower block of the graph, i.e. (24,0) and
should be equal to 3 (150,625)
13. State one reason why the efficiency ∆L
M.A. =
of a machine is always less than ∆E
100%. (625 − 0)N
=
This is because; (150 − 24)N
625N
1. Some energy is used =
126N
to overcome friction. = 4.96
2. some energy is used (iii) Efficiency, E,
to lift parts of the
M.A
machine. E = × 100%
V.R
4.96
Paper II (Essay) = × 100%
5
= 99.2%

Physics; Problems and Solutions 94 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.11. MACHINE
15. (a) Define the following terms: tem in (b) above, if the load
(i) mechanical advantage, is much.
(ii) velocity ratio. (i) less than 800N
(b) (ii) more than 800N
(d) Draw a sketch graph to
#Ã show how mechanical ad-
p
s
vantages of the system in
"!
¾»
Effort (b) varies with load.
q
(e) Give two practical appli-
½¼
¶³ cations where pulley sys-
p
µ´
tems are used.

¶³
Solution
p
µ´
#Ã (a) (i) mechanical advantage is the
p ratio of load to effort.
"! (ii) velocity ratio is the ratio of
the distance moved by the ef-
Load fort to the distance moved by
Fig. 2 the load in the same time.
The diagram in fig. 2 shows(b) (i) Velocity ratio is the number
a pulley system used to raise of strings holding the lower
a load. block.
(i) What is the velocity ra- = 5
tio of the system?
(ii) Since
(ii) Find how far the load
de
is raised, if the effort V.R. =
moves down by 4m. dl
But de = 4m and
(iii) Calculate the effort re-
V.R. = 5
quired to raise a load 4
of 800N, if the mechan- =⇒ 5 =
dl
ical advantage of the sys- 5dl = 4
tem is 4. 4
dl =
(iv) Calculate the efficiency 5
of the system. = 0.8 metres
(c) Explain what happens to hence the load is raised by
the efficiency of the sys- 0.8 metres

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 95 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.11. MACHINE CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(iii) from (e) Two practical application where
pulleys are used are
L
M.A =
E • In cranes; to lift building ma-
But M.A = 4, and terial to high level when con-
L = 800N structing high storeyed build-
800 ings
Hence , 4 =
E
=⇒ 4E = 800 • In lifts that transport people
800 to rooms at high or low lev-
E = els in high storeyed buildings
4
= 200N • In running conveyor belts that
move objects in industries and
hence the required effort is
factories like moving crates
200 N
of sodas when they are being
(iv) Efficiency, Ef bottled.
M.A. 16. In a pulley system, the distance
Ef = × 100%
V.R. moved by an effort is five (5)
4 times the distance moved by
= × 100%
5 a load. Calculate the efficiency
= 80%
of the system if an effort re-
hence the efficiency is 80% quired just to move a load of
60 N is 20 N.
(c) (i) If the load in (b) above is less
than 800N, the efficiency re- Solution
duces or the efficiency is lower.
From the question
(ii) if the load in (b) above is more
velocity ratio
than 800N, the efficiency in-
creases or the efficiency is higher. V.R. = 5

(d) graph of mechanical advantage,

M.A. against load. mechanical advantage
L
6 M.A. =
E
60N
M.A. =
20N
= 3
-
Load hence from

Physics; Problems and Solutions 96 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.11. MACHINE

M.A.
Efficiency = × 100%
V.R.
3
= × 100%
5
= 60%

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 97 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.11. MACHINE CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS

Graph showing variation of load with effort

700

600

500

400
Load (N)

300

200

100

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Effort (N)

Figure 1.1: Graph of Load against Effort

Physics; Problems and Solutions 98 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
1.12 Waves A. 1 Hz
B. 3 Hz
Section A (Objectives) C. 9Hz
D. 15Hz A
1. The basic difference between trans-
verse and longitudinal waves is
in 15cm
λ = = 3cm
5
A. Amplitude C d 15cm
B. Wavelength v = = = 3cms−1
t 5s
C. Direction of vibration v 3cms−1
f = =
D. Medium through which the λ 3cm
f = 1Hz
waves travel.
2. In a ripple tank, constructive in-
terference occurs when 4. Which one of the following bands
A. The wave is stationary has a wavelength greater than
that of visible spectrum?
B. A crest overlaps with a trough
C. A crest overlaps with a crest A. Gamma
D. The wave strikes a barrier. B. X-rays
C C. Ultra-Violet
3. . D. Infrared D

15cm 5. A vibrator produces a sound wave

¾ -
that travels 900m in 3s. if the
wave length of the wave is 10m,
find the frequency of the vibra-
tor.
A. 30Hz
ABCDEF B. 270Hz
Fig. 8
C. 300Hz
Fig. 8 represents straight waves
D. 3000Hz A
A, B, C, D, E and F. if after 5s,
A occupies the position now oc-
cupied by F, find the wavelength V 1
of the wave. f = = ×V
λ λ
Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 99 Physics; Problems and Solutions
1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
1 d D. ultra violet C
= ×
λ t
1 900 8. A longitudinal wave is one in which
= ×
10 3 the
= 30
A. direction of propagation is par-
6. allel to that of the vibration
producing it.
B C B. particles of the medium through
which it travels move oppo-
D site to the direction of prop-
A agation.
¾ -
2m C. direction of propagation is per-
pendicular to that of the vi-
Fig.2
bration producing it.
Fig. 2 shows a wave produced D. particles of the medium through
in a string. If the frequency is which it travels move together
2Hz, at what speed do the waves with it.
travel along the string?
A
−1
A. 0.5ms
9. Which of the following can be de-
B. 1.0ms−1 tected by an ordinary antenna?
C. 2.0ms−1
A. Microwaves.
−1
D. 4.0ms D
B. Infra-red rays.
C. Ultra violet rays.
D. Gamma rays A
V = fλ
= 2×2 10. A man standing in front of a
= 4 tall wall makes a loud sound and
hears the echo after 1 12 s. How
7. The electromagnetic radiation which far is he from the wall if the ve-
causes the body temperature to locity of sound in air is 330ms−1 ?
rise is called A. 110m
A. X-rays. B. 247.5m
B. gamma rays. C. 440m
C. infrared D. 990m. B

Physics; Problems and Solutions 100 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
A. crests.
Vt B. troughs.
d =
2 C. nodes
330 × 1.5
= D. anti-nodes. C
2
= 247.5m
15. The velocity of sound in air, at
constant pressure
11. Which of the following are lon-
gitudinal waves? A. increases with loudness.
A. water waves B. decrease with loudness.
B. light waves C. increases with temperature.
C. sound waves D. decrease with temperature.
D. radio waves C D
12. In forced vibrations, resonance 16. Which one of the following radi-
occurs when the forcing ations undergoes the largest diffrac-
tion when passed through a nar-
A. frequency is equal to the nat-
row aperture?
ural wavelength.
B. velocity is equal to the natu- A. Radio waves
ral velocity. B. Gamma rays
C. frequency is equal to the nat- C. Yellow light
ural frequency. D. Infra red rays. A
D. frequency exceeds the natu-
ral frequency. C Radio waves because they have
a very large wave length.
13. The number of complete oscilla-
tions made per second is referred 17. A source produces waves which
to as travel a distance of 140cm in 0.08
s. If the distance between suc-
A. periodic time cessive crests is 20cm, find the
B. amplitude. frequency of the source.
C. Wavelength. A. 0.875Hz
D. frequency. D. B. 8.750Hz
14. Points on a stationery wave which C. 87.500Hz
are permanently at rest are called D. 8750Hz C

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 101 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
C. x-rays, ultra-violet, infra-red,
d 140cm radio waves
v = = D. Gamma rays, ultra-violet, ra-
t 0.08s
1.4m dio waves, infra red C
v = = 17.5ms−1
0.08s
20 20. .
λ = 20cm = m = 0.2m
100 6
6
from v = f λ
v 17.5ms−1
f = =
λ 0.2m
−1
f = 87.5s = 87.5Hz
Fig. 6 The di-
agram in fig.6 shows parallel wave-
fronts approaching a narrow gap.
18. A man sees the flash from a gun
waves passing through the gap
fired 1020m away and then later
are likely to undergo
hears a bang. How long does the
bang take to reach him? (Take A. reflection
−1
the speed of sound as 340ms ) B. refraction
1020
A. 340×10 s C. diffraction
340
B. 1020 s D. interference C
C. 1020
340 s
21. The effect produced when many
echoes merge into one prolonged
D.340 × 1020 s C
sound is known as
A. noise.
Distance B. harmonics.
Time =
speed C. reverberation
1020
= D. pitch C
340
22. Fig. 3 shows waves spreading
19. Which of the following shows out from a point. The wavelength
the order in increasing wavelength of the waves is
of the members of the electromag-
netic spectrum?
º·
A. Ultra-violet, x-rays, radio waves, 1¾2cm -
¹¸
infra-red
B. radio waves, infra-red, x-rays,
ultra-violet Fig. 3
Physics; Problems and Solutions 102 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
A. 3cm A. 0.07 MHZ
B. 6cm B. 0.3 MHZ
C. 9cm C. 0.6 MHZ
D. 12cm A D. 1.2 MHZ C

12 velocity = fλ
λ =
4 f1 λ1 = f2 λ2
= 3cm
1500 × 0.2M = 500 × f
23. A man standing 85 m from a f = 0.2 × 3M
tall wall fires a gun and hears = 0.6M Hz
the echo from the wall after 0.5
s. Calculate the speed of sound 25. Which of the following are trans-
in air. verse waves only?

A. 340 ms −1 A. Radio, sound, ultra-violet.

B. 170 ms−1 B. Ultra-violet, x-rays, water waves.
C. 85 ms−1 A C. Infrared, gamma rays, sound
wave.
D. 43 ms−1
D. Sound waves, ultra-violet, x-
rays. B
2d
V = 26. A boy standing 150m from a ver-
t
2 × 85 tical cliff claps his hands and hears
= an echo 0.85 seconds later. Find
0.5
= 340 the speed of sound in air.
A. 128 ms−1
24. B. 176 ms−1
Vibrator Wave length Frequency
C. 255 ms−1
Wave P 1,500 m 0.2 MHz D. 353 ms−1 D
Wave Q 500m .........

The table above shows readings 2d

obtained by using a vibrator which V =
t
produces waves of a constant ve- 150
= 2×
locity. Find the frequency of the 0.85
wave Q. = 352.94ms−1 ≈ 353ms−1

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 103 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
27. In a sound wave the particles of B. (i) and (iii) only.
the medium C. (i), (iii) and (iii) only.
A. are stationary D. (ii), (iii) and (iv) only. B
B. move along with the wave. 30. Fig. 5 below shows circular waves
C. vibrate in the same direction incident on a plane reflector. Which
as the wave. of the following patterns repre-
D. vibrate at right angles to the sents the reflected wave?
direction of the wave. C Plane reflector
S
w
S
28. Which of the following statements
z
is true about the wave traveling
from one medium to another?
(i) Its frequency and wavelength
Fig. 5
change.
(ii) Its frequency and velocity change. u
u
(iii) Its velocity and wavelength A. B.
change. u u
(iv) Only its frequency remains C. D.
unchanged.
A
A. (i) only
B. (i) and (ii). 31. Which of the following are not
electromagnetic waves?
C. (i), (ii) and (iii).
D. (iii) and (iv). D A. X-rays.
B. Radar waves.
29. Which of the following statements
C. Micro waves.
are true about sound waves?
D. Sound waves. D
(i) They are longitudinal.
32. A vibrator produces waves which
(ii) They are transverse.
travel a distance of 12 m in 4s. If
(iii) They are produced by vibra- the frequency of the vibrator is
tions. 2Hz, what is the wavelength of
(iv) They can travel through empty the waves?
space.
A. 1.5 m.
A. (ii) and (iv) only. B. 3 m.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 104 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
C. 6 m. 34. Which of the following statements
D. 24 m. A is true?

12m A. Light waves, radio waves and

V = sound waves will all travel
4s
V = 3m/s through a vacuum.
V B. Light waves and radio waves
λ =
f will travel through a vacuum.
3
= C. Light waves and sound waves
2 will travel through a vacuum,
= 1.5
radio waves will not.
33. A girl stands in between two tall D. Sound waves and radio waves
cliffs, and claps her hands. She will travel through a vacuum,
bears the first echo after 1s and light waves will not
the second echo after 2s. If the
speed of sound is 300 ms−1 , the B
distance between cliffs is
35. Sound waves
A. 300 m.
A. do not pass through a vac-
B. 450 m.
uum.
C. 900 m.
B. Travel through solids at lower
D. 1200 m B speed than in air.
C. Do not travel through liquids
2d D. Travel at the highest speed
from V =
t in air A
vt
d1 =
2 Sound always travels faster in solids
300 × 1
= and can not travel in a vacuum.
2
= 150m 36. Which one of the following does
vt
d2 = not change when water travel from
2
300 × 2 deep to shallow water?
=
2 A. Frequency.
= 300m
d = d1 + d2 B. Amplitude.
= 150 + 300 C. Velocity.
= 450 D. Wavelength. A

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 105 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
Frequeny of a wave can only be B. 0.09 ms−1
changed by its source. C. 0.1 ms−
37. Sound travels much greater through D. 1 ms−1 B
A. Steel.
B. Wood. V = fλ
C. Water. 18
but λ =
D. Nitrogen gas. A 10
= 1.8cm
38. Which of the following statements 1.8 18
= m=
are true about refraction of waves? 100 1000
V = fλ
(i) The speed of waves changes. 18
= 5×
(ii) The wavelength changes. 1000
= 0.09ms−1
(iii) The direction of travel changes.
(iv) The frequency changes. 41. The particles of the medium through
which a longitudinal wave trav-
A. (i) only. els
B. (i) and (iii) only.
A. vibrate parallel to the direc-
C.(i), (ii) and (iv) only. tion of the propagation of the
D.(i), (ii) and (iii) only. D wave.
B. vibrate perpendicular to the
39. An echo is produced as a result
direction of the propagation
of sound waves being
of the wave.
A. absorbed by objects. C. move along with the wave.
B. transmitted by objects. D. move in the opposite direc-
C. deflected back by objects. tion to the wave. A
D. bent around corners by ob- 42. A girl standing 300m away from
jects. C a high vertical wall makes a loud
40. Water waves are produced at sound of frequency 60Hz. Calcu-
frequency of 5Hz and the distance late the wave length of the sound
between 10 successive crests is wave if the girl hears the echo
18cm. Calculate the velocity of after 2s.
the waves in ms−1 . A. 0.2m
A. 9 ms−1 B. 2.5m

Physics; Problems and Solutions 106 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
C. 5 m 44. (i) Name the type of wave pro-
D. 10m C duced in (a) above.
(ii) Name one musical instrument
which produces this type of
2d wave.
V =
t
2 × 300
= (i)Stationery wave or trans-
2
= 300 verse wave
from V = fλ (ii)a violin or a quitar i.e.
V any stringed instrument
λ =
f
300 45. What is meant by refraction?
=
60
= 5 Is the bending of waves or
light when they move from
one media to another.
Section B (Structured)
46. .
43. The end Q of a rope is tied to a
pole while the end P is moved up
and down as shown in fig. 9? -

6 ¸ -

P Fig. 9 shallow area

Q Plane waves
?Moved up
Pole
and down Z
Z
~
Plane waves are generated at one
Fig.9
end of a ripple tank. The waves
travel towards the other end through
Sketch the resultant wave pat-
a shallow region having the shape
tern between P and Q.
shown in fig. 9. Complete the di-
Incident wave
agram to show the wavefronts.
6 ¶
¶ Below is the solution diagram

s *
1 j

? J -
J
Reflected wave

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 107 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
47. . 1. They travel at a speed
of 3 × 108 m/s
2. They can travel in a
vacuum i.e. they need
no material media to
propagate
3. They exhibit all wave
properties i.e. they can
be reflectd, refracted,
diffracted, polarised
and undergo interfer-
ence.
49. The diagram in fig. 7 shows a
section of a transverse wave of
wave-length 4.0cm.

A stick is dipped in water as shown

in figure 10. Draw a ray diagram Displacement (cm)

to show how the stick will ap-

pear to an observer at O.

Time (s)
0 0.5 1.0 1.5

Fig. 7

Find its
(i) frequency

T = 1 second
1 1
f = = = 1s−1
T 1s
48. State two properties of electromag- = 1Hz
netic radiations.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 108 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
(ii) amplitude ? (i) Band A
it is 4cm (ii) Band B
(iii) velocity
(i) Band A - to measure
v = fλ thickness of paper
= 1Hz × 4cm (ii) Band B - to enables us to
= 4cm/s see near and far objects
= 0.04ms−1
52. What is meant by a standing wave?
50. The figure below shows part of
the electromagnetic spectrum con- This is the resulting wave or
sisting of gamma rays radio waves, the new wave formed when
infrared and visible light. two similar waves moving
increasing wavelength
-
in opposite directions inter-
fere or travel together in the
A B C D same media.

Identify the bands to which these 53 Fig. 11 below shows plane waves
radiations belong. approaching a gap in a barrier.
A
B - - - Barrier

C
D - - - Gap

A - Gamma rays because - - -

it has the lowest wave- Plane waves
length or highest fre- Fig. 11

quency
B - Visible light
(i) Show on the diagram , the
C - Infra red appearance of the waves af-
D - Radio waves ter the barrier.

51. State one application of radiation (ii) What is the effect of reduc-
above in ing the size of the gap?

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 109 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(i) 55. Describe how a straight wave is
produced in a ripple tank.
Solution diagram
Barrier
By dipping plane sheet or
- - -
material in the water in the
- - - ripple tank continuously.
- - - 56. State the conditions for the oc-
Plane waves Fig.11 currence of destructive interfer-
ence of waves.
(ii)The waves become 1. the waves must be out of
more circular or get phase or with a phase differ-
diffracted more ence of 180◦ .
54. The diagram in fig. 10 represents 2. the waves must have
a wave traveling in water. equal wavelength and fre-
quency

B
57. Two identical loudspeakers A and
6
B are placed near each other as
- shown in fig. 19. The speakers
Distance along
direction of propagation vibrate with same frequency.
? A
¾ - N
Fig. 10

(i) Name the part labeled B: A

QQ
P

,
(ii) If the distance represented B ,
QQ
by A is 20cm and the speed
of the waves is 8.0ms−1 , what Fig. 10
M

is the frequency of the wave?

(i) a crest Explain what will be observed on

a sound detector moved from N
(ii) to M
v The loudness of sound
f =
λ (amplitude) increases
8ms−1 and decreases regula-
= 20 = 40s−1
100 m tory due to interference
= 40Hz of sound from the two
speakers.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 110 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
58. What is meant by the term rever-
beration? 2d
t =
v
Reverberation is the 2d = tv
repetitive reflection of tv
d =
sound on surfaces. 2
0.9 × 1450
=
2
59. State two factors which affect fre- = 652.5m
quency of a vibrating string.

1. tension in the string 63. State one practical application of

2. length of the librat- echoes
ing string or mass of in determining depth of
the string sea

60. A sound wave of frequency 440Hz, Paper II (Essay)

has a velocity of 330ms−1 . Calcu-
late its wavelength. 64. (a) Define the following terms
as applied to waves.
from v = f λ (i) Amplitude
v (ii)frequency
λ =
f
330 (b) (i) What is meant by inter-
= ference of waves?
440
= 0.75m (ii)Using a labeled diagram,
show how circular wa-
ter waves are reflected
61. What is an echo? from a straight barrier.

An echo is reflected (c) (i) Use a labeled diagram

sound. to show the main bands
of an electromagnetic
spectrum.
62. An echo sounder on a boat sends
down a pulse through the water (ii) Calculate the frequency
and receives its echo 0.9s later. If of a radio wave of wave-
the velocity of sound in the wa- length 2m
ter is 1450ms−1 , calculate the wa-
ter depth. Solution

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 111 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(a) (i) Amplitude is the maximum (b) Two people X and Y stand
displacement of an oscil- in a line at distances of 330m
lating particle from its rest and 660m respectively from
or reference position. a high wall. Find the time
(ii) Frequency is the num- interval taken for X to hear
ber of cycles produced on the first and second sounds
oscillations made in 1 sec- when Y makes a loud sound.
onds. (speed of sound in air =
(b) (i) Interference of waver is 330ms−1 )
where two or more waves (c) (i) What is meant by sta-
travel together in the same tionary waves?
media simultaneously. (ii) Name one musical in-
(ii) strument which produces
(c) (i) The main bands of the elec- stationary waves.
tromagnetic spectrum are Solution
shown in the figure below;
(a) The speed of sound is higher
in solids than in air.
Since sound velocity depends
on the density of the media
Ultraviolet
Infrared through which it passes, then
radiation
radiation it will travel faster in solid
that have a higher density than
R O Y G B I V
in air which has a lower den-
Visible light
sity,
(ii)
(b) Let us use this sketch be-
c low to show where the two
f = echoes received by person X
λ
3 × 108 m/s come from
=
2 Wall
f = 1.5 × 108 Hz 6

= 150M Hz 330m ?
Second sound
t 6X 660m
65. (a) Explain why the speed
First sound 6
of sound is higher in solids
than in air. tY ?

Physics; Problems and Solutions 112 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
the first echo is the direct sound
66. State any three effects of elec-
heard from X. tromagnetic radiation on mat-
If it takes time t1 , then; ter.

Solution
Distance moved
t1 =
Sound speed • they heat matter when they
660 − 330 fall on it.
t1 =
V • They have a specific penetra-
330
= tion depth in conductors.
330
= 1 seconds • They cause ionisation in gasses
The second echo is the echo 67. (a) State the conditions required
reflected from the wall, if it for a stationary wave to
takes time, t2 , then
be formed.
Total distance travelled
t2 = (b) List the factor on which
Sound speed
t1 =
330m to wall + 660m from wall the frequency of a wave
330 in a vibrating string de-
990
= pends.
330
= 3 seconds
(c) A child stands between two
Hence the time interval taken cliffs and makes a loud sound.
for X to hear the first and If it hears the first echo
the second sounds when Y makes after 1.5s and the second
a loud sound is; echo after 2.0s, find the dis-
tance between the two cliffs
[speed of sound in air =
t = t2 − t1 320ms−1 ]
= 3−1
= 2 seconds Solution

c(i) a stationery wave is the re- (a) For a stationary wave to be

sultant wave formed when two formed, the conditions are
similar progressive waves are • The waves must travel in
super imposed on one another opposite directions in the
(or interfere) when traveling same media
in opposite directions in the • The waves must have the
same media. same wave-length and fre-
c(ii) a guitar or violin quency

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 113 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(b) frequency of a wave from a hence the distance between
vibrating string depends on; the two cliffs is
• Tension in it (320+240)m which is 560 me-
• Length of the string that tres
is vibrating 68. (a) What is meant by sound?
• The mass per unit length
(b) Describe an experiment
of the string
to show that sound waves
(c) from the question, we have requires a material medium
first echo heard after = 1.5s for transmission.
second echo heard after = 2.0s (c) Explain briefly the follow-
−1
speed of sound in air = 320ms ing:
Using the diagram below, we (i) a dog is more able than
have; a human being to de-
Sound Sound
-
tect the presence of a
9 t ¾
-
first echo
thief tiptoeing at night.
Second echo t = 1.5s
t = 2.0s
(ii) an approaching train
can easily be detected
by human ears placed
Second First
cliff cliff close to the rails.
(d) A sound of frequency 250Hz
2d is produced 120m away from
From speed =
t a high wall. Calculate the
The distance of the first cliff
(i) wave length,
from the child, d1
(ii) time it takes the sound
speed × time wave to travel to and
d1 =
2 from the wall. (Speed
−1
320ms × 1.5s of sound air = 330ms−2 )
=
2
= 240m Solution
The distance of the second cliff (a) Sound are the mechanical vi-
from the child, d2 brations produced by any vi-
brating object in contact with
Speed × time
d2 = air or any other media,
2
−1
320ms × 2.0s (b) an experiment to show that
= sound require a material me-
2
= 320m dia for transmission.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 114 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
• Arrange the apparatus as (a gas)
shown below; (d) Sound of 250Hz is produced
-
-
Strong air tight-cork
To battery
cork
120m away

²¯
electric bell (i) its wave length, λ is
q =
±° ) airmtight gas jar V
λ =
f
330ms−1
=
to vacuum pump 250s−1
• When the electric bell is = 1.32m
switched on, the sound can Hence the wave length of
be heard. sound is 1.32m
• Switch on the vacuum pump (ii)
connected to the gas jar,
it sucks air out of the jar. 2×d
Time =
• When nearly all the air V
2 × 120
is removed, i.e. there is =
330
nearly a vacuum; the sound = 0.7273 seconds
of the bell will not be heard.
This confirms that sound Hence sound takes 0.7273
requires a material medium seconds to travel to and
for transmission. from the wall.
(c) Let us explain the following;
69. (a) (i) Describe how the speed
(i) a dog’s ears will detect of waves in a ripple tank
a thief tip-toeing at night can be decreased.
and not the human ear be-
(ii)Explain the effect of de-
cause it can detect sound
creasing the speed of
with a higher frequency
the wave in (a) (i) on
and sound of low inten-
frequency.
sity which the human ear
can not detect. (b) With the aid of sketch di-
(ii) an approaching train can agrams, explain the effect
easily be detected by hu- of size of a gap on diffrac-
man ears placed close to tion of waves.
the rails because sound trav- (c) (i) Give two reasons why
els faster in solids ( like sound is louder at night
the rails) compare to air than during the day.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 115 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
(ii) An echo-sounding equip- -λ ¾

ment on a ship receives

sound pulses reflected
from the sea bed 0.02s d6
?
after they were sent out
from it. If the speed of
sound in water is 1500ms−1 ,
calculate the depth of
water under the ship. λ
- ¾
(d) Identify two differences ¸
-
between water and sound - Á
± *
waves. ?
- d
6
U q
Solution - - R

W
(a) (i) the speed of waves in a
ripple tank can be decreased
by reducing the depth of (c) (i) During the day, air near
water in the ripple tank. the ground is very hot and
(ii) the effect of decreasing hence less dense, and that
the speed of waves in a(i) above it is warm (more dense)
above is that; the wave length so sound produced on the
of the water waves reduces, ground is refracted upwards
but frequency does not change. or towards the more dense
Frequency can only be changed meduim.
During day
by the source of the wave.
(b) the smaller the gap or size of Cold
the slit, the greater the de- *
gree of diffraction. This is Warm
shown in the diagrams below;
-λ ¾

But at night the ground

z
is cold and the air above
6 it is warm, hence sound
d produced is refracted to-
?
wards the ground and hence
it is louder.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 116 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
During night
quency f , and wavelength,
j
Warm λ of a wave.
(ii) A radio wave is trans-
Cold mitted at a frequency
of 150MHz Calculate its
wavelength.

(ii)Speed of sound, V (c) (i) List four properties of

electromagnetic waves.
total distance moved (ii) A long open tube is par-
V =
time taken tially immersed in wa-
2×d ter and tuning fork of
V =
t frequency 425Hz is sounded
Vt
=⇒ d = and held above it. The
2
1500 × 0.02 tube is gradually raised,
= find the length of the
2
= 15 metres air column when reso-
nance first occurs. [Ne-
(d) differences between water and glect the end correction,
sound waves Speed of sound in air =
• Water waves traveled only 340ms−1 ]
on the surface of water and
sound waves travel through Solution
the interior of any media
(a) Consider the wave below
• Sound waves can be heard
by the human ear and wa-
ter waves can not be de-
6 6 Amplitude
tected by the human ear. /
• Water waves are transverse ? -
waves while sound waves
are longitudinal waves. ? ¾Wavelength -

70. (a) With aid of a diagram ex- Amplitude is the maximum

plain the terms amplitude displacement of a particle from
and wavelength as applied its rest position when a wave
to wave motion. passes through a media while
(b) (i) Derive an equation re- wavelength is the minimum
lating velocity V , fre- distance between 2 particles

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 117 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
in-phase in a media through V
=⇒ λ =
which the wave is passing. f
(b) (i) deriving an equation to re- 3.0 × 108 ms−1
=
late velocity V , wave length 1.5 × 108
λ and frequency f , of a = 2.0 metres
wave hence its wave length is
from 2.0 metres
distance moved (c) (i) properties of electro-magnetic
Speed =
time taken wave
if we consider a distance • they travel at a speed
equal to one wavelength, of 3.0 × 108 ms−1
this is covered in time equal • they need no material
to the period T of a wave media to travel i.e. they
can travel even in a vac-
λ
V = uum.
T
1 • They exhibit all prop-
But T = erties of waves i.e re-
f
V = λ÷T flection, refraction, in-
1 terference, diffraction
= λ÷ and polarisation
f
f • They are transverse waves
= λ×
1 (ii)
= fλ
f = 425Hz
Hence V = fλ
V = 340ms−1
Consider the diagram be-
(ii) a radio wave is an elec-
low for the first position
tromagnetic wave, so it trav-
of resonance.
els at a speed of V = 3.0× 6
108 ms−1

given f = 150M Hz l = 14 λ
= 150 × 1000000Hz
= 150000000Hz
= 1.5 × 108 Hz ?

length of the first resonance

from V = f λ position is 14 λ but from V =

Physics; Problems and Solutions 118 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
fλ (iv) Ultra sound or x-rays are
used in the remote control of
V
λ = a television receiver
f
340ms−1 72. (a) State three differences be-
=
425s−1 tween sound and light waves.
= 0.8 metres
(b) (i) Explain how stationery
first resonance position is waves are formed.
l (ii) State three main char-
1 acteristics of stationery
l = λ
4 waves.
1
= × 0.8m (c) (i) Define the terms frequency
4 and wavelength as ap-
= 0.2m
plied to sound.
= 0.2 × 100cm
(ii) Describe an experiment
= 20cm
to demonstrate resonance
71. in sound.
(d) The velocity and frequency
(a) Name the electromagnetic ra- of sound in air at a cer-
diation which tain time were 320ms−1 and
(i) causes sensation of heat. 200Hz respectively. At a
later time, the air temper-
(ii) passes through a thin sheet
ature changed and the ve-
of lead.
locity of sound in air was
(iii) is used in satellite com- found to be 340ms−1 . De-
munication. termine the change in wave-
(iv) is used for remote con- length of the sound.
trol of a television receiver.
Solution
Solution
(a) differences between sound and
(i) Infra-red radiations cause sen- light waves.
sation of heat.
• Sound is a mechanical wave
(ii) gamma-rays pass through a while Light is an electro-
thin sheet of lead. magnetic wave
(iii) micro-waves are used in satel- • Sound requires a material
lite communication media to travel while Light

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 119 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
requires no material me- self.
dia for transmission i.e. can Or
travel in a vacuum
Wavelength is the short-
• Sound can not be polarised est distance between two
because it is a longitudi- particles in the media where
nal wave while Light can the wave is passing, that
be polarised because it is are in-phase.
a transverse wave.
(ii) An experiment to demon-
(b) (i) Stationery waves are formed strate resonance in sound,
when two similar waves using a closed tube
are made to travel in the
• Get a closed tube and
same media in opposite di-
a tuning fork
rections. It is made up of
nodes ( of zero displace- • With the open end of
ment) where the waves in- the tube facing upwards
terfere destructively and pluck the tuning fork
antinodes where waves in- and more it up and down
terfere constructively. along the axis of the tube.
(ii) characteristics of stationery • At a certain height, the
waves tube will be heard pro-
ducing some sound, hence
• They appear not to move
the tube has been made
or appear to be stationery
to vibrate by the stand-
• Their wavelength is half ing wave formed by the
that of the interfering sound wave from the
waves fork and echo in the tube.
• They always have a greater The tube is made to vi-
amplitude at some points brate by another sys-
due to constructive in- tem, the tuning fork,
terference and a zero and that is what we call
amplitude at points where resonance.
there is destructive in-
terference. (d) Initial wave-length λ1

(c) (i) frequency is the number V1

λ1 =
of cycles produced per sec- f
ond. Wave length is the 320ms−1
minimum distance though =
200Hz
which a wave repeats it- = 1.6 metres

Physics; Problems and Solutions 120 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
New wavelength, λ2 sound to travel to the wall
and back to you.
V2
λ2 = • Clap your hand and wait
f
340ms−1 for the echo which you
= will receive.
200Hz
= 1.7 metres • Repeat this clap and mea-
sure the time t between
the change in the wave-length clapping and receiving
of the sound is 1.7 - 1.6 or 0.1 the echo using a watch
metres or 10 cm. i.e wave- or millisecond timer
length of sound increased.
• If the distance between
73. (a) What is an echo? you and the wall is, d,
then velocity, V, of sound
(b) (i) Describe an experiment
is
to measure the speed
of sound in air. 2×d
V =
(ii) State any two likely t
sources of error in the 2d
=
experiment. t
(c) Describe an experiment to The distance d can be
determine how the frequency measured using a tape
of a vibrating string de- measure.
pends on the length of the (ii) Sources of errors in this
string. experiment may be;
• wind, since it affects the
Solution speed of sound in air
(a) An echo is reflected sound • temperature or temper-
ature changes of the sur-
(b) (i) An experiment to measure
rounding air
speed of sound in air
To measure velocity of sound • timing errors, i.e. one
in air let us use the echo may not time well the
method. time of sending and re-
One needs a place with a ceiving the echo.
clear space extending be- (c) An experiment to determine
yond 100m, from a high how the frequency of a vibrat-
vertical wall. Here we de- ing string depends on the length
termine the time taken by of the string

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 121 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
• Here several different tun- This shows that frequency of
ing forks, and a sonome- sound produced by a vibrat-
ter fitted with a steel pi- ing string is inversely propor-
ano wire are required. tional to its length.
• Adjust the tension in the
wire so that its length is 74. (a) List three differences be-
as long as possible when tween sound waves and ra-
in unison with the lowest dio waves.
frequency tuning fork. This (b) Fig. 2 shows waves prop-
will ensure that the length agating towards a concave
corresponding to the re- reflector.
maining forks will be shorter
than this.
• Keeping the tension con-
stant, now tune the wire
­­
to each of the other forks X - - - -
in turn by altering the ef-
fective length of the vibrat-
ing wire by moving the wooden
Plane waves Concave reflector
piece holding one end of
the vibrating string.
Fig. 2
• Corresponding values of
frequency f and length l (i) Draw a diagram to show
are recorded in the table how the waves will be
as shown below. reflected.
(ii) If the velocity of the
1
Frequency Length l fl waves is 320ms−1 and
f (in Hz) l( in cm) the distance between two
successive crests is 10cm,
• Plotting a graph of f against find the period of the
1 waves.
l , you will get a straight
line.
6
r
q Solution
s
f r (a) Differences
s
r
s • Sound waves can not be
- polarized and radio waves
1
l
can be polarized

Physics; Problems and Solutions 122 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS 1.12. WAVES
• sound waves are mechan- f = 3200Hz
ical waves while radio waves
are electromagnetic waves
• sound waves require a ma- period, T
terial media for transmis- 1
sion while radio waves re- T =
f
quire no material media 1
for transmission =
3200
(b) (i) = 0.0003125s
-
k- - -
T = 3.125 × 10−4 s
ª
}
=
} ¾
¾ ¾ ¾ q +¾ ¾
¼ }
k 75. (a) Two identical sources are
+
k
made to produce circular
+ - - - - waves in a ripple tank. With
the aid of a diagram ex-
Dotted lines are reflected plain how interference fringes
waves may be obtained.
Full lines are the incident (b)State two similarities be-
waves tween water waves and elec-
(ii) from the question tromagnetic waves
V = 320m/s (c)Describe a simple method
of detecting ultraviolet ra-
λ = 10cm
10 diations.
= m
100 (d)A radio station broadcast
T = ? on 49metre band.
(i) what is meant by the
from above statement
(ii)calculate the frequency
V = fλ of the broadcast
V (iii) Explain how radio waves
⇒f =
λ are transmitted
320
= ³ 10 ´
100 Solution
320
= ³
1
´
10 (a) The waves from the two sources
= 320 × 10 interfere;

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 123 Physics; Problems and Solutions

1.12. WAVES CHAPTER 1. MECHANICS
• Constructively at points called = 6.122 × 106 Hz
antinodes and = 6.122M Hz
• destructively at points called
nodes (iii) How radio waves are trans-
mitted
the pattern is shown below;
Antinodal lines They are produced by the trans-
Wave fronts mitter up into the sky
À Nodal lines They meet the ionosphere where
° + that are totally internally re-
flected back to the earth
Then the reflected waves can
be detected by the receivers
`t `s ( the radios, Televisions, Mo-
bile phone antenas, e.t.c.)
(b) Similarities between water waves undergoing total

waves and electromagnetic waves; internal reflection

Ionosphere
• Both are transverse waves
°
• Both can be polarised =
*
(c) How to detect ultraviolet ra- sky wave w

diations; We can use zinc sul-

phide to detect ultraviolet ra-
diations because when it is
exposed to ultraviolet radia- transmitter radio receiver
tions it glows with certain colours
(Green).
(d) (i) It means that the radiowaves
used by that radio station
have a wavelength of 49m
(ii) Using the wave equation
V = fλ

V = fλ
V
f =
λ
3.0 × 108
=
49
= 6122448.98

Physics; Problems and Solutions 124 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

Chapter 2

Light

8cm
= × 6cm
Contents 24cm
= 2cm
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . 125
2.2 Reflection . . . . . . . . . 129
2. When does the eclipse of the moon
2.3 Refraction . . . . . . . . 137
occur?
2.4 Dispersion . . . . . . . . 149
A. When the moon is between
the sun and the earth
B. When the Earth is between
2.1 Introduction the sun and the moon
C. When the sun is totally eclipsed
Section A (Objectives)
by the moon
D. When a bright ring of sun-
1. An Object 6 cm high is placed 24 light shows round the edge
cm from a tiny hole in a pinhole of the moon. B
camera. If the distance from the
hole to the screen is 8 cm. find 3. When a pin hole camera is moved
the size of the image on the screen nearer an object, the size of the
image
A. 0.2cm
A. remains the same.
B. 2.0cm
B. becomes smaller.
C. 18.0cm
C. becomes larger
D. 32.0cm B
D. becomes diminished. C

hi V 4. A man 1.75m tall stands at a dis-

= tance of 7.0 m from the pinhole
h◦ U
V of pinhole camera. If the film is
hi = × h◦ 0.20m behind the pinhole, find
U
125
2.1. INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
the length of the image of the man (i) Draw to scale a ray di-
formed on the film. agram to show the for-
mation of the image by
A. 8.75m the pinhole camera.
B. 4.00m (ii) What is the nature of
C. 0.80 the image?
(iii) Find the magnification.
D. 0.05m D
(iv) Explain what happens
to the image if the pin-
hi V hole is made larger.
=
ho u Solution
V
hi = × ho
u (a) An experiment to show that
0.2 light travels in a straight line;
= × 1.75
7 The following steps are taken;
= 0.05m.
• Drill holes in about four
similar cardboards
Section B (Structured)
• Arrange them as shown
below;
5. Sketch a diagram to show the for-
mation of a solar eclipse. Bulb
f- -d -d -d d-

z 3 ¾»
j ²¯
q1 Light source
Sun ±°
½¼
3
1 j
Moon Earth • Place a candle at one end
of the cardboards so that,
one at the other end can
Paper II (Essay) see the light from the can-
dle.
6. (a) Describe an experiment to • When one of the cardboards
show that light travels in is pulled out of the array
a straight line. or line then one can not
(b) An object of height 4cm is see the light from the can-
placed 5cm away from a dle.
pinhole camera. The screen This shows that light travels
is 7cm from the pinhole. in a straight line.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 126 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.1. INTRODUCTION
(b) (i) Diagram in figure 2.1 shows = 1.4
the formation of the im-
age by the pin hole cam-
era. hence the magnification is
(ii) nature of the images formed 1.4
by the pin hole camera OR
• They are inverted or up- from the accurate graph-
sidedown ical construction, the height
• They are real of the image is 5.6cm, hence
magnification, M is
• They are laterally in-
verted Image’s height
M =
• They have an infinite object’s height
depth of focus i.e. all 5.6
=
parts of the image are 4
equally sharp. = 1.4
(iii)
(iv) when the pin hole is made
larger, the image becomes
:
6 z hi blurred i.e. whitish not
h◦ = 4cm
: z
?
clear or less sharp.

¾ 5cm -¾ 7cm -

Since the triangles formed

by the two rays are simi-
lar, then

hi h◦
=
V U
hi V
=
h◦ U

since magnification
hi
M =
h◦
V
=
U
7cm
=
5cm
Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 127 Physics; Problems and Solutions
2.1. INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT

Figure 2.1: Scaled ray diagram: Pin hole camera

Physics; Problems and Solutions 128 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.2. REFLECTION
2.2 Reflection D. 60cm C

Section A (Objectives)

30 − 6 = 24
1. A concave mirror can be used as a 2 × 24 = 48
shaving mirror because when an
object is placed between the fo-
4. An object is placed 6cm from a
cus and the pole, the image formed
plane mirror. If the object is moved
is
further by 2cm, find the distance
A. magnified, virtual and erect. between the object and its image.
B. magnified, real and inverted.
A. 16cm.
C. diminished, real and inverted.
B. 12cm.
D. diminished, virtual and erect.
C. 8cm.
A
D. 6cm. A
2. Light energy is reflected when,
5. Which of the following informa-
A. angle of incidence is greater
tion is true about concave and
than angle of reflection.
convex mirrors?
Concave mirror Convex mirror
B. angle of incidence is equal to A. Converges light Diverges light
angle of refraction. B.
C.
Diverges light
Refracts light
Converges light
Reflects light
D. Has a wide field of Has a narrow field of
C. angle of incidence is equal to view. view. B

angle of reflection.
6. The focal length of a concave mir-
D. the normal at the point of in-
ror is the
cidence makes the same an-
gle as the incident ray. C
A. distance between the pole of
3. An object is placed 30cm in front the mirror and the focal point.
of a plane mirror. If the mirror is B. distance between the centre
moved a distance of 6cm towards of curvature and the mirror.
the object, find the distance be-
tween the object and its image. C. distance between the object
and the image.
A. 24cm
D. diameter of the mirror. A
B. 36cm
C. 48cm 7.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 129 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.2. REFLECTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
´´ A person observes the image of
´´
Plane mirror´´
´
@ ´´´ a pin placed in front of a plane
R´´
@
´´ mirror as shown in fig. 4 above.
´´
´´
Q P ´´ The reflected beam from the pin
z z ´´
´´
´´ reaching the observer is a
´´
´´
¾ 2m -´´
´´
´´ A. virtual beam
´´
¾ 3m -´´
´´
Fig. 7
B. divergent beam
C. parallel beam.
Objects P and Q are placed at D. convergent beam B
distances of 2 m and 3 m respec-
10. A point object is 10cm in front
tively from a plane mirror as shown
in fig. 7. Find how far the image of a plane mirror. When the ob-
of P is from Q. ject is moved 4cm towards the
mirror, what is the distance be-
A. 1m. tween the object and the image?
B. 4m A. 6cm
C. 5m B. 8cm
D. 7m C C. 10cm
D. 12cm
8. In a pin-hole camera, sharper and
taller images are obtained by New object distance from the mir-
ror is 10 − 4 = 6cm. distance be-
A. widening the hole and mov- tween image and object is 6×2 =
ing the object farther. 12cm (10 − 4) × 2 = 12 D
B. narrowing the hole and mov-
Section B (Structured)
ing the object nearer.
C. using a longer camera with a 11. Draw a ray diagram to show the
wider hole. formation of an image of the ob-
ject O placed infront of a convex
D. using shorter camera with a mirror shown in fig. 8. F is the
narrower hole B principal focus of the mirror.
9.
Plane mirror 6
^
Pin
u O I F C
^
Observer
Á
Fig. 8
Fig. 4

Physics; Problems and Solutions 130 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.2. REFLECTION
(c) An object is placed 15.0cm
-
I in front of a concave mir-
6 q ror. An upright image with
i
magnification of four is pro-
6
O I F C duced. By graphical method,
determine the:
(i) nature of the image.
12. State one application of a convex (ii) focal length of the mir-
mirror. ror.
In telescopes to observe dis-
(iii) distance of the image
tant objects and in super
from the mirror.
markets to supervise cus-
tomers picking the goods (d) Name two applications of
they are to buy a concave mirror.

13. Define the term lateral inversion Solution

as applied to mirrors (a) Virtual image is an image which
This is a property where cannot be formed on a screen.
the left of the image in (b)Because it has a high field of
the mirror is the right view.
of the object and the im- wide field of view

ages’s right is the object’s narrow field of view

}
left. =
Y /
À
?
)
14. State two properties of an im- wU U
s y ²
age formed in a concave mirror
when the object is placed between
(c)
the focal point and the mirror.
v
• it is virtual Magnification =
u
v
• it is magnified 4 =
15
v = 60cm
Paper II (Essay)

15. (a) Explain the term virtual im-

age as applied to optics. from the diagram in figure 2.3,
it is;
(b) With aid of a ray diagram,
explain why a convex mir- (i) • Upright
ror is used as a driving mir- • Virtual
ror. • Magnified

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 131 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.2. REFLECTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
• Formed behind the mir- (d) Give reasons for use of
ror convex mirrors in vehicles
(ii) From the ray diagram,f =
Solution
12cm.
(iii) Distance of the image (a) An experiment to verify the
from the mirror; v laws of reflection of light
v = u×M • get a white sheet of pa-
v = 15 × 4 per and pin it on the soft
v = 60cm board.
• Draw a line AB (as mir-
ror line) and lines at an-
(d) • Used by dentists to exam- gles of 10, 20, 30, 40, 50,
ine the patient’s teeth 60, 70 degrees as shown
• Used in telescope to collect below.
enough light ways for anal- • Pin two pins P1 and P2 on
ysis the line of angle 70◦ on one
• Used in projectors to pre- side of the paper and the
vent loss of lights rays mirror positioned on line
16. (a) Describe an experiment to AB as shown below;
demonstrate the laws of re- A B
P2 s s P3
flection of light.
i◦ r ◦
(b) With the aid of a diagram P1 t t P4
illustrate how the shadows
are formed when an opaque
object is placed between • Observe the images of the
an extended source of light, pins P1 and P2 in the mir-
and a screen. ror and pin other pins P3
(c) An object 10cm high is placed and P4 so that they are in
at a distance of 25cm from line with the images of P1
a convex mirror of focal and P2 .
length 10cm. • Measure the angle of re-
(i) Draw a ray diagram to flection, r
locate the position of the • Repeat the above proce-
image. dures for the other lines
(ii) Calculate the magni- and tabulate your results
fication as shown below;

Physics; Problems and Solutions 132 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.2. REFLECTION
i◦ r ◦ the shadow) and those that
10 receive some light form the
20 penumbra (the lighter part
30 of the shadow).
40 (c) (i) from question
50
60 ho = 10cm
70 U = 25cm
• Plot a graph of i◦ against f = 10cm
r◦ , you will get

6
p p
The sketch is
p 10cm
¾ -
p
- I
p z
r 10cm 66 y
p ? p 6p p
O P F C
i◦ r
p ¾ 25cm - 10cm
¾ -
p p
the accurate ray diagram
- is shown in figure 2.2
r◦ (ii) from graph in figure 2.2
A straight line with a gra-
dient of unity. This shows hi = 3.4cm
that the angle of incidence, hence
i◦ , is always equal to the
angle of refraction, r◦ and hi
magnification =
that is the law of reflec- ho
3.4cm
tion. =
10cm
(b) = 0.34

Extended source
1
-
²¯-
q
1 (d) Convex minors are used be-
±°- - µ
q cause they have a wider field
µ
of view.
Umbra

Penumbra 17. (a) With the aid of diagrams,

parts on the screen where no distinguish between diffuse
light from the sources reaches and regular reflection.
form the umbra (dark part of (b)

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 133 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.2. REFLECTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
Ray from a gun
i.e. a parallel beam is reflected
Light from a bird in all directions and regular
reflection is when a wave (or
/
s light) is reflected on a smooth
30◦ 60◦
surface. Always a parallel beam
Reflector is reflected as a parallel beam.
M

Fig. 2

A ray from a bird makes

RRRRR
an angle of 30◦ with a plane µµµµµ

reflector and a ray from

the barrel of the gun makes
an angle of 60◦ to the same Regular reflection
reflector at the same point.
M as shown in fig. 2. (b) for the ray from the barrel
Find the angle through which of the gun to fall on the bird,
the reflector must be ro- the sum of the angle of inci-
tated about M such that dent and angle of reflection
the ray from the barrel of should be equal to
the gun falls on the bird.
(c) With the aid of a diagram 180 − 60 − 30 = 90◦
explain why a parabolic
mirror is most suitable for but from the law of reflection.
use in car headlights.
(d) List three uses of a con- Angle of incidence = Angle of reflection

cave mirror. i = r
Solution But i + r = 90
(a) Diffuse reflection is a type of 2i = 2r = 90
reflection of light which oc- i=r = 45◦
curs on the surface of a rough
surface For this to be the case, the
glancing angle of the ray from
the gun should also be 45◦ this
RRRRR 6
6µ 7
mean we must rotate the mi-
* nor through 15◦ (60◦ − 45◦ ).

Diffuse reflection
Physics; Problems and Solutions 134 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.2. REFLECTION

◦
I45
ª

q I
◦ 60◦ 15◦
30

Regular reflection
(c) For a parabolic mirror, the
a caustic surface can not be
formed because all the rays
are focused exactly to the fo-
cus or when a light source is
placed at the focus, a paral-
lel beam is produced.

parallel beam
¸
¾
¾
¾
¾ 6
¸>
¾ q :
z
¾ µ s
^
¾ ?
¾
¾ 6

Focus
Parabolic reflector
(d) Concave mirrors are used in
• Car head lamps and in search
light to produce parallel
beams of light
• In a projector to collect light
that would be lost.
• In telescopes to collect enough
light that can be ised to
view astronomical bodies.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 135 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.2. REFLECTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT

Figure 2.2: Scaled ray diagram: curved mirrors

himage = 4ho

¾
6
j ho
q r r
¾ 60cm - ¾ 15cm -

Figure 2.3: Scaled ray diagram: curved mirrors

Physics; Problems and Solutions 136 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.3. REFRACTION
2.3 Refraction 4. An object is placed between a con-
verging lens and its principal fo-
Section A (Objectives) cus. The image formed is

A. real, magnified, upright.

1. A pin is placed in front of a con- B. real, magnified, inverted.
vex lens at a distance less than
C. virtual, diminished, upright.
the focal length of the lens. What
type of image is formed? D. virtual, magnified, upright.

A. Real, inverted, diminished. D

B. Virtual, erect, magnified. 5. Which of the following is a correct
C. Real, erect, diminished. B ray diagram?
D. Virtual, inverted, magnified.
z
2. A stick with one end immersed ¶ 3
¶ Á
:
in a liquid appears bent at the : ¶
¶ º
liquid surface due to ¶
A. B.
A. diffusion.
?
B. reflection. °
U
C. interference. ~ )

D. refraction. D C. D.

3. An object 2cm tall is placed 5cm C

infront of a convex lens. A real 6. An object is placed at a distance
image is produced 20cm from the of 20 cm from a convex lens of
lens. Calculate the magnification focal length 15cm. The type of
of the lens. image formed is
A. 4
A. inverted and magnified
B. 2
B. inverted and diminished
C. 0.5
C. upright and diminished.
D. 0.25 A
D. upright and magnified. A
Magnification, M
Using the lens formula
V 20cm
M = =
U 5cm 1 1 1
M = 4 = −
V f U
Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 137 Physics; Problems and Solutions
2.3. REFRACTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
1 1 1 0.3584
= − =
V 15 20 0.64278
1 = 0.55752
=
60 c = sin−1 (0.55752)
V = 60cm
= 33.885
since V > U it is magnified and
the object is between F and C,
9. A ray of light PQ is incident on the
for a convex lens the image is al-
face AB of a glass prism ABC as
ways inverted, since V is posi-
shown in the diagram in fig. 2
tive, then the image is real.
7. A stick with one end immersed in T
S
water appears bent at the water
U
surface because of
] 6
µ
A. Diffraction. R ¾A C
B. Reflection
6
C. Interference. ­­
­
D. Refraction. D Q­
K
8. A ray of light is incident on a B
glass block at an angle of inci- P
dence of 40◦ and the angle of re-
fraction is 21◦ . Find the critical Which one of the rays, R, S, T, U
angle of the glass. indicates the correct direction of
A. 42.0◦ the emergent ray?
B. 40.0◦
A. R
C. 33.8◦
B. S
D. 35.0◦ C
C. T
sin i D. U C
n =
sin r
sin 40
=
sin 21 Section B (Structured)
1
sin c =
n
sin 21
= 10. State the laws of refraction.
sin 40
Physics; Problems and Solutions 138 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.3. REFRACTION
Retina
(i) The incident ray, re-
fracted ray and the nor-
mal at the point of inci- ® I
¾
dent all lie in the same
S
o
S ¾
plane. S
Lens
(ii)The ratio of the sine of
Fig.13
the angle of incident to
the sine of the angle of
refraction for any two (a) Explain whether the eye is
media, is always con- able to see the object clearly.
stant.
No because the image I is not
11. .
formed on the retina.

(b) What is meant by accommo-

E
dation?

This is the change of the eye’s

focal length by the ciliary
muscle so as to form the im-
age of an object in front of
uO
the eye, on the retina.
In the diagram below, an object 13. The refractive index of a glass block
O is placed at the botom of a clear is 1.62. Calculate its critical an-
pond. Draw rays to show how gle.
the object appears to an observer
at E. from n sin C = 1
à !
−1 1
C = sin
Ã
n !
7
1
= sin−1
µ
1.62
e −1
¸ = sin (0.617)
u
= 38.12
O

12. Fig. 13 shows refraction of light

rays from a distant object by a 14. Define focal length of a converg-
human eye. ing lens

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 139 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.3. REFRACTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
It is the distance between the
optical centre and the prin-
cipal focus of a converging Q
z
lens.
P
3
R
15. The focal length of converging lens
is 10.0cm. What is its power.

1 18. Light traveling in water is inci-

P = dent at a water-air surface at 30◦ .
f
1 What is the angle of refraction if
= ³
10
´ the refractive index from air to
100 m water is 1.33?
= 10Dioptres
sin i
= 1.33
16. State any two properties of an im- sin 30
age of a real object formed in a sin i = 1.33 sin 30
diverging lens. = 1.33 × 0.5
= 0.665
1. It is diminished
i = sin−1 (0.665)
2. It is virtual
= 41.68
17. .
19. What is meant by refractive in-
dex?
Refractive index is the ra-
tio of the speed of light
in a medium to speed of
Q
light in a vaccum or it
P 3 is the ratio of sine of the
angle of incidence in one
media to the sine of the
Fig. 10 angle of refraction in the
other media.

Complete the diagram in fig. 10 20. With the help of a ray diagram
to show the path of the light ray show how a converging lens can
PQ through the prism. be used as a magnifying glass.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 140 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.3. REFRACTION
6
¾ Virtual image
¼ ª6
I na sin ia = constant
C ¼ F O F C
ª na sin ia = ng sin ig
sin θ = 1.52 × sin 35◦
= 1.52 × 0.5736
= 0.8718
21. . θ = sin−1 (0.8718)
= 60.67

22. Sketch a ray diagram to show how

Air θ 1
D refraction of light makes a pond
Glass C to appear shallower than it actu-
Air
µ
35◦ ally is.
B

Fig. 8 >

u
I
Á
Fig. 8 shows a ray of light inci- O e
dent on a semi-circular glass block
of centre C. 23. Draw a diagram to show how a
fish in water attains a wide field
of view (2marks)
(a) Why is the ray not deviated?
More than 180◦ field of view

Because it is normal to ~
the surface at B i.e. the / w
? À
angle of incident is zero j ¼
- ¾
so even that of refraction 1 q sw N ? /=¼> Y
AKA ²
p
has to be zero hence the A
A
ray is not deviated or re- A
fracted at B. Total internal reflection

Paper II (Essay)
(b) Calculate the value of angle
θ if the refractive index of glass24. (a) Explain the causes of re-
is 1.52. fraction of light.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 141 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.3. REFRACTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
(b) Describe an experiment optical pin position it so
you would use to measure that it coincides with the
the refractive index of glass raised botto. Call this dis-
using a glass block. tance of the raised bottom
(c) (i) State the conditions for to the top of the glass, ap-
total internal reflection parent depth
to occur • Obtain the refractive in-
(ii) State one application dex, n, of the glass block
of total internal reflec- using the expression; n =
Real depth
tion. apparent depth
Solution (c) (i) Conditions for total inter-
nal reflection are
(a) causes of refraction are; • the ray must be mov-
• change in the wave length ing from a more opti-
of the light wave as it moves cally dense media to a
from one media to another less optically dense me-
or dia.
• change in the speed of light • The angle of incidence
wave as it moves from one should be more than the
media to another. If speed critical angle.
or wavelength of the waves (ii) Total internal reflection
could not change then there is applied in;
would be no refraction. • Optical fibres
(b) An experiment to measure • Erecting prisms
refractive index of glass • Reflecting prisms
Using the Real-Apparent depth • Transmission of radio
method; waves via the ionosphere.
• Place the glass block on 25. (a) Use a ray diagram to show
the table how a virtual image may
• measure the distance of be formed by a converg-
the top of the glass block ing lens.
from the table and call it, (b) A converging lens of fo-
real depth cal length 20cm forms a
• View the bottom of the glass real image 4cm high of an
block through the glass block, object which is 5cm high.
it appears raised, using an If the image is 36cm away

Physics; Problems and Solutions 142 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.3. REFRACTION
from the lens, determine Object
-
by a graphical method, the q
6q
p
s
qF
C
q
I

position of the object. C O F

qj
?
(c) State two differences be-
Image
tween a pin-hole camera
and a lens camera. from the accurate graphical
(d) With the aid of a diagram ray diagram labeled Figure 2.5
explain why a pond appears on page 148 the position of
shallower than it actually the object is 45cm from the
is. pole of the lens.
(e) Using a labeled diagram (c) differences between a pinhole
show how two right-angled camera and a lens camera
isosceles prisms may be used
• The pin hole camera has
to produce an erect image
no lens while the lens cam-
of a distant object.
era uses a lens
Solution • The pin hole camera does
(a) a virtual image is formed by not control light entering
a converging lens, only when it while the lens camera
the object is between its op- controls light entering it
tical centre and the princi- using a diaphragm and a
pal focus. The diagram be- shutter
low shows this; (d) a pond appears shallower than
Virtual Image 6 Object it actually is due to refrac-
- tion, the diagram below shows
6
w s
qC Fp O pq F qC
this;
¿ s
¿ R

>

(b) from the question

f = 20cm Bq
Á
hi = 4cm q
A
h◦ = 5cm
v = 36cm light from the deeper point
A appears to be coming from
Sketch the shallower point B

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 143 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.3. REFRACTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
(e) how a right-angle isosceles (a) (i) Critical angle is the an-
prism can produce an erect gle of incidence in a more
image of a distance object. optically dense media for
which the angle of refrac-
- -
Rays from a
A B
tion in the less optically
R
distant object
B -
¾ µ
R -
- A dense media is 90◦
µ
I µ ◦ (ii) Total internal reflection
◦
45 45
total internal reflection
is the type of reflection a
since the angle of incidence ray undergoes when mov-
is 45◦ which is more than the ing from a more optically
critical angle of glass (41.8◦ ), dense media to a less opri-
then there is total internal cally dense media when
reflection. the angle of incidence is
more than the critical an-
Hence the ray AB from a dis-
gle.
tant object is inverted to ray
BA. (b)They travel by total internal
reflection on the ionosphere;
26. (a) What is meant by the fol-
lowing terms. • the receiver produces the
radio waves and sends them
(i) critical angle. out in space.
(ii) total internal reflection. • The waves meet the iono-
(b) Explain briefly how sky sphere and undergo total
radio waves travel from a internal reflection and they
transmitting station to a are reflected back to the
receiver. other part of the earth where
(c) State two applications of the receiver (like a radio)
converging lenses. receives them.
waves undergoing total
(d) An object 8cm high is placed internal reflection

perpendicular on the prin- Ionosphere

cipal axis 12cm away from ° =
a diverging lens. With the *
sky wave w
aid of a ray diagram, find
the focal length of the lens,
if the height of the image
formed is 2cm
Solution transmitter radio receiver

Physics; Problems and Solutions 144 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.3. REFRACTION
(c) Applications of converging lenses • Draw line from top of object
• Used in projectors to image to principle axis, at
O. This gives the position of
• Used in lens camera
the lens,
• Used in lens microscopes
( not electron microscopes) • Draw a vertical line at O,

(d) • Draw a horizontal line from

the objects top to meet this
From the question vertical line at B.
• Draw a line from B to top of
the image and continue till
h0 = 8cm
it touches the principal axis
U = 12cm at a point F , the principal fo-
hi = 2cm cus.
• Focal length is the distance
FO.
hi The ray diagram in figure 2.4
magnification =
ho shows that.
V
= • Next draw the arrows to show
U
V hi the direction of light and more
⇒ = so to make it a ray diagram (
U ho
V 2cm otherwise it is not), The con-
= structed diagram is in figure 2.4
12 8cm
V 2cm
= 27. (a) The diagram in fig. 6 shows
12cm 8cm
2 a ray of yellow light inci-
V = × 12cm dent at an angle of 50◦ on
8
= 3cm one side of an equilateral
triangular glass prism of
refraction index 1.52
from the sketch

50◦ - e
r
1
> 60◦ s
-
6 q
C F F C Fig. 6
q q 6 p q
q (i) Calculate the angles marke
r and e.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 145 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.3. REFRACTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
(ii) State and explain what for angle e recall that
would be observed if the
ray above were of white
P + r = 60
light.
P = 60 − r
(b) Explain with the aid of a
diagram, why the writing = 60 − 30.26
on a piece of paper under = 29.74
a glass block appears raised
when observed from above.
Also
Solution
ng sin ig = na sin ia
(a) From the diagram
1.52 sin P = 1 × sin e
(i)
1.52 sin 29.74 = sin e

50◦ -
1
r P
e sin e = 1.52 sin 29.74
60◦ s
= 1.52 × 0.496
Fig. 6 sin e = 0.754
e = sin−1 (0.754)
from na sin ia = Constant = 48.9◦

Hence r = 30.26◦ and e =

nair sin iair = nglass sin iglass 48.9◦
1 × sin 50 = 1.52 × sin r
sin 50 = 1.52 sin r (ii)If the ray above were of
white light, it would get
dispersed i.e. split into the
1.52 sin r = sin 50 seven colours of a rainbow
sin 50 (Red, orange, yellow, green,
sin r =
1.52 blue, indigo and violet), this
0.766 is because each colour is
=
1.52 refracted at a different an-
= 0.504
gle of refraction or because
r = sin−1 (0.504) each colour has its own re-
= 30.26◦ fractive index for the same
glass material.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 146 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.3. REFRACTION
(b) This is due to refraction when
the ray from the writing on
the paper passes through the
glass, it gets refracted as shown
below;

>

A0q
Á
p
A
hence it appears as if it is
coming from A0 hence it ap-
pears raised.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 147 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.3. REFRACTION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT

Figure 2.4: Ray diagram: Diverging lens

Figure 2.5: Ray diagram: converging lens

Physics; Problems and Solutions 148 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.4. DISPERSION
2.4 Dispersion A. Black printing on a red pa-
per
Section A (Objectives) B. Blue printing on a red paper
C. Yellow printing on a red pa-
1. . per
D. Red printing on a white pa-
- -
X per A
White - -
light
- Red is absorbed by green paint-
Magenta white
screen ing pigments
filter
Fig. 7
4. which of the following is correct?
Fig. 7 shows white light incident
on a magenta colour filter. What (i) Green light shone on green sur-
colour filter should X be so that face is all absorbed
red is seen on the screen?
(ii) Green light added equally to
A. Cyan red light appears yellow
B. Blue (iii) Green light passes through
C. Black a red filter
D. Yellow A
A. (ii) only
2. A piece of white cloth viewed through
B. (i) and (ii) only
a blue glass looks blue because
C. (ii) and (iii) only
A. blue light is absorbed by the
glass. D. (i), (ii) and (iii). A
B. the glass adds blue light to
5. Which of the following are sec-
the light coming from the cloth.
ondary colours only?
C. the glass transmits only blue
light and absorbs all the other A. Red, green and yellow.
colours.
B. Blue, yellow and magenta.
D. the colour of the glass is re-
flected onto the cloth. C C. Yellow, cyan and magenta.
D. Red, green and blue.
3. A student is holding a white pa-
per with green printing on it. If C
she enters a room with red light,
she will see 6.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 149 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.4. DISPERSION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
Recall that

R+G+B = W
- R+C = W
* q M +G = W
screen B+Y = W

8. White light is separated into its

Fig. 8
component colours by a prism due
Fig. 8 shows white light passing to
through a glass prism. Which
A. absorption.
colour is bent most?
B. dispersion
A. Red
C. reflection.
B. Yellow
D. transmission. B
C. Green
D. Violet D 9. Which of the following statements
are true?
7. The secondary colours of light are
cyan, magneta and yellow. Which (i) A magenta filter absorbs green
of the following sets of addition light and transmits red and
of colours of light will produce blue lights.
white light? (ii) A magenta filter absorbs blue
(i) Cyan + Blue and Magneta + light and transmits red and
Red. green lights.

(ii) Cyan + Red and Magneta + (iii) A cyan filter absorbs red light
Green. and transmits blue and green
lights.
(iii) Yellow + Red and Magneta
+ Blue. (iv) A cyan filter absorbs blue
light and transmits red and
(iv) Cyan + Green and Yellow +
green lights.
Blue.

A. (i) only. A. (i) only.

B. (ii) only. B. (ii) only
C. (iii) only. C.(ii) and (iv) only.
D. (iv) only B D.(i) and (iii) only. D

Physics; Problems and Solutions 150 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.4. DISPERSION
Recall that (c) Explain why the sun ap-
pears red at sunrise and
M = R+B
sunset.
Y = R+G
Solution
C = G+B
(a) Dispersion of light in the split-
10. In this Question indicate the cor- ting of white light into its com-
rect answer A, B, C or D accord- ponent colours i.e. red, or-
ing to the following; ange, yellow, green, blue, in-
A. If 1,2,3 only are correct digo and violet.
B. If 1,3 only are correct (b) They are printed black on a
yellow background to create
C. If 2,4 only are correct
a greater contrast so that the
D. If 4 only is correct figures or letters are easily
Which of the following statements recognized by the human eye
is/are true? during day and night (by re-
flection of the light from car
1. A glass prism disperses shorter lamps).
wavelengths more than longer
(c) The degree of scattering of
wavelengths.
light depends on the wave length
2. A glass prism disperses longer of light. Red has a longer wave-
wavelength more than shorter length of light hence it more
wavelengths. scatted hence the light from
3. A rod filter only allows red the sun is red at sunrise and
and longer wavelengths in the sunset because the scattered
spectrum to pass B light is what can be seen at
4. A red filter allows all colours that time. Unlike during day
in the spectrum to pass ex- when we see blue (short wave
cept red. length light) i.e. the sky is
blue.
Paper II (Essay)
12. (a) (i) What are primary col-
11. (a) Explain what is meant by ors? Name them
dispersion of light. (ii) Explain briefly what hap-
(b) State why most hind car pens when white light
registration number plates falls on a green body.
are printed black on a yel- (b) With the aid of a labeled
low background. diagram, describe how a

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 151 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.4. DISPERSION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT
lens camera works. photographic film behind the
Solution camera where an image is formed,
this film can then be devel-
(a) (i) primary colours are colours oped into a photograph.
which can not be obtained
by mixing any other colours,13. (a) Explain dispersion as ap-
they are red, green and plied to light
blue. (b) (i) What is a pure spectrum?
(ii) When white light falls on (ii) With aid of a labelled
a green body, the green body diagram, describe briefly
absorbs all colours a part how a pure spectrum
from green which it reflects is produced.
hence it appears green. (c) (i) Distinguish between a
(b) how a lens camera works; primary and a secondary
A lens camera is a light-tight colour.
box in which a convex lens (ii) Fig. 2 shows colours
in front of it forms a real in- mixed by addition. Name
verted image on a photo sen- the colours represented
sitive film at the back. by the parts labeled A,
Below is its diagram B, C and D.
shutter
spool Blue
(opens and closes in a given time) ¿
U
film
ÁÀ
ª A B
e D
6 q :
R - C
: q Image size
Red Green
Á µ
lenses O e¿ Fig. 2
diaphragm
(d) State the colour of a yel-
(allows enough light) ÁÀ low dress in green light.
adjusting screw
(changes image distance) Solution
light from an object in front
(a) dispersion is the splitting of white
of the camera is refracted through
light into its component colours
the lens and then the required
i.e. red, orange,yellow, green, blue,
amount of light passes through
indigo and violet.
the diaphragm for a fixed short
period of time when the shut- (b) (i) a pure spectrum is a group of
ter is open, Light meets the pure or true colours of light.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 152 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 2. LIGHT 2.4. DISPERSION
For instance compound Yel- (ii) The colour labeled in the di-
low is not true yellow hence agram are’
not a true or pure colour.
A −Magnenta
(ii) an experiment to produce a
B −Cyan
pure spectrum
C −Yellow
A pure spectrum is produced
D −White
from white light by dispers-
ing light using a prism and a
(d) Colour of yellow dress in green
lens arranged as shown be-
light. Yellow is a secondary colour
low;
i.e.
Lens to focus

light on the slit

yellow = red + green

hence a yellow dress reflects red,

-
* 1 green and yellow lights
~
? :
: ¸
3 j if a yellow dress is in green light
Áp: ¸ prism and green is among the colours
Light source
it reflects then in green light the
yellow dress will reflect the green
The colours obtained are sharp light to our eyes and hence it ap-
or clear colours or do not over- pear green.
lap and hence they constitute But in this question they did not
a pure spectrums other wise need the whole of this explana-
if a lens is not used we would tion but to just write Green be-
not have a pure spectrum but cause they said state.
an overlap of colours.

(c) (i) a primary colour is a colour

that can not be obtained by
mixing any other colour, they
are 3 red, green and blue while
secondary colours are colours
obtained by mixing primary
colours.
Any other colour other than
red, green and blue is a sec-
ondary colour.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 153 Physics; Problems and Solutions

2.4. DISPERSION CHAPTER 2. LIGHT

Physics; Problems and Solutions 154 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

Chapter 3

Heat

Contents x
θ = × 100%
3.1 Thermometry . . . . . . 155 y
3.2 Heat transfer . . . . . . . 159 67.2
= × 100
3.3 Heat measurement . . . 164 192
3.4 Heat expansion . . . . . 177
= 35
3.5 Gas laws . . . . . . . . . . 179
2. The lengths of the mercury col-
3.6 vapours . . . . . . . . . . 185
umn of a thermometer at ice point
3.7 Heat Engines . . . . . . . 189
and steam point are 2.0cm and
22.0cm respectively. The read-
ing of the thermometer when the
mercury column is 9.0cm long is
3.1 Thermometry
A. 45.0◦ C
Section A (Objectives) B. 40.9◦ C
C. 35.0◦ C
D. 31.8◦ C C
1. The interval between the ice and
steam points on a thermometer
is 192mm. Find the temperature lθ − l0
when the length of the mercury θ = × 100◦ C
l100 − l0
thread is 67.2mm from the ice 9−2
= × 100
point. 22 − 2
7
32.8◦ C = × 100
20
35.0◦ C = 35◦

65.0◦ C 3. In order to make a mercury ther-

◦
67,2 C B mometer more sensitive the

155
3.1. THERMOMETRY CHAPTER 3. HEAT
A. degree markings must be fur- and y = 25
ther apart. B 20
θ = × 100
B. diameter of the capillary tube 25
= 80◦ C
must be reduced.
C. volume of the mercury bulb
must be reduced. Section B (Structured)
D. capillary tube must be open
to air. 6. State any two factors which affect
4. The temperature at which all the pressure in liquids.
heat energy is removed from a 1. density of the liquid
substance is called
2. depth
A. Kelvin temperature.
B. Celsius temperature. 7. Name any two physical properties
which change with temperature.
C. Freezing temperature.
1. Pressure of a gas
D. Absolute zero temperature.
2. Volume of a gas
D
5. The distance between the lower 3. Length of a metal
and upper fixed points on the Cel- bar
sius scale in an unmarked mercury-
8. Convert a temperature of 25◦ C to
in-glass thermometer is 25cm. If Kelvin.
the mercury level is 5 cm below
the upper fixed point, then the
250 C = (25 + 273)Kelvin
temperature is
= 298Kelvin
◦
A. 5 C
B. 20◦ C
9. State two reasons why mercury
C. 80◦ C
is preferred to alcohol as a ther-
D. 95◦ C C mometric liquid.
1. it is opaque
lθ − l0
from θ = × 100 2. it is a better conductor
l100 − l0 of heat
x
= × 100
y 3. it has a higher funda-
but x = 25 − 5 = 20cm mental interval
Physics; Problems and Solutions 156 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.1. THERMOMETRY
10. In a gas thermometer, the pres- (b) Temperature, θ
sure of the gas at 00 C is 20 cmHg x
and at 1000 C is 27 CmHg. De- θ = × 100◦ C
y
termine the room temperature if 67.2
the pressure at this temperature = × 100◦ C
192
is 21.4 cmHg. = 35◦ C
= 35◦ C
21.4 − 20
θ = × 100◦ C
27 − 20
1.4 (c) • Length of a metal
= × 100◦ C
7 • Volume of a gas
= 20◦ C
• Pressure by a gas
Paper II (Essay) • Resistance of a metal

12. (a) (i) Describe the fixed points

11.
of a Celsius scale of tem-
(a) What is meant by the terms perature.
(ii) Give two advantages
(i) temperature,
of mercury over alco-
(ii) heat? hol as a thermometric
liquid.
(b) The fundamental interval of
mercury in glass is 192mm. find (iii) Convert −200◦ C to Kelvins
the temperature in degrees cel- (b) Use the kinetic theory to
cius when the mercury thread explain the following:
is 67.2mmlong. (i) cooling by evaporation.
(c) State two physical properties (ii) why the temperature
which change with tempera- of a gas contained in a
ture. cylinder increases when
it is compressed.
Solution (c) Explain briefly the trans-
fer of thermal energy
a(i) Temperature is a measure by conduction in met-
of hotness or coldness of a num- als.
ber on some chosen scale.
Solution
a(ii) Heat is a form of energy that
usually flows from a hot to (a) (i) Fixed point of the celcius
cold body. scale of temperature are

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 157 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.1. THERMOMETRY CHAPTER 3. HEAT
• The lower fixed points perature of the liquid, then
i.e. the melting point it cools.
of pure ice and (ii) When a gas is compressed,
• The upper fixed point its molecules loose their
i.e. the boiling point of kinetic energy since they
pure water at a pres- do not have enough room
sure of 760 mmHg. to move. Since energy can
(ii) • mercury is easily seen not be destroyed, the lost
because it is opaque yet energy is conducted to the
alcohol is colourless, sorrounding as heat hence
• mercury does not wet the temperature of the liq-
glass and alcohol wets uid increases or is absorbed
glass as its internal energy.
• mercury is a good con- (c) heat transfer by conduction
ductor of heat compared in metals;
to alcohol. When part of a metal is heated,
• Mercury does not eas- the atoms of that part vibrate
ily boil (its boiling point with a greater amplitude.
in 357◦ C) and alcohol These vibrating molecules knock
boils easily i.e. has a the neighbouring molecules
lower boiling point of which also begin to vibrate
78◦ C. with a larger amplitude.
(iii) Since In this process also the loose
electrons travel and knock the
x◦ C = (x + 273)K other atoms and hence heat
−200◦ = (−200 + 273)k is transferred by vibration of
molecules and movement of
= 73 Kelvins
electrons.
(b) Using the kinetic theory we
can explain; 13.
(i) When a liquid evaporates, (a) Describe an experiment to de-
energetic molecules leave termine the fixed points of a
the liquid surface, this low- thermometer.
ers the average kinetic en-
ergy of the molecules of (b) (i) Mention any three reasons
the liquid, since this av- for not using water as a
erage is proportional to tem- thermometric liquid.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 158 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.2. HEAT TRANSFER
(ii) When a celcius thermome- Place the thermometer in steam
ter is inserted in a boil- from pure boiling water at a pres-
ing liquid, the mercury thread sure of 760mmHg or just on the
rises above the lower fixed surface of boiling water. This is
point by 19.5cm. Find the best done using a hypsometer shown
temperature of the boiling below; When length of mercury
liquid if the fundamental thread remains steady for some
interval is 25cm. time, the level of the surface of
the mercury thread is marked on
Solution the thermometer as steam point
or upper fixed point i.e. (100◦ C).

(a)An experiment to determine the (b) (i) Three reason for not using wa-
fixed points of a thermometer. ter as a thermometric liquid,
There are two fixed points for the • water does not expand uni-
celcius scale of temperature, let formly in the range 0◦ C
us describe each separately; to 4◦ C
• water wets glass
For lower fixed point • water easily evaporates
(ii)
1. Place the thermometer in a
funnel containing crushed blocks x = 19.5cm
of pure ice. y = 25cm
x
2. Start the stop clock and note Q = × 100◦ C
y
or record the length of the mer- 19.5
cury thread in the thermome- = × 100◦ C
25
ter. = 78◦ C
3. This length will decrease with
time. After some time this
length becomes constant (l◦ )
and this is when ice is melt- 3.2 Heat transfer
ing i.e. at ice point 0◦ C. This
is marked as a point on the Section A (Objectives)
thermometer called ice point
or lower fixed point.
1. .
For upper fixed point

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 159 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.2. HEAT TRANSFER CHAPTER 3. HEAT

­ B. (i) and (ii) only

­
­ ­­ C. (ii) and (iii) only
­ ­
­
9­
­ Water D. (i) , (ii) and (iii). B
­
Ice enclosed ­ ­
­ ­ 3. Radiation is the transfer of heat
in wire gauze S ­ ­6
S
S
w­
­ ­
z ­ A. In a liquid which involves the
­
movement of the molecules
Fig. 6 HEAT B. From one place to another by
means of electromagnetic waves.
Which of the following is/are true
C. Through a fluid which involves
about the experimental set up in
the bulk movement of the fluid
fig. 6?
itself. B
1. The ice takes long to melt be-
4. The mode of transfer of heat be-
cause of the gauze.
tween the boiler and the storage
2. The wire gauze keeps the ice tank of a hot water supply sys-
at the bottom of the test tube. tem is
3. The ice does not melt because A. radiation
the heating is from above
B. conduction
4. The ice takes long to melt
C. convention
because water is a poor con-
ductor. C D. evaporation C

2. Choose the corrrect option accord- 5. The transfer of heat by the actual
ing to these instructions movement of molecules of mat-
ter takes place
A. if 1,2,3 only are correct.
A. only in liquids.
B. If 1,3 only are correct.
B. only in gases.
C. If 2,4 only are correct.
C. in solids and liquids.
D. If 4 only is correct.
D. in liquids and gases. D
A dull back surface is a good 6. A stone floor feels very cold to
(i) Absorber if heat energy bare feet in cold weather, but a
carpet in the same room feels com-
(ii) Emitter of heat energy
fortably warm. Why is this so?
(iii) Reflector of heat energy
A. the stone is a worse conduc-
A. (i) Only tor of heat than a carpet.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 160 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.2. HEAT TRANSFER
B. the stone is a better conduc- temperature as a shiny surface
tor of heat than a carpet. because it
C. the carpet is a better conduc- A. has more heat than a shiny
tor of heat than a stone. surface.
D. the stone is a better reflector B. emits more heat than a shiny
of heat than the carpet. B surface.
7. Which one of the following fluids C. reflects more heat than a shiny
is the best conductor of heat? surface.
D. conducts more heat than a
A. Air
shiny surface. B
B. Alcohol
11. Which of the following statements
C. Water
are true?
D. Mercury D
(i) Surfaces which reflect all colours
8. The process of using a material of of light appear white.
low thermal conductivity to pre-
(ii) Red surfaces absorb all colours
vent heat loss is called
and reflects only red light.
A. cooling. (iii) Black surfaces appear black
B. lagging because they reflect all colours.
C. absorption. A. (i) only.
D. contraction. B B. (i) and (ii) only.
9. Plants inside a green house emit C. (i) and (iii) only.
radiations which cannot pass through D. (ii) and (iii) only. B
the green house glass because the
radiations are 12. A sea breeze occurs

A. of short wavelength. A. when cool air blows towards

the land.
B. of long wave length.
B. when warm air blows towards
C. used to warm up the green the land.
house.
C. during night.
D. absorbed by the glass.
D. when cool air blows towards
B the sea. A
10. A dull black surface feels hot- 13. Which of the following statements
ter even though it is at the same is/are true about heat radiation?

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 161 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.2. HEAT TRANSFER CHAPTER 3. HEAT
9 A
1. A cold body emits invisible
radiation of long wavelength.
2. Very hot objects emit radia-
tions of short wavelengths.
3. All good radiators of heat are
good absorbers.
4. All radiations emitted by hot 9
B
objects are invisible. A Fig.12

(a) name parts labeled

Section B (Structured)

14. What is the use of a vacuum in a A

thermos flask? B
To present heat loss by con- A - Cork
vection and conduction be-
B - Vacuum seal
cause these methods require
a material media yet in a 18. State the use of the part la-
vacuum it is not there. beled A.
To prevent heat loss via con-
15. Explain why the sea remains cooler duction
than land during day time and
19. Why do the contents of the
warmer than land at night.
flask ultimately get cold?
Because water has a higher due to
heat capacity i.e., it takes
long to get heated during 1. little radiation in the
day and takes long to cool vacuum and
down during night.
2. the loss of heat by con-
16. State any one factor on which the duction via the cork.
rate of heat transfer along a metal
bar depends.
Paper II (Essay)
The length of the metal-
lic bar, its cross sectional
20. Name two main features of a
area, temperature difference
vacuum flask which enable it
between its ends or nature of
to keep a liquid warm.
the material of the metal bar
17. Fig. 12 shows a thermos flask. Solution

Physics; Problems and Solutions 162 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.2. HEAT TRANSFER
• the vacuum in the double glass to regions at a low temper-
walls, this prevents conduc- ature by movement of elec-
tion and convection trons and vibration of atoms
• the silvery surface on the in- or molecules.
ner sides of the double walls, OR
this prevents or reduces heat
loss by radiation. Conduction is the process by
which heat is transferred from
21. (a) What is meant by conduc- regions at high temperature
tion? to regions at a low temper-
ature without movement of
(b) Draw a labeled diagram matter.
of a thermos flask and ex-
plain how it is able to keep (b)
9 cork or plastic
a liquid cold for a long time.
(c) With the help of a diagram, + silvered inner
surfaces
describe how you would Asbestos - vacuum
determine the upper fixed (anti-shock pad) ®
point of an uncalibrated
thermometer. W s

(d) Explain the following ob- 9

servations; vacuum seal

(i) a bare cement floor feels it is able to keep the liquid

colder than a carpeted cold for a long time or pre-
one. venting heat exchange by;
(ii) a beam with a notch; • the vacuum which does not
that is used for construct- have matter hence prevents
ing a bridge, lasts longer heat loss by conduction and
when the notch is on convention
its top surface than when • the silvered double-walls
the notch is on its lower by reflecting the heat ra-
surface. diations on these walls.
• the cork which prevents
Solution
heat loss by conduction since
(a) Conduction is the process by it is a poor conductor of
which heat is transferred from heat.
regions at high temperature (c) Place the thermometer in steam

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 163 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT CHAPTER 3. HEAT
from boiling water in the hyp- may break the beam into
someter as shown below; two part i.e. the beam does
double glass not last longer.
manometer

? 3.3 Heat measurement

?
steam
exit Section A (Objectives)
Y
¸
1. .
I
boiling
water 80
6
bulb in steam at
atmospheric pressure Temperature
in ◦ C
wait till when the levels in 50
the manometer are the same,
then mark on the thermome- -
5
ter where the top of a mer- Time (min)

cury thread is, that is the up- Fig. 3

per fixed point.

A heater rated 6000 j/min is placed
(d) Explaining the phenomena; in 2 kg of a liquid. The tempera-
(i) a bare cement floor feels ture rise varies with time as shown
colder than a carpeted one in Fig. 3. The specific heat ca-
because carpet is a bad con- pacity of the liquid in J kg −1 K
−1
ductor of heat does not take is
heat from your body and A. 6000×2
5×30
cemented floor is a good 6000×2×5
C. 30
conductor of heat so it takes 6000×2
B.
the heat from your body 2×30
6000×30
which feels cold. D. 2×5 B
(ii) this is because the top
the beam is under com- mc∆T
pression and this does not P =
t
affect ( or increase) a notch Pt
c =
but below the beam it is m∆T
under tension which widens 6000 × 5
=
and deepens the notch which 2 × 30

Physics; Problems and Solutions 164 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT
2. The specific heat capacity of a A. 8000J
substance is the amount of B. 20,000J
A. heat required to raise it through C. 40,000J
1◦ C.
D. 160,000J C
B. heat required to raise the tem-
perature of 1kg mass of the
substance through 1◦ C.
H = mc∆T
C. heat required to change 1kg
mass of the substance into liq- = 0.5 × 4000 × 20
uid at the same temperature. = 40, 000J
B
◦
D. heat required to raise its tem- 5. A 100g quantity of water at 24 C
perature a specific number of is added to 50g of water at 36◦ .
degrees. The final temperature of the mix-
ture is
3. Calculate the amount of heat re-
quired to change 100g of water A. 28◦ C.
at 100◦ C to steam at 100◦ C. [Spe- B. 32◦ C.
cific latent heat of steam = 2.26×
106 Jkg−1 ] C. 30◦ C.

8 D. 34◦ C. A
A. 2.26 × 10 J
B. 2.26 × 107 J
C. 2.26 × 105 J
heat loss = heat gain
D. 2.26 × 10JJ C m1 c∆T = m2 c∆T

E = mlv But
100
= × 2.26 × 106
1000 m1 = 2m2 , c = c
= 2.26 × 105 ⇒ 2∆T = ∆T
2 × (T − 24) = (36 − T )
4. The amount of heat required to
2(T − 24) = 36 − T
raise the temperature of 0.5kg of
salt solution from -5◦ C to 15◦ C 2T − 48 = 36 − T
is (Specific heat capacity of salt 3T = 84
solutions is 4000Jkg-1K−1 ) T = 28

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 165 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT CHAPTER 3. HEAT
6. The mount of heat required to 8. 450g of water at 60◦ C is to be
raise the temperature of 0.5kg of cooled to 35◦ C by addition of cold
iron from 25◦ C to 50◦ C is (Spe- water at 20◦ C. How much cold
cific heat capacity of iron is 460 water is to be added?
Jkg−1 K −1 )
A. 0.169kg
0.5×460
A. 25 B. 0.270kg
460×25
B. 0.5 C. 0.281kg
C. 0.5 × 460 × 25
0.5×25
D. 0.75kg D
D. 460 C

HLoss = Hgain
H = mc∆T
= 0.5 × 460 × (50 − 25). 0.45 · (60 − 35) = mc(35 − 20)
= 0.5 × 460 × 25. 0.45 × 25 = 15m
0.45 × 25
m =
15
m = 0.75kg
7. A block of lead of mass 1000g
hits a hard surface without re-
9. Calculate the time required for
bounding with a velocity of 23m
a kettle taking 10A from a 240V
s−1 . if its temperature rises from
supply, to heat 5kg of water through
15◦ C to 27◦ C, calculate the spe-
800 , assuming no heat loss.
cific heat capacity of lead.
A. 5.75JKg◦ C−1 A. 700s.
B. 9.79JKg◦ C−1 B. 292 s.
C. 132.25JKg◦ C−1 C. 8.8 s.
D. 264.50JKg◦ C−1 C D. 1.7 s. A

1 2 mc∆T
mv = mc∆T P =VI =
2 t
V2 mc∆T
c = t =
2∆T IV
232 5 × 4200 × 80
= =
2 × (27 − 15) 10 × 240
= 132.25 = 700

Physics; Problems and Solutions 166 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT
10. When 1kg of a certain liquid is 12.
heated for 10s its temperature rises
by 25◦ C. Temperature (◦ C)
6W
If the power supplied is 1000 watts,
find the specific heat capacity of X
Y
the liquid.

A. 40Jkg−1 K1 Z
-
B. 400Jkg−1 K−1 Fig. 4 time(s)

C. 1000Jkg−1 K−1= The graph in fig. 4 shows a cool-

−1 1
D. 2500Jkg K B ing curve of a pure substance. The
substance is all in solid state be-
tween
P t = mc∆T A. W and X
Pt
c = B. W and Y
m∆T
1000 × 10 C. X and Y
=
1 × 25 D. Y and Z. A
= 400
13. Calculate the specific heat ca-
11. An electric heater is rated 240V, pacity of paraffin if 22000J of heat
400W. if the efficiency of the heater are required to raise the temper-
is 80%, find the amount of en- ature of 2.0kg of paraffin from
ergy wasted per second. 20◦ C to 30◦ .

A. 48J. A. 1100J kg−1 K1

B. 80J B. 1200J kg−1 K−1
C. 192J. C. 2200J kg−1 K−1
D. 320J. B D. 2100J kg−1 K−1 A

wasted energy is 20% i.e. (100-

80) of the supplied energy. that H = mc∆T
is H
c =
m∆T
= 20% of 400 22000
20 =
= × 400 2 × (30 − 20)
100
= 80J = 1100Jkg −1 K 1

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 167 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT CHAPTER 3. HEAT
14. An electric heater is immersed B. 2.0 × 104 J kg−1 .
in 0.05kg of oil in a calorimeter C. 3.0 × 104 Jkg−1
of negligible heat capacity. The
D. 6.0 × 104 Jkg−1 B
temperature of the oil rose from
20◦ C to 50◦ C in 100s. If the spe- Using the time when the temper-
cific heat capacity of the oil is 2000J ature is constant,
kg−1 K−1 , calculate the power sup-
plied by the heater, assuming that P t = mlf
there is no heat loss. Pt
Lf =
m
A. 30W. 100 × (300 − 100)
=
B. 50W. 1
C. 140W. = 20000Jkg −1
= 2 × 104 Jkg −1
D. 600W A
16. A heater with a power rating of
mc∆T 100W is placed in 0.5kg of ice at
P = 00 C. How long will it take the heater
t
0.05 × 2000 × (50 − 20) to melt all the ice? (Specific la-
= tent heat of fusion of ice = 3.34 ×
100
= 30W 105 Jkg−1 )

15. When a 100W heater is used to A. 1.67 × 10−3

heat 1kg of solid wax the tem- B. 1.67 × 103
perature of the wax is observed C. 3.34 × 10−3
to change with time as shown be-
D. 3.34 × 103 B
low
6 ³
100
³ ³³
80 ³³
¤ P t = mLf
80 ¤
¤ 0.5 × 3.34 × 105
60 ¤ t =
Temp. (◦ C)
40
¤ 100
¤
20 ¤ = 1.67 × 103
0 -
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Time (s) Section B (Structured)
Find the specific latent heat of
17. The specific heat capacity of wa-
fusion of the wax.
ter is 4200Jkg−1 k−1 . What is meant
A. 1.0 × 104 Jkg−1 by the above statement?

Physics; Problems and Solutions 168 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT
It means that 4200 Joules capacity of a substance?
of heat energy are required It is the amount of heat re-
to increase the temperature quired to change the temper-
of 1kg mass of water by 1 ature of 1kg mass of that
kelvin or 1 degree celcius. substance by 1kelvin or 1◦ C.
18. State two reasons why water is 21. When a block of iron of mass 2
used in the cooling system of a kg absorbs 19KJ of heat, its tem-
car engine? perature rises by 100 C. Find the
(i) besause water has a specific heat capacity of the iron.
high specific heat capac-
ity and From H = mc∆T
H
(ii) its boiling point is far c =
above the working tem- m∆T
19000
perature of the car en- =
2 × 10
gine
= 950Jkg −1 K −1
19. An immersion heater rated 1000W, 250V
supplies heat to 80kg of a liquid
22. Calculate the heat required to con-
in a tank. If the temperature of
vert 0.8kg of water at 100◦ C to
the liquid rises by40◦ C in 48 min-
steam. [Specific latent heat of
utes, what is specific heat capac-
vaporization of water = 2.26×106 Jkg −1
ity of the liquid?
From the law of conserva-
tion of energy, Heat = M lv
= 0.8 × 2.26 × 106
heat gained heat lost
= = 1.808 × 106 J
by water by heater

M c∆T = P t Paper II (Essay)

Pt
c =
M ∆T 23. (i) Define latent heat of fusion.
1000 × 48 × 60
c = (ii) Describe with aid of a la-
80 × 40
= 900Jkg −1 k −1 beled diagram, an experi-
ment to show the effect of
increase in pressure on the
20. What is meant by specific heat melting point of ice.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 169 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT CHAPTER 3. HEAT
ice block
(iii) If the melting point of lead
is 327◦ C,find the amount of
heat required to melt 200gof W
lead initially at 27◦ C. Spe-
cific heat capacity of lead
is 140Jkg−1 K −1
©© {
Specific latent heat of fu- O
sion of lead is 2.7×105 Jkg−1 weights

(iii) Amount of heat required, H

is
Solution
H = mc∆T + mlF
200
= · 140 · (327 − 27)
1000
(i) Latent heat of fusion is the 200
amount of heat required to + × 2.7 × 105
1000
change to state of a substance = 8400 + 54000
from solid to liquid at con- = 62400Joules
stant temperature.
24. (a) Define specific latent heat
(ii) Effect of pressure on meet- of vapourization
ing point of ice. When a wire (b) A calorimeter of mass 35.0g
is tied to 2 masses and made and specific heat capacity
to rest on the block of ice. 840Jkg −1 k −1 contains 143.0g
of water at 7◦ C. Dry steam
After sometime the wire if found
at 100◦ C is bubbled through
to have entered into the ice
the water in the calorime-
block. Inside the ice block
ter until the temperature
the temperature is not 0◦ C
of the water rises to 29◦ C.
but may be −2◦ c. So inside
If the mass of steam which
the ice block, the pressure ex-
condenses is 5.6g,
erted by the wire makes ice
melt at −2◦ C have applica- (i) Calculate the heat gained
tion of pressure on ice (some- by the water and calorime-
thing which expands on so- ter
lidifying) lowers its meeting (ii) obtain an expression
point. for the heat lost by the

Physics; Problems and Solutions 170 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT
steam in condensing at 5.6
= kg
100◦ C and in cooling to 1000
29◦ C. = 5.6 × 10−3 kg
(iii) find the specific latent
heat of vaporization of
(i) Heat, H gained by water
water.
and calorimeter, is given
by;
Solution
∆T = 29 − 7 = 22
(a) Specific latent heat of vapouri- Hw = mw cw ∆T
sation is the amount of heat 143
required to change 1kg mass = × 4200 · 22
1000
of a substance from liquid state = 13213.2J
to vapour state at its boiling
point.
(b) from the question we have; Hcal = mc cc ∆T
Mass of calorimeter, 35
= × 840 · 22
1000
mc = 35g = 646.8J
35
= kg
1000
H = Hw + Hcal
Its specific heat capacity, Cc =
= 13213.2 + 646.8
840Jkg −1 k −1 Mass of water in
it, = 13860J

mw = 143g
143 (ii) Heat lost by steam at 100◦ C
= kg and in cooling to 29◦ C
1000
Heat lost is equal to heat
required to condense heat
Temperature of water in it,
required to cool it.
Ti = 7 ◦
Temperature of steam, = 100◦ = ms lv + ms cw ∆T
Final temperature of water, = ms lv + ms cw (100 − 29)
Tf = 29◦ 5.6 5.6
= · lv + · 4200 · 71
Mass of condensed steam , 1000 1000
5.6
= Lv + 1669.92
ms = 5.6g 1000

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 171 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT CHAPTER 3. HEAT
(iii) to find the specific latent Solution
heat of vaporization of wa-
ter we equate the above (a) An experiment to determine the
two expression according specific latent heat of vapourisa-
to the law of conservation tion of steam.
of energy. This is an approximate method
Heat lost by steam is equal
to heat gained by water • Pour water in the lagged con-
and calorimeter tainer and dip in it a heater
5.6 connected to the electric source
Lv + 1669.92 = 13860 as shown below;
1000 connecting
wires

5.6 a.c. or d.c source

r
Lv = 13860 − 1669.92 r ª
1000 ¾»
º·
5.6 M
Lv = 12190.08 V q
1000 ¹¸
k
½¼
5.6Lv = 12190.08 × 1000 º· stop clock
5.6Lv = 12190080 A
¹¸ thermometer
5.6Lv 12190080
= ª
5.6 5.6
Lv = 2176800Jkg −1 water

Lv = 2.1768 × 106 Jkg −1

À
hence the specific latent
º a
heat of vaporization of wa-
ter is 2.1768 × 106 Jkg −1
heater
25. (a) Describe an experiment to
determine the specific la- • close the switch, k,
tent heat of vaporization • When the water starts boil-
of steam. ing Read and record the am-
(b) A copper container of heat meter reading, I, and Volt-
capacity 60Jk −1 contains 0.5kg meter reading,V
of water at 20◦ C. Dry steam • Measure the net mass of the
is passed into the water lagged container with water
until the temperature of , m0 , start the stop clock. Af-
the container and water ter a few minutes( about 10
reaches 50◦ C. Calculate the minutes) and then open the
mass of steam condensed? switch.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 172 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT
• Record the time, t, for which Hl = mlv + mc∆T
the heater was on. = m(lv + c∆T )
• Measure the mass m1 of the = m(2.6 × 106 + 4200 × (100 − 50)
system again, record the dif- = 2, 810, 000J
ference ,m = (m1 − m0 )
since
Assuming no heat loss, heat used
to vapourise the water, Evapour Hl = Hg
is equal to the electric energy sup- 64800
plied, Esupplied m =
2810000
Evapour = Esupplied = 0.023kg
mlv = P t = 23g
mlv = V It hence 0.023g of steam condensed.
V It
lv =
m 26. (a) The graph in fig. 1 shows
V It a cooling curve of a liq-
or lv =
m1 − m0 uid. Describe the main fea-
where m is the mass in kg of wa- tures of the curve.
ter that evaporated. 6
A
I and V are the ammeter and Volt-
B C
meter readings in Volts and Am- Temperature (◦ )

peres respectively. t is time taken

D
for m kg of water to evaporate.
-
Time ( min)
Fig. 1

(b) Heat lost, Hl , by steam mlv +mc∆T

is equal to the sum of heat, Hg (b) (i) Define the term specific
gained by water mc∆T and cop- latent heat of fusion?
per calorimeter C∆T (ii) A copper can of mass
0.2kg contains 0.20kg of
Hg = mc∆T + C∆T
water at 10◦ C. The can
= (mc + C)∆T and its contents are placed
= (0.5 × 4200 + 60) in a refrigerator. Cal-
(50◦ − 20◦ ) culate the quantity of
= (2100 + 60) × 30 heat given out if the tem-
perature of the can and
= 2160 × 30
its contents falls to −2◦ C.
Hg = 64800
Solution

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 173 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT CHAPTER 3. HEAT
(a) From the curve; = 0.2 (4200 × 10
In the region AB, heat lost +340, 000 + 2100 × 2)
is the internal kinetic energy = 0.2(42000 + 340000
hence the temperature of the
+4200)
body decreases.
In the region BC, heat lost
is the internal potential en- = 0.2 × 386200
ergy hence the temperature = 77240J
remains constant as the solid
changes to liquid state.
In the region CD, heat lost Total heat given out is
is the internal kinetic energy = 960 + 77240
hence the temperature of the = 78200J
body decreases.
Hence the total energy given
(b) (i) specific latent heat of fu- out is 78200J
sion is the amount of heat
27. The graph in figure 3.1 on
energy required to change
page 176 shows the vari-
the state of 1kg mass of
ation of temperature of a
a solid from solid state to
metal with time
liquid state at its melting
point. (i)Using the graph explain
what happens to the metal
(ii)Heat lost by the copper
can (ii) What will the temper-
ature of the metal be
H = mc∆T after 1000 seconds
= 0.2 × 400 × (10 − −2) (iii) If the metal absorbs
= 0.2 × 400 × 12 heat at the rate of 2500Js−1
and the specific heat ca-
= 960J
pacity is 300Jkg −1 k −1 . cal-
culate the mass of the
metal?
heat lost by water, P
(iv) Find the specific la-
P = mcW ∆T + mlf tent heat of the metal?
+mcI ∆T Solution
= m(cw ∆T + lf (b) (i) the metal is being heated
+cI ∆T ) and it changes state from
solid to liquid state

Physics; Problems and Solutions 174 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT
(ii) From the graph; when t = 750 − 410
the metal is changing to = 340s
the liquid state, its tem- P = 2500Js−1
perature is 1120◦ C 100
m = kg
(iii)let heat absorbed be Q 21
substituting these into
Q = mc∆T
∆Q ∆T
= mc P t = mlf
∆t ∆t
∆Q Pt
But = 2500Js−1 lf =
∆t m
2500 × 340
= 100
from graph, 21
21 × 2500 × 340
∆T 940 − 240 =
= 100
∆t 400 − 0 = 178, 500Jkg −1
700
= 28. An electric heater of re-
400
7 ◦ −1 sistance 40Ω is connected
= Cs to a 240V mains. How long
4
will it take to raise the tem-
perature of 4kg of water
∆Q ∆T from 40◦ C to 100◦ C
= mc
∆t ∆t
7 Solution
2500 = mc
4 (b) Using the law of conserva-
7 tion of energy, Heat supplied
2500 = m × 300 ×
4 by heater , P t is equal to the
10000 = 2100m heat absorbed by water, mc∆T
10000 2100m
=
2100 2100 Pt = mc∆T
10000 V2
m = t = 4 × 4200 × (100 − 40)
2100 R
= 4.762kg 2402
t = 4 × 4200 × 60
40
(iv) Since the rate of heat 1440t = 1008000
absorption is the same, we 1008000
say t =
1440
= 700 seconds
H = mlf
hence it takes 700 seconds.
P t = mlf

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 175 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.3. HEAT MEASUREMENT CHAPTER 3. HEAT

1200

1100

1000

900

800

700
Temperature (oC)

600

500

400

300

200

100

0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
Time (s)

Figure 3.1: Graph of Temperature against time

Physics; Problems and Solutions 176 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.4. HEAT EXPANSION
3.4 Heat expansion B. The molecules of air hit the
walls of tin harder.
Section A (Objectives) C. The molecules of air strike
the walls less often.
D. The pressure inside the time
1. A bimetallic strip operates on the increases. C
principle that metals
4. A tight bottle top becomes easier
A. are heat controllers to unscrew when hot water flows
B. are good heat conductors. over it because the
C. have different rates of expan- A. cap expands more than the
sion glass.
D. have the same rates of ex- B. glass in the neck of the bottle
pansion. C contracts.
2. The graph in fig. 6 shows ice be- C. hot water acts like oil between
ing heated from -10◦ to 100◦ C. the glass and bottle.
V(m3 ) D. increased pressure of the air
6 E in the bottle causes the cap
B
# to expand. A
# C
#
A D
(i) is very wrong also (iii) is not
-
-10 0 100 correct but there is no answer which
Temperature (◦ C)
does not contain (iii). Just to avoid
(i) we choose bf C
At what point does the substance
have maximum density? 5. Which of the following changes
in volume, mass and density re-
A. E
spectively occur when a metal block
B. C is heated?
C. D
A. increases, remains the same,
D. B C decreases
3. Which of the following statements B. increases, increases, increases
is incorrect when a tin contain- C. remains the same, remains
ing air tightly sealed is heated? the same, decreases
A. The average speed of molecules D. increases, remains the same,
increases. increases A

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 177 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.4. HEAT EXPANSION CHAPTER 3. HEAT
6. The unusual expansion of water (i)
when it is cooled between 4◦ C and copper
0◦ C is due to iron z
j
¡
¡
A. water molecules coming closer ,,
, ,
together to form a compact
structure. (ii) Because copper and iron
B. formation of a new arrange- do not expand at the
ment of molecules which re- same rate.
quires a larger volume.
8. Explain why gaps are left between
C. the increased repulsive forces rails in a railway line.
between the water molecules.
To allow room for expansion
D. differences in the sizes of wa- when they are heated by the
ter and ice molecules. B sun or friction between the
rails and railway wheels.

Section B (Structured) 9. Why do gases expand much more

than solids for the same temper-
ature change?
Paper II (Essay) Because the gas molecules
are free to move and they
have weak molecular force
7. .
compared to those in solids.

¾ copper
10. Name one application of a bimetal-
¾ iron
lic strip.
Fig. 10 to control temperature in
thermostats.
fig. 10 shows strips of copper and
11. Why is the freezing compartment
iron bonded together.
of a refrigerator placed at the top?
(i) Redraw the diagram to show To allow easy circulation
what happens when he strip of the coldness because
is heated. cold air is dense so it goes
(ii) Why does the change you have down to the lower com-
shown in (a)(i) take place? partments.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 178 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.5. GAS LAWS
3.5 Gas laws T2 = 54 + 273 = 327k
200 × 327
V2 =
Section A (Objectives) 300

3. When air is pumped in a tube at

constant temperature, the pres-
1. An air bubble is introduced at the
sure increases because
bottom of a jar containing mer-
cury. Which one of the following A. the molecules are larger.
explains what will happen to the B. the molecules are moving faster
bubble?
C. the molecules are closer to-
A. It will be pressed by the mer- gether.
cury column and burst. D. more molecules are hitting
B. it will rise to the surface while the tube. D
decreasing in size.
4. The volume of a fixed mass of
C. It will rise to the surface while gas at 27.0◦ C and a pressure of
increasing in size. 750mm of mercury is 300cm3 . What
D. Nothing will happen to the is its volume when the pressure
bubble. C is raised to 900mm mercury and
the temperature is 327◦ C?
2. A given mass of gas occupies a vol-
ume of 200 cm3 at a temperature A. 125cm3
of 27o c and a pressure of one at- B. 180cm3
mosphere. Find the volume when
its temperature rises to 540 C at C. 500cm3
constant pressure . D. 720cm3 C
200×1×327
A. 300
200×300 P1 V 1 P2 V 2
C. 327×1 =
B. 300×327 T1 T2
200×1
P1 V 1 T 2
D. 327×1
A V2 =
200×300 T 1 P2

V1 V2 750 × 300 × (327 + 273)

= V2 =
T1 T2 (27 + 273) × 900
V 1 T2 750 × 300 × 600
V2 = =
T1 300 × 900
T1 = 27 + 273 = 300k = 500

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 179 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.5. GAS LAWS CHAPTER 3. HEAT
5. When the pressure of a fixed mass contant temperature Boyle’s law
of a gas is reduced by half, its holds i.e.
volume
P V = constant
" #
A. doubles at constant temper- 1
PV = V [3P ]
ature. 3
= PV
B. is halved at constant temper-
ature. 7. The pressure of a fixed mass of
C. is halved if the temperature a gas at 170 C is 105 pa. find its
is also halved pressure at 270 C if the volume
remains constant.
D. remains the same at constant
27 5
temperature A. 17 × 10 pa.
17 5
B. 27 × 10 pa
A 300 5
C. 290 × 10 pa.
6. D. 290 5
300 × 10 pa. C
6 6 For constant volume, pressure law
15cm
? holds.
Y
45cm P1 P2
=
½air T1 T2
=
½
?
P1
X P2 = × T1
T1
Fig. 1 105
= × (27 + 273)
(17 + 273)
In fig. 1 above the piston is moved 300
= × 105
from X to Y at constant temper- 290
ature. The air pressure is
8. Which of the following graphs shows
A. trebled the variation of the pressure of a
gas as the volume changes at a
B. doubled constant temperature?
C. reduced by a third P 6 P 6
D. unchanged A
- -
A. V B. V
Volume is made 13 of the original P 6 P 6
¡
¡
volume then pressure is multi- ¡
- ¡ -
plied by 3 i.e trebled because at C. V D. V

Physics; Problems and Solutions 180 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.5. GAS LAWS
B 12 State Boyle’s law
The pressure of a fixed
9. The pressure exerted by a gas de-
mass of a gas is inversely
creases when its volume is increased
proportional to its vol-
at a constant temperature because
ume provided its temper-
the molecules
ature remains constant.
A. move faster. 13. A volume of a fixed mass of a gas
B. move closer to one another. increases from 300cm3 to 500cm3
C. hit the walls more often. at a constant temperature. Find
the new pressure if the initial pres-
D. hit the walls less frequently. sure is 70cmHg.
C From Boyle’s law

Section B (Structured) P1 V1 = P2 V2
P1 V 1
P2 =
V2
10. Explain why increase in temper-
ature increases the pressure of a
gas. 70 × 300
P2 =
Increase in temperature 500
increases the speed of = 42cmHg
molecules which inturn
undergo greater change in
Paper II (Essay)
momentum when the gas
molecules collide with the 14. (a) With the aid of a labeled
wall hence exerting greater diagram, describe an ex-
force and pressure on the periment to show how vol-
wall of the container. ume of a gas varies with
11. Sketch the variation of volume with pressure at constant tem-
temperature in Kelvin, for a gas perature.
at constant pressure. (b) A gas of volume 1000cm3
at a pressure of 4.0 × 105 P a
6
and temperature 17◦ C is heate
to 89.5◦ at constant pres-
Volume sure. Find the new vol-
ume of the gas.
- Solution
Temperature in kelvins

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 181 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.5. GAS LAWS CHAPTER 3. HEAT
(a) An experiment to show how vol- 1
h H V P P
ume of a gas varies with pres-
sure at constant temperature.

• Get a J-tube and pour mer-

cury in it so as to trap some
air in it as shown below; • Plotting a graph of V against
1
Atmospheric pressure, P◦ P we get
6
V

?
6

Air
-
H 1
6W P
h ? ?
this shows that the volume
¸
of a fixed mass of a gas is
Mercury inversely proportional to the
the trapped air is at a pres- pressure it exerts provided its
sure P , given by temperature remains constant.
(b) Since pressure is constant, we use
P = P◦ + Hρg Charles’s law i.e.
= H◦ ρg + Hρg V1 V2
= (H◦ + H) ρg =
T1 T2
where ρ is density of mercury from the question
and g is acceleration due to
V1 = 1000cm3
gravity.
P1 = 4.0 × 105 P a
Volume of air trapped = V =
T1 = 17◦ C
Ah
= (17◦ + 273)
Where A is the cross sectional
area of the J−tube = 290Kelvins
T2 = 89.5◦ C
• Add in more mercury in small
quantities to obtain more val- = 89.5◦ + 273
ues of h and H. And tabulate = 362.5Kelvin
your results as shown below; V2 = ?

Physics; Problems and Solutions 182 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.5. GAS LAWS
Using Charles’s law fixed mass of a gas at constant
V2 V1 pressure is directly proportional
= to its absolute temperature;
T2 T1
V1 from the question.
=⇒ V2 = × T2
T1
1000cm3 V1 = 1.5m3
= × 362.5k T1 = 300K
290k
= 1250cm3 V2 = 0.5m2
hence the new volume of the gas V2 = ?
is 1250cm3 .
15. (a) State the kinetic theory of pressure is constant hence we use
matter. Charles’s Law i.e.
(b) State the law of volume V1 V2
=
and temperature (Charle’s T1 T2
law). T2 V 1 = T1 V 2
The volume of a fixed mass T1
T2 = × V2
of a gas at a given pres- V1
sure is 1.5m3 at 300k. At 300
= × 0.5
what temperature will the 1.5
volume of the gas be 0.5m3 = 100K
at the same pressure?

Solution hence temperature will be 100k

(a) Kinetic theory of matter states that;16. (a) What is an equation of state
matter is made up of small par- of a gas?
ticles (atoms or molecules) which (b) (i) With the aid of sketch
are ever in a state of motion hence graph, describe how ab-
having kinetic energy and are ever solute zero of temper-
in a state of attraction and re- ature can be defined.
pulsion hence having potential en- (ii) Use the kinetic theory
ergy, the sum of their kinetic and of gases to explain the
potential energy constitute the heat existence of absolute zero
energy or internal energy of the of temperature.
body.
(c) A volume of 2500cm3 of hy-
(b) The law of volume and tempera- drogen gas is collected at
ture states that the volume of a 67◦ C at a pressure of 730mmHg

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 183 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.5. GAS LAWS CHAPTER 3. HEAT
Calculate the volume of the gas is cooled further and fur-
gas at S.T.P ther at a certain temperature,
the molecules will have zero
Solution amplitude of vibration or zero
kinetic energy and that tem-
(a) the equation of state of a gas is perature would be the abso-
lute zero of temperature.
P V = nRT
(c) from the question;
Where P is the pressure it ex- Let subscript 1 mean initial state
erts, V is the volume it occupies, and subscript 2 mean final state
R is the universal gas constant,
T its temperature and n is the Then V1 = 2500cm3
number of moles T1 = 67◦ C
(b) (i) absolute zero of temperature. = (67 + 273) K
For a graph of volume against = 340 Kelvins
temperature in ◦ C for any gas, P1 = 730mmHg
we have; At S.T.P. V2 = ?
Volume
P2 = 760mmHg
6
T2 = 273 Kelvins

Using the general gas equation

because P V and T change, we
- have
KA Temperature in ◦ C
A
Absolute zero of temperature P1 V 1 P2 V2
=
It is the temperature where T1 T2
P1 V1 T2
the volume of an ideal gas is V2 = ×
expected to be zero T1 P2

(ii) According to the kinetic the-

ory of gases, temperature is 730 × 2500 273 3
V2 = × cm
a measure of the average ki- 340 760
netic energy of the molecules = 1928.12cm3
of a gas,
Hence the volume of the gas at
If the temperatures of the gases
S.T.P. is 1928.12cm3
is reduced also their ampli-
tude of vibration reduces. This (d) What is observed, is the zigzag
makes us conclude that if a motion caused by the collision of

Physics; Problems and Solutions 184 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.6. VAPOURS
the smoke molecules with air molecules.C. compression, evaporation, con-
This motion is called Brownian densation, cooling, evapora-
motion. tion.
When the temperature is increased, D. Condensation, cooling, evap-
the zigzag motion is more fast i.e. oration, compression, evapo-
the molecules now move faster ration. A
3. The rate of evaporation from a
body is increased by
3.6 vapours (i) temperature
(ii) pressure
Section A (Objectives)
(iii) liquid with greater cohesive
forces
(iv) dryness of air around the body
1. Which of the following can pro-
duce a cooling effect? A. (i) and (ii) only
B. (ii) and (iii) only
(i) Compression of a gas.
C. (i) and (iv) only
(ii) Expansion of gas
D. (iii) only C
(iii) Evaporation of a liquid
Section B (Structured)
A. (i), (ii) and (iii).
4. Explain why evaporation causes cool-
B. (i) and (iii) only. ing.
C. (ii) and (iii) only. Evaporation causes ener-
D. (iii) only. C getic molecules leave a
substance. This reduces
2. A domestic refrigerator uses a the average kinetic en-
volatile liquid. Which of the fol- ergy of the molecules of
lowing represents the order of the a substance which is pro-
processes the liquid undergoes? portional to temperature
hence cooling it.
A. Evaporation, cooling, compres-
5. State two factors which affect the
sion, condensation, evapora-
boiling point of water.
tion.
1. Pressure (or external
B. Cooling, condensation, evap-
pressure)
oration, compression, evapo-
ration. 2. Impurities in water

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 185 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.6. VAPOURS CHAPTER 3. HEAT
6. . The one in the basin evap-
orates fast because it has a
larger surface area exposed
Temperature 6 to air and the larger the
(◦ C)
surface area, the greater the
A
O
rate of evaporation.
B C
10. What are the functions of the fol-
-
Fig.6 Time (s) lowing in a refrigerator

(i) Compressor
Fig. 6 shows temperature ver- (ii) cooling fins?
sus time curve for a liquid. State
what is happening along BC. (i) to pump the evaporated
vapour to the cooling
The liquid which melted fins to loss heat and
at OA attains room tem- cool.
perature
(ii) To radiate the heat that
7. Use the kinetic theory of matter to has been extracted from
explain what is happening along the footstuff to the sur-
OA. rounding air.

The liquid is losing its 11. Distinguish between boiling and

internal potential energy evaporation.
to the surrounding hence Boiling is the process by
changing state from solid which a liquid changes to a
to liquid at constant tem- vapour when its saturated
perature. vapour pressure is equal
to the external pressure at
8. What is a saturated vapour? constant temperature and
evaporation is the process
It is a vapour in contact with by which a liquid changes
its own liquid. to a vapour at any temper-
ature.
9. Equal volumes of water at the same
temperature are poured in a basin Paper II (Essay)
and in a jug. State giving a rea-
son which water will evaporate 12. (i) What is meant by saturated
faster. vapour pressure?

Physics; Problems and Solutions 186 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.6. VAPOURS
(ii) Explain what may happen (b) how a refrigerator works;
when one is to cook food
from a very high attitude. A refrigerator is a device in
which a volatile liquid is made
Solution to evaporate. It is made up
of 3 parts.
(i) Saturated vapour pressure is
the pressure exerted by a vapour
in contact with its own liq- • The pump
uid.
(ii) Cooking food at a very high • The freezing box
altitude, where atmospheric
pressure is low, it takes long
• The condenser
to be ready, this is because
water boils at a much lower
temperature due to low ato-
spheric pressure. The pump pumps the volatile
liquid from one end to the other
13. (a) What is meant by latent heat reducing the vapour pressure
of evaporation? so as to enable the liquid to
boil or evaporate.
(b) With the aid of a labeled
the freezing box is the point
diagram describe how a re-
where the volatile liquid ac-
frigerator works.
tually evaporates and absorbs
(c) The cooling system of a the required heat to evapo-
refrigerator extracts 0.7KW rate from the foods and bev-
of heat. How long will it erages near it.
take to convert 500g of wa- The condenser is where the
ter at 20◦ C into ice? copper coils from the freez-
(d) Explain how evaporation ing box are connected to the
takes place cooling copper fins and the
vapour compressed so as to
Solution condense and enable the vapour
(a) latent heat of evaporation is to loose the heat to the sur-
the amount of heat required rounding air via the cooling
to change a substance from fins.
liquid to gaseous state at its
boiling point Diagram of refrigerator

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 187 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.6. VAPOURS CHAPTER 3. HEAT
liquid vapour(with heat from food stuff)
700t 210000
freezing compartment =
(liquid evaporates and cools) 700 700
210000
t =
? 700
N = 300 seconds

hence the refrigerator takes

300 seconds or 5 minutes
(d) evaporation takes place when
liquid molecules have or are
given high molecular speed
by heating them and they es-
j
6
cape from the attraction of
6 6 condenser their neighbouring liquid molecules
cooling fins to vapour or gaseous state.
compresional pump When this occurs for more liq-
(c) Power loss uid molecules at any temper-
ature, then we say that the
Power loss = 0.7kW liquid is evaporating
= 0.7 × 1000W
14. (c) Explain, in terms of molecules,
= 700W what is meant by a satu-
To change 500g of water at rated vapour.
20◦ C to ice at 0◦ C there are (d) Describe briefly one ap-
two process involved; plication of evaporation.
• To change temperature of
water from 20◦ C to 0◦ C and Solution
• to change the water at 0◦ C
to ice at 0◦ C (c) a saturated vapour is a vapour
that is in dynamic equilibrium
heat required is equal to the with its own liquid or in contact
sum of the two; with its own liquid. Interms of
P t = mc∆T + mlf the molecules of the liquid, it the
500 vapour in contact with its liquid
= × 4200 × (20 − 0) such that the number of vapour
1000
500 molecules condensing to liquid state
+ × 0.336 × 106
1000 is equal to the number of liquid
= 42000 + 168000 molecules changing to the vapour
700t = 210000 state.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 188 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 3. HEAT 3.7. HEAT ENGINES
(d) One application of evaporation is 2. In a four-stroke combustion en-
in the desalination of salty wa- gine, the correct order of strokes
ter. is
Here the salty water is placed in A. compression, power, exhaust,
an air tight container and then induction
connected to a vacuum pump. This
B. exhaust, compression, power,
pump reduces the vapour pres-
induction
sure of water at room tempera-
ture hence all the water evapo- C. induction, compression, power,
rates at room temperature leav- exhaust
ing the salt behind. D. induction, power, compression,
exhaust C
OR
Section B (Structured)
In seasoning wood i.e. drying wood.
3. Why is a petrol engine referred to
as a four-stroke engine?
Because its cycle of operation
3.7 Heat Engines
is composed of 4 steps, in-
duction, compression, igni-
Section A (Objectives) tion and exhaust.
4. State two reasons why the efficiency
of a petrol engine is quite low.
1. Which one of the following state-
1. it has allow compression
ments is true about energy trans-
ratio
formation?
2. there is incomplete com-
A. A steam engine changes heat bustion of petrol
energy into mechanical energy.
B. A thermopile changes electri-
cal energy to heat energy.
C. A dynamo changes electrical
energy to mechanical energy
D. A microphone changes elec-
trical energy to sound energy.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 189 Physics; Problems and Solutions

3.7. HEAT ENGINES CHAPTER 3. HEAT

Physics; Problems and Solutions 190 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

Chapter 4

Electricity and magnetism

2. Which one of the following materi-

Contents als can be electrified by friction?
4.1 Electrostatics . . . . . . 191
A. Plastic pen
4.2 Electric Cells . . . . . . . 204
4.3 Current electricity . . . 206 B. Silver rod
4.4 Magnetism . . . . . . . . 231 C. Copper rod
4.5 Magnetic effect of I . . . 236
D. Wet wood A
4.6 Electromagnetism . . . 249
a dry insulator is reqiured like a
plastic pen

4.1 Electrostatics 3. A charged conductor usually loses

charge gradually by a process called
Section A (Objectives) A. induction
B. insulation
1. When a charged body is brought C. conduction
near a cap of a negatively charged D. leakage D
gold leaf electroscope, the
4. A brass rod is rubbed with silk
A. divergence of the leaf does not and then brought near a positively
change charged gold leaf electroscope. The
B. leaf falls if the body is nega- divergence of the leaf will
tively charged
A. increase.
C. leaf diverges if the body is
positively charged. B. decrease

D. Leaf diverges if the body is C. not change A

negatively charged. D D. increase slightly and fall back.

191
4.1. ELECTROSTATICS CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
5. The result of rubbing a glass rod : ?
¾+6
j- -j ¾
with silk and separating them is ?z
A. 6
A. a negative charge on the rod
?
and an equal positive charge y 6
- +j ¾ -j
-
on the silk. 9 ?
B. 6
B. equal amounts of negative charge ?
on both. w
¾+6
j
µ - ¾
j
R
?
C. a positive charge on the rod C.
¸ 6
and an equal negative charge ?
/
on the silk. - +j I -6
j
-
/ ?
D. no charge on both the rod and D. 6K
the silk. C
A
6. A metal rod gains a positive charge
when rubbed with fabric. The 9. The laws of electrostatics induc-
fabric acquire. tion state that

A. no charge A. like poles repel and unlike

B. a negative charge equal to that poles attract
on the rod. B. like poles attract and unlike
C. a positive charge equal to that pole repel
on the rod. C. like charges repel and unlike
D. a positive charge greater than charges attract
that on the rod. B D. like charges attract and un-
7. When a rod is brought close to like charges repel C
the cap of a negatively charged 10. Which of the following actions
gold leaf electroscope and its leaf will cause the leaf of a negatively
diverges, it shows that the rod is charged electroscope to fall?
A. negatively charged.
(i)Bringing a positively charged
B. Positively charged. rod near the cap.
C. Neutral. (ii)Bringing a negatively charged
D. Partially charged. A rod near the cap.
8. Which one of the following dia- (iii)Connecting the can to the earth.
grams represents the correct elec-
tric field pattern for two oppo- A. (i) and (ii) only.
sitely charged points? B. (i) and (iii) only.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 192 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.1. ELECTROSTATICS
C. (ii) and (iii) only. D. insulators just receive the charge
D. (i), (ii) and (iii). B from the atmosphere without
being rubbed. A
11. When polythene and wool are
14.
rubbed against each other and
Cap
then separated, they acquire ­
À
­
A. no charge.
B. equal amount of same type of ¾ Metal rod
charge.
—
C. equal and opposite charges. — —
—
— —
— —
D. both acquire positive and neg- —
— —
—
—
———— — —
ative charges C

12. A body can only be confirmed to The diagram above shows part
be electrically charged when of the gold leaf electroscope. What
will happen to the leaf if a posi-
A. another charged body attracts
tively charged rod is brought near
it.
the cap of the electroscope? It
B. it does not affect the leaf of a will
charged electroscope
A. increase in deflection
C. it is repelled by another charged
body. B. remain in the same position.
D. it is found to have less pro- C. reduce in deflection
tons than electrons. C D. break off from the plate. C
13. It is easier to charge insulators The positive ions will attract the
than conductors because electrons from the plate and leaf,
reducing the their total charge,
A. the insulators don’t allow the
reducing the force of repulsion,
charge to flow away but the
reducing the deflection.
conductors allow it to flow away
B. the conductors retain the charge15. Which of the following statement
by conduction but the insu- is true about a good electric in-
lators release it to the atmo- sulator?
sphere A. it acquires an electric charge
C. it is impossible to charge con- when rubbed with suitable ma-
ductors under any condition. terials

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 193 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.1. ELECTROSTATICS CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
B. all its electrons are loosely A. deflect upwards. A
bound to its atoms. B. deflect downwards.
C. Electric charge easily flows C. move perpendicular to the plates.
on its surface.
D. pass through the plates un-
D. Some of its electrons are free deflected
to move about. A
19.
16. An electroscope becomes nega-
tively charged when it B4
²¯²¯
²¯
B1 ²¯ 1.1A
A. Loses electrons. ±°±°
E
²¯²¯
±°±°
F
B. Gains protons. ²¯²¯²¯ ±°±°
B3
1.3A 2.6A
±°±°±°
C. Gains electrons.
B2
D. Loses protons. C Fig. 6

In the above circuit B1 , B2 , B3

17. An insulating rod that can be
and B4 are bulbs. The readings
charged positively, by rubbing with
of ammeters E and F are, respec-
a piece of fabric is rubbed with
tively
fabric and left in contact for a
long time then separated. What A. 1.5A, 1.3A
would you expect each one of them B. 1.3A, 1.5A
to have?
C. 1.3A, 1.1A
A. no charge. D. 1.3A, 2.6A B
B. equal number of opposite charges.
C. more positive charge on the
rod than on the fabric. IF = 2.6 − 1.1 = 1.5A
D. more negative charge on the IE = 2.6 − 1.3 = 1.3A
fabric than on the rod. B 20. When a plastic rod is brought near
18. a charged electroscope, the gold
leaf is seen to diverge more. The
+ possible charges on the rod and
-
the electroscope are
Electron beam - Electroscope Plastic rod
A. positive negative
A beam of electrons is incident B. negative positive
midway between two charged plates C. Negative negative
as shown above. The beam will D. Positive uncharged C

Physics; Problems and Solutions 194 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.1. ELECTROSTATICS
Divergence of the electroscope in- Fig. 15 shows a conductor sup-
creases when they have the same ported on an electrical insulator.
charge i.e. positive and positive The conductor is given some pos-
or negative and negative. itive charge. Show how the charge
is distributed on the conductor.
21. Which one of the following shows
+
the correct distribution of elec- +
+ + +
+ ++ + +
+ +
+
++ + +
tric charges generated in clouds + +
+ + +
++
+ +
+ + + ++
due to violent movements within + + +
+ ++
+
+ + + +
the thunder clouds? + +
+ - -- - -
+ + + + +
- - - - -
+ ++ + + -
+ + -
A. B. 24 .
+ -
+ + + + + + -
- - - + -
+ -
C. D.
+k -k
D
The unequal distribution of elec-
tric charge in clouds is what causes Sketch the electric field pattern
the violent movements in thun- due to two unlike charges P and
der clouds. This is in C Q above.
Section B (Structured)
22. What happens to an insulator when -
²
it is rubbed by another insulator K )
-
of different material? i +k - -k
One of the insulators losses y
/ -
electrons and becomes posi- °
I
tively charged and the other -
gains them becoming nega-
25. State the laws of electrostatics.
tively charged.
Like charges repel and un-
23. . like charges attract each
other
26. Two insulting materials are rubbed
together, describe what is observed
if
(i) The two are brought near the
Fig. 15 cap of a gold leaf electroscope

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 195 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.1. ELECTROSTATICS CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
(ii) Only one of them is brought If they are separated
near the cap. when the charged rod is
still in that position, they
(i) The gold leaf will not di- acquire opposite charges.
verge.
(ii) The gold leaf diverges
29. .
27. Why is it difficult to perform ex-
periments in electrostatics under
damp conditions? ¾ A

Because the charged bodies

B
loose charge by corona dis- ¼
charge via the water vapour C
+
28. A positively charged rod is brought ¾ D

near two conducting spheres A

Fig.10
and B in contact as shown in fig.
9.

Fig. 10 shows the main parts of

an electroscope. Name them.

A - metal cap
¶³
¶³
+++++++
µ´
A
µ´
B B - metal rod
Fig. 9
C - gold leaf
(i) Show the charges on the spheres. D - metal plate
(shown up)

30. State two uses of an electroscope.

1. to test for charge

¶³
¶³
2. to test for sign of
+++++++ A B charge
µ´
µ´

(ii) Describe how the sphere may 31. .

be given permanent charge

Physics; Problems and Solutions 196 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.1. ELECTROSTATICS
(c) Sketch the electric field
pattern between a charged
point and a metal plate.
@
@ ¡
¡
P (d) Describe how a lighten-
²¯
B
±° ing conductor safeguards
a tall building from being
¶¶
¶ ¶ ¿ struck by lightening.
¶ ¿ Insulator %
¿ %
Fig. 10 Solution

Fig. 10 shows a negatively charged(a) To determine sign of charge on a

ball, B, inside a hollow metal con- given charged body.
ductor, P, resting on an insula-
tor. Describe the distribution of • Get a positively charged elec-
charge on the metal conductor: troscope (it’s leaf is always di-
verged)
(i) Before B touches P. • Bring the charged body near
inside P, it is positively its metal cap.
charged and outside it is • If the leaf divergence increases
negatively charged with then the body has the same
charge of same magni- sign of charge as that on the
tude as that on B. electroscope i.e. it is positively
(ii) After B touches P. charged and
B looses all its charge to • If the leaf divergence deceases,
P. The inside of P is not then the body has a charge
charged but its outside with sign opposite to that on
acquires a charge equal the electroscope i.e. negatively
to that previously on B charged.
NB: You can also use a negatively
Paper II (Essay)
charged electroscope to determine
32. (a) Describe how you would sign of charge on a charged body.
use a gold leaf electroscope (b) How an insulator gets charged
to determine the sign of by rubbing; when two neutral in-
the charge on a given charged sulators are rubbed against each
body. other, one looses the electrons and
(b) Explain how an insulator the other gains them. The in-
gets charged by rubbing. sulator that gains the electrons

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 197 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.1. ELECTROSTATICS CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
becomes negatively charged and
U ?°
the one that looses the elections ~ / )
- ¾»
becomes positively charged. : i
½¼
(c) Electric field pattern of a charged
µ 7 ]
point and a metal plate ¸ 6 M

• If the plate and the point charge 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

have the same charge, then
we have Remember that this question is
nor specific that is why i had to
~
U
/ )
?° give all the possible answers to
-
º· the question.
¾
¹¸
: y (d) The lightening conductor is a cop-
1 Y per wire running from a plate bur-
j )
j ¼ ried in the ground to the top most
6 6 6 6 6
point on the building ending in
sharp spikes. When lightening
strikes to such a building charges
6
K ± accumulate on it, the lightening
} º· 7 1
¾ - conductor provides a low resis-
9 ¹¸
)
q tance path-way for the charges
j
to or from the earth (the ground),
*
I
k > otherwise they would pass through
? ? ? ? ? the walls of the building and wa-
ter content in them would evap-
Where the × s are neutral orate expand, drying, weakening
points the walls and hence the building
• If the plate and the point charge collapses.
have opposite charges, then 33. (a) What is meant by a con-
we can have ductor and an insulator?
Give an example of each.
K 6± (b) (i) Explain briefly how you
y } º· 7 1
9 q can charge a conduc-
¹¸
ª ª tor negatively by induc-
w
® ? U tion.
(ii) Describe how it can
6 6 6 6 66 6 6 6 6 be confirmed that the

Physics; Problems and Solutions 198 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.1. ELECTROSTATICS
conductor in (b) (i) is • Connect and disconnect (not
negatively charged. very fast) an earth wire to
the other side (positively charged
Solution side) of the neutral body.

This causes the electrons to flow

(a) a conductor is a materials with from the earth to the electron de-
loosely bound electrons on its atoms ficient side (positively charged side)
while an insulator is a material making the initially neutral body
with firmly bound electrons to its acquires an excess of negative charges
atoms. ¿¿
An example of a conductor is cop-
per i.e. any metal ÁÀÁÀe’s
K
An example of an insulator is wood
or rubber.

(b)

(i) charging a conductor negatively

by electrostatic induction;

• Bring a positively charged body

(or a rod) near a neutral body.
• Taking the positively charged
This makes the side near the charged body away, the initially neu-
body of the neutral body nega- tral body is left with an ex-
tively charged and the other end cess of negative charges (elec-
positively charged (i.e. it causes trons) which distribute evenly
unequal distribution of charge on now on it, hence it has been
the surface of the neutral con- charged negatively by electro-
ductor). static induction.
charged neutral negatively charged

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 199 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.1. ELECTROSTATICS CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
(ii) to confirm that the conduc- (b) Describe how a gold leaf
tor in (b)(i) above is a con- electroscope may be used
ductor you may to test the nature of the
charge on an object.
EITHER take it near the metal (c) Draw the electric patterns
cap of a positively charged elec- for:
troscope and if its leaf divergency
(i) an insulated negative
deceases then the body is nega-
charge.
tively charged.
(ii) two positively charged
OR parallel plates at a small
If you take it near the metal cap distance apart.
of a negatively charged electro- (d) Explain why it is not ad-
scope and its gold leaf divergency visable to touch the cop-
increases then the body is nega- per strip of a lightening
tively charged. conductor when it is rain-
34. Explain how leakage of charge ing
occurs at the end of sharp con-
Solution
ductors.
(a) (i) When a glass rod is rubbed with
Solution silk the glass rod losses elec-
trons and the silk gains them
Sharp pointed charged conduc- hence the glass rod becomes
tors. At the sharp end, the elec- positively charged and the silk
tric field is very strong, this causes becomes negatively charged.
the air near it to get ionized and
(ii) when a glass rod is rubbed
so the conductor repels the like
with an identical glass rod,
charges in the ionized air and at-
one of them losses electrons
tract the unlike charges. These
becoming positively charged
neutralize some charges on the
and the other gains electrons
charged conductor and that is the
becoming negatively charged.
leakage of charge known as Corona
discharge. (b) Using a gold-leaf electroscope to
test the nature of charge on an
35. (a) What happens when a glass object.
rod is rubbed with:
You may use a negatively charged
(i) silk? electroscope or a positively charged
(ii) an identical glass rod? electroscope.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 200 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.1. ELECTROSTATICS
• Using negatively charged elec-
troscope, always its leaf is di- ?
~ /
verged. When you bring this '$
charged body near it, the di- - ¾
vergence will change.
&%
If the divergence increases, 7
}
then the body has the same 6
charge as that on the elec-
troscope, i.e. negatively charged
(ii) two positively charged par-
If the divergence decreases, allel plates a small distance
then the body has charged op- apart
posite to that on the electro-
scope, i.e. positively charged
? ??????????????

OR

(d) because lightening may strike you

• Using positively charged elec- in the process of touching it. Since
troscope, always its leaf is di- lightening involves the flow of elec-
verged. When you bring this trons from the earth to the cloud
charged body near it, the di- or from the cloud to the earth,
vergence will change. remebering that our body is a good
If the divergence increases, conductor, when you touch it, you
then the body has the same provide an easy or low resistance
charge as that on the elec- path to the flow of charges through
troscope, i.e.positively charged your body hence be electrocuted.

If the divergence decreases, 36. (a) (i) What is a conductor?

then the body has charge op- (ii) Give two examples of
posite to that on the electro- conductors.
scope, i.e. negatively charged (b) Describe how a gold leaf
electroscope can be posi-
tively charged by electro-
(c) Electric field pattern for static induction.
(c) Two polythene sheets A
and B are both negatively
(i) an insulated negative charge charged with equal amounts

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 201 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.1. ELECTROSTATICS CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
of charge. One end of each induction Here you bring a neg-
polythene sheet is fixed into atively charged body near the metal
an insulator and the two cap of the electroscope
sheets brought near each
other as shown in figure
4.
Insulators

Polythene sheets
A B

Fig. 4

(i) Describe and explain

what happens.
(ii) Describe and explain
what happens it an earthed
sheet of metal is inserted
between the polythene
sheets without touch- Connect an earth wire to the cap
ing them. and then disconnect it.

(d) Explain how thunder is

produced during a rain-
storm.

Solution electrons leave

the cap and leaf

(a) (i) a conductor is a material that R e

has free electrons on its sur-
face. It easily conducts heat
and electricity. 6e

(ii) examples of conductor are;

• All metals like copper, iron,
zinc ,etc
• Mercury
(b) how to change a gold-leaf electro- Taking away the negatively charged
scope positively by electrostatic body,

Physics; Problems and Solutions 202 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.1. ELECTROSTATICS
point when an earth wire is con-
nected to the metal cap, it pro-
6 vides an easy path or escape route
take away
for the repelled electrons on the
metal plate and gold leaf to the
earth 1 . The gold leaf collapses
since it is now neutralized by the
removal of the excess electrons
(the metal cap is still electron de-
6e ficient). Disconnecting the earth
wire and taking away the nega-
tively charged body respectively,
the electroscope is generally left
with a deficiency of electrons hence
The electroscope will be left pos- the electroscope is positively charged.
itively charged (i.e. with a defi-
ciency of electrons). (c) (i) the negatively charged poly-
thene sheets will repel each
other hence they will bend like
this

F¾ - F
Explanation
Forces of repulsion
when a negatively charged body
is brought near the metal cap, it (ii) then the negatively charged
repels the free electrons on the polythene plates will be at-
electroscope from the metal cap tracted to the earthed sheet
to the metal plate and the gold of metal.
leaf. The metal cap is left with a
(d) when lightening strikes, charge
deficiency of electrons i.e. posi-
flows either from the cloud to the
tively charged and the metal plate
earth or from the earth to the
with the gold leaf with an excess
1
of electrons i.e. negatively chargedhas The earth can never get filled up of electrons i.e
a high charge storing capacity or high capaci-
hence the leaf diverges. At this tance

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 203 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.2. ELECTRIC CELLS CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
cloud or from cloud to cloud. This D. keep the potential difference
causes the air where the charge constant. D
passes to expand very fast creat-
ing a compression sound wave, 3. The negative plate of a simple cell
which we call thunder. That is gradually goes into solution be-
how thunder is produced cause of

A. polarization.
B. local action.
4.2 Electric Cells
C. charging.
Section A (Objectives) B. gassing. B

4. In a simple cell, the source of elec-

trons which constitute the elec-
1. Which of the following statements
tron currents is
is /are true?

(i) When identical cells are in A. the zinc plate.

parallel, the total e.m.f. is B. the copper plate.
the sum of individual e.m.fs. C. dilute sulphuric acid
(ii) In a lead-acid accumulator, D. potassium dichromate. A
the lead peroxide acts as the
positive pole. In a simple cell, current flows from
(iii) The e.m.f. of a cell is the copper plate to the zinc plate and
total p.d. across the external electrons from the zinc plate to
and internal resistances. the copper plate hence the zinc
plate is the source of electrons
A. (i) only. got from sulphate ions in the di-
B. (i) and (ii) only . lute sulphuric acid.

C. (ii) and (iii) only. 5. In a simple cell

D. (i), (ii) and (iii). C A. polarization is caused by im-
pure zinc.
2. In a dry cell, manganese (IV) ox-
ide is used to B. potassium dichromate is used
to prevent polarization.
A. reduce the p.d. across it.
C. the formation of hydrogen bub-
B. double its resistance. bles on the copper plate causes
C. increase its resistance. local action

Physics; Problems and Solutions 204 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.2. ELECTRIC CELLS
D. hydrogen is produced on the enclosed in a zinc case as the cath-
zinc plate and causes polar- ode.
ization. B The anode is a carbon rod dipped
in the manganese(iv)oxide in the
Section B (Structured) zinc case as shown below;
6. State two advantages of a nickel-
iron accumulator over a lead acid
accumulator. Carbon rod
9
1. It can stay in dis- Zinc case
9
charged state for a
longer period without ¸
any effect.
2. It can supply large cur- Manganese(iv)oxide
rents without any ill ef-
fect. The manganese(iv)oxide dissoci-
ates and releases electrons to the
7. Name the gases evolved during the zinc case and this creates a po-
charging of lead acid accumula- tential difference between the zinc
tor. case and the carbon rod. This
Oxygen and hydrogen can drive the current through a
device connected across the cath-
8. Why is a dry cell called a primary
ode and anode.
cell?
Because when it is used up The zinc used is pure zinc to pre-
(discharged) it can not be vent local action and the man-
recharged. ganese(iv)oxide is an oxidising agent
hence it prevents polarisation.
Paper II (Essay) 10. (i) Draw a labeled diagram of
a lead acid accumulator.
9. With the aid of a labeled dia-
gram, explain how a dry cell (ii) List three precautions nec-
works. essary to prolong the life
of an accumulator.
Solution (iii) State two disadvantages
of a Nife cell over a lead
How a dry cell works
acid cell.
A dry cell is made up of man-
ganese(iv)oxide as the electrolyte Solution

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 205 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
(a) (i) a lead-acid accumulator p.d. across the 6Ω resistor if the
-
P bO + Pb total circuit current is 2A.
A. 1.0V.
B. 2.0V.
C. 3.3V.
Dilute D. 112.0V. D
Sulphuric acid
(ii) the following are the precau-
tions to adhere to so as to pro- 20
I = = 2A
long the life of an accumula- (4 + 6)
tor V = IR = 2 × 6
• do not leave it in the dis- = 12V
charge state for long.
• Do not short circuit the 2.
terminals i.e. connecting
a wire to positive and neg-
ative terminals. 1.5
• Always give it a top-up charge
monthly.
(iii) advantages of Nife cells over
5Ω
lead acid cells
• They can be left in the dis- Fig. 1
charge state for a long pe-
riod with no harm. A cell of e.m.f 1.5V and internal
resistance, r, is connected in se-
• They can provide large cur-
ries with a 5Ω resistor as shown
rents without ill-effects
in Fig. 1. if the current in the
circuit is 0.25A, find r.

4.3 Current electricity A. 1Ω

B. 6Ω
Section A (Objectives) C. 11Ω
D. 16Ω A
1. A p.d. of 20 V is applied across From
two resistors of 4Ω and 6Ω con-
nected in series. Determine the E = I (R + r)

Physics; Problems and Solutions 206 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
E A. 2V
r = −R
I B. 5V
1.5
= −5 C. 6V
0.25
= 6−5 D. 10V C
= 1Ω

V
I =
3. R
10
=
2+3
= 2
V = IR
= 2×3
2.5Ω 5.0Ω
= 6V
Fig. 1
5.
If each cell shown in Fig. 1 has
2V 2V 2V
an internal resistance of 0.5Ω, find
the effective resistance in the cir-
cuit.
3Ω

A. 1.25 º·
A 2Ω
B. 7.50 ¹¸
Fig. 2
C. 8.00
D. 9.00 D Three cells of e.m.f. 2V and neg-
ligible internal resistance are con-
nected to two resistors as shown
in the circuit in fig. 2. The read-
R = 2.5 + 5.0 + (0.5 × 3)
ing of the ammeter is
= 7.5 + 1.5
= 9.0 A. 0.40 A.
B. 0.83 A.
4. Two resistors of 2 ohms and 3 C. 1.20 A.
ohms are connected in series with
D. 7.20 A. C
a 10 volt battery of negligible in-
ternal resistance. The potential
difference across a 3 ohm resis- 3E
tor is I =
R
Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 207 Physics; Problems and Solutions
4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
º·
3×2
= ¹¸
V
3+2 12V

6 2Ω
=
5
= 1.2 º·
A
¹¸
6. The resistance of a metal in the
form of a wire increases with R

A. decrease in length B Fig. 7

B. increase in temperature. Find the value of R.

C. decrease in temperature.
A. 1Ω
D. increase in cross-sectional area.
B. 2Ω
7. The effective resistance when two C. 3Ω
resistors of 5Ω and 15Ω joined in
D. 4Ω B
series are placed in parallel with
a 20Ω resistor is
A. 0.1Ω 12 = 4 + IR
B. 10Ω 12 = 4 + 4R
C. 20Ω 4R = 12 − 4
4R = 8
D. 40Ω B
R = 2Ω

10. An electric appliance having 4

(5 + 15) × 20
R = heating elements, each rated at
(5 + 15) + 20
0.75KW, is used on a 240V mains.
R = 10Ω
What is the power rating of the
8. Which of the following only works appliance?
with a direct current? A. 80KW
A. Electric lamp. B. 60KW
B. Transformer. C. 3KW
C. Electroplating. D. 3W C
D. Electric bell. D
9. In fig. 7, the ammeter A reads 4A P = 0.75KW × 4
and the voltmeter V reads 4V. = 3KW

Physics; Problems and Solutions 208 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
11. D. voltage of 12V is applied, en-
ergy used in every second is
2Ω 3Ω
48J. D
P Q
5Ω

Fig. 10 V2
P =
R
Fig. 10 shows a network of re- 122
R =
sistors. The effective resistance 48
between points P and Q = 3Ω

A. 0.97Ω. 13. An electricity board charges Shs.

10 per kilowatt-hour of electrical
B. 1.2Ω
energy supplied. What is the to-
C. 2.5Ω tal cost in Shs. of operating 4
D. 10Ω C light bulbs, each rated at 100W
for 5 hours

A. Sh. 2.
R1 × (R2 + R3 )
R = B. Sh 20
R1 + (R2 + R3 )
5 × (2 + 3) C. Sh 4,000.
R =
5 + (2 + 3) D. Sh 20,000. B
5×5
=
5+5
25
= E = pt
10
= 2.5. = 4 × 100W × 5hrs
= 2000W h
12. A car head lamp bulb is mar- E = 2Kwh
keted 12V, 48W. this means that Cost = 2Kwh × 10sh/Kwh
when a = 20.sh
A. voltage of 12V is applied, a
14. When brass is to be copper-plated,
current of 14 A flows.
the suitable electrolyte used is
B. power of 48W is developed,
the resistance is 4Ω. A. distilled water.
C. voltage of 12V is applied, re- B. sulphuric acid
sistance is 4Ω. C. lead (IV) oxide.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 209 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
D. copper-sulphate. D B. 10A

Copper platting is putting or de- C. 13A

positing a thin layer of copper on D. 30A. B
a substance.
15.
P
30Ω
I =
· T V
·
· T
T 2500
L ·
40Ω =
L · 240
L 10Ω · = 10.4A

17.
Fig. 7
º·
- +
V
The diagram in fig. 7 shows three ¹¸
resistors connected in a circuit. z
What is the effective resistance ¿
¿

of the circuit? ¿
Switch z Cell

A. 20.0Ω
B. 47.5Ω
Fig. 9
C. 60.0Ω
D. 90.0Ω B When the circuit in fig. 9 is switched
on, the voltmeter
R1 × R2 A. shows no deflection
R = R3 +
R1 + R2
10 × 30 B. deflects in the wrong direc-
R = 40 + tion.
10 + 30
300 C. reads the e.m.f. of the cell.
= 40 +
40
= 47.5 D. reads the terminal potential
difference across the cell B
16. What is the most suitable fuse
for an electric heater rated 2.5kW Because the positive of the gal-
when connected to a voltage of vanometer should be connected
240V? to the positive of the cell.

A. 5A 18.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 210 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
20. A bulb of resistance 1.5Ω is con-
º· nected to a cell of e.m.f. 2.0V.
12V
V 6Ω 3Ω Find the energy dissipated in 45s.
¹¸

A. 60 J
Fig. 5 B. 67.5 J.

A battery of e.m.f 12V is connected C. 90 J.

across two resistors of 6Ω and 3Ω D. 120 J D
as shown in fig. 5. Which one of
the following statements is true
about the circuit? The
E = P
 t 
A. p.d across 6Ω is half the p.d V 2
=  t
across 3Ω. R
B. p.d across 6Ω is twice the p.d 2.02
= × 45
across 3Ω. 1.5
= 120.
C. p.d across 6Ω is the same as
the p.d across 3Ω.
21. Calculate the amount of current
D. reading of voltmeter V is greater taken by an electric flat iron marked
than 12V. C 250V, 1000W.
19. Two coils of wire of resistances
A. 0.25A.
2Ω and 3Ω are connected in se-
ries to a 10V battery of negligi- B. 0.40A.
ble internal resistance. The cur- C. 250A.
rent through the 2Ω resistor is
D. 4.00A. D
A. 0.5A.
B. 2A.
C. 5 A. From P = IV
D. 50 A B P
I =
V
1000
=
E 250
I = = 4
R
10
= 22. .
2+3
= 2A

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 211 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
Glass tube Mercury
R ¤ The total resistance between X
¤²
²¯ and Y in fig. 3 is
A
±°
A. 20.0Ω
B. 9.50Ω
Fig. 1
C. 6.30Ω
When the diameter of the glass
tube in the circuit in fig. 1 is D. 4.20Ω B
doubled and again filled completely
with mercury, the reading of am-
meter A. R = parallel + 6Ω
(3 + 4) × 7
A. decreases. R = +6
(3 + 4) + 7
B. Increases. 49
= +6
C. Remains the same. 14
= 3.5 + 6
D. Falls to zero B = 9.5
because I = VR and V is constant
24. Two cells each of e.m.f 1.5V and
and R = ρl
A then
internal resistance 0.5Ω are con-
V nected in series with a resistor
I = ρl of 2Ω as in figure 4.
A
VA
=
ρl

2 2
but A = πd4 hence I = πd4ρl then if
º· J S
J
d is doubled then I is multipled V
¹¸
by 4 i.e. I increases. But fill-
ing it with more conducting ma- 2Ω
terial creates more conducting ma-
terial which leads to increase in-
The reading of the voltmeter V
cident.
when S is closed is
23. A. 1.0V.
3Ω 4Ω B. 1.5 V.
6Ω C. 2.0 V
X Y
7Ω
D. 3.0 V C
Fig. 3
Physics; Problems and Solutions 212 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Which one of the following arrange-
V ments gives the correct circuit?
I =
R X L M
1.5 × 2 3 A. Voltmeter rheostat ammeter
I = =
(0.5 × 2 + 2) 1 + 2 B. ammeter voltmeter rheostat
= 1A C. rheostat voltmeter ammeter
D. ammeter rheostat voltmeter
V = IR = 1 × 2
= 2.0V The voltmeter must be in paral-
lel with the load i.e. M is volt-
25. .
meter the other devices can be
interchanged and there is no net
1kΩ
º· effect. D
A 0.25A
¹¸

V
Fig. 3
Section B (Structured)
The voltage supply in the circuit
in fig. 3 is
A. 0.25V
27. Explain why a current does not
B. 4.0V
flow between the electrodes in di-
C. 25V lute sulphuric acid until a cer-
D. 250V D tain value of p.d. is exceeded.

This is because some energy

E = Ir is used to dissociate or break
the acid molecules into ions
= 0.25 × 1000
that can conduct the electric
= 250 current.
26. To determine the value of a re-
sistor R, a voltmeter, a rheostat
and an ammeter must be connected 28. Using the same exes, sketch a graph
in the gaps X, L and M as shown of current against p.d. for
in fig. 4.
emf
L R

X M
(i) a torch bulb

Fig. 4 (ii) a carbon resistor

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 213 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
(i)

º·
For torch bulb
6 A
¹¸
I

©©
*
Resistance wire

-
Fig.12
V

The ammeter reading de-

(ii)
creases
For Carbon resistor
6 31. State Ohm’s law.
I
The current passing through
a conductor is directly pro-
portional to the potential dif-
ference across its ends pro-
-
V
vided all physical conditions
remain constant.
32. .
29. Draw diagrams to show two ways
in which two resistors can be ar-
ranged in an electrical circuit.

Two resistors can be ar-

3Ω 6Ω
ranged either in parallel or
in series as shown below;

Fig. 14
series connection

Two resistors of resistances 3Ω

and 6Ω are connected across a bat-
Parallel connection
tery of 4V of negligible internal
resistance as shown in fig. 14 above.
Find the
30. State what happens to the read-
ing of the ammeter in the circuit (i) combined resistance.
in fig. 12 below, if one cell is re- (ii) current supplied by the bat-
moved. tery.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 214 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
(i) combined resistance. 34. What is meant by short circuit as
applied to electricity?
6×3
R = This is when two opposite
6+3
18 electric terminal wires are
= joined or put into contact or
9
= 2Ω it is when current by-passes
a resistor.
(ii) current supplied by the
35. An electric appliance is marked
battery.
“240V 4Kw”.
V
I = (i) What does this statement mean?
R
4 (ii) Calculate the current drawn
=
2 by the appliance in normal
= 2A use.
33. A source of e.m.f. 20V and negli- (i) It means that when the
gible internal resistance is con- appliance is connected
nected to resistors of 2Ω, 2Ω, and to a 240V terminals it
3Ω as shown in fig. 11. dissipates 4Kw i.e. 4000
watts of energy or 4000
e.m.f = 20V
joules of energy per sec-
ond.
º·
3Ω
A
(ii)
K ¹¸
power
2Ω
Current =
voltage
4000
2Ω =
Fig.11 240
= 16.67A
Find the ammeter reading when
switch K is 36. Define the volt.

(i) Open;
A volt is the potential dif-
I= V
= 20
= 4A ference across a 1 Ω resis-
R 3+2
tor when a current of 1A
(ii) Closed; is passing through it.

V 20 20
37. .
I= R = 3+ 2×2
= 3+1 = 5A
2+2

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 215 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
V
l
6
6V
k
2Ω

P. d

4Ω 4Ω

-
Fig.9 Current

(i) What is the effective resis-

tance in the circuit in Fig. 9? 39. State one example of a non-Ohmic
(The cell has negligible resis- conductor
tance). Semi conductor diode or
(ii) What will be the reading of a thermistor
the voltmeter when the key,
k is closed? 40. Find the voltage across a 3Ω re-
sistor if a current of 4A passes
(i) effective resistance through it.

4×4 from Ohm’s law

R = 2+
4+4 V = IR
16
= 2+ = 4×3
8
= 2+2 = 12V
= 4Ω

41. Fig. 10 shows a charging circuit.

(ii) voltmeter reading

Z W
V X
e
I =
R e
6 a.c
eSupply
=
4
= 1.5A X
e 7 Aj
Fig.10
V = IR
= 2 × 1.5
= 3V (a) Name and state the use of
each of the parts labeled.

38. Sketch a p.d versus current graph (i) w

for an Ohmic resistor. (ii) z

Physics; Problems and Solutions 216 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
W is a transformer; it steps A battery of e.m.f 12V and
up or steps down voltage or negligible internal resis-
current tance is connected to re-
Z is a diode, it rectifies the sistance 2Ω ,3Ω and 6Ω as
alternating current to direct shown in Fig. 3. Find the
current by cutting off the reading of the ammeter, A,
negative parts of the cycle. when K is closed.

(b) Sketch the waveform that is Solution

obtained from terminals XX.
(a) (i) A volt is the potential differ-
Voltage
ence between two points, if
6
it requires 1joule of work to
more a charge of xx coulomb
-
Time
from one point to the other.
Half wave rectification (ii)electrical resistance is the op-
position to the flow of electri-
cal current through a given
substance or material.
Paper II (Essay)
(b) To prolong life of an accumulator

42. (a) Define the following terms: • do not short circuit it i.e con-
(i) the volt, nect a wire across its termi-
(ii) electrical resistance nals directly.
• Do not leave it in the discharge
(b) List ways by which the life
state for long.
of an accumulator can be
prolonged. • Do not overload it.
(c)
(c)
k

E
I =
º·
R
Battery 12V I2
-
6+3
3Ω A R = +2
¹¸ 6+3
2Ω = 2+2
I1
- 6Ω
= 4Ω
Fig. 3

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 217 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
E (i) the current is draws when work-
I =
R ing normally is given by;
12
=
4 from P = V I
I = 3A P
I =
but I = I1 + I2 V
36W
Also V3Ω = V6Ω =
12V
3 × I2 = 6 + I1 = 3 Amperes
I2 = 6I1
I1 = 2I1
(ii) its resistance

From P = I 2 R
⇒ I1 = I1 × I2 P
I2 =⇒ R = 2
= + I2 I
2 36
I2 2 = 2
= + I2 3
2 2 36
3 =
I = I2 9
2 = 4Ω
3
3 = I2
2 Or
2×3
⇒ I2 =
3
I2 = 2A
V2
Using P =
R
The reading of the ammeter A is V2
=⇒ R =
2A P
122
43. A bulb is rated 12.0V 36W when =
36
used on a 12.0 V supply. 144
=
(i) How much current does it 36
= 4Ω
draw from the supply?
(ii) What is its resistance? 44. (a) What is meant by the fol-
lowing:
Solution
(i) electromotive force,
for a bulb 12V 36w used on 12V (ii) internal resistance, of
supply. a cell?

Physics; Problems and Solutions 218 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
(b) A cell is connected in se- Comparing with y = mx + c,
ries with an ammeter and the slope is −r
a variable resistor. The
potential difference, V, across r = −slope
the resistor varies with cur- ∆V
= −
rent I, supplied through ∆I
the resistor as shown in Looking at the extreme points
the graph in Figure 4.1 on on the graph i.e. (4.5, 0) and
page 229 Use the graph to (0, 2.0)
determine the
(i) e.m.f ∆V
r = −
(ii) internal resistance of ∆I
2.0 − 0
the cell. = −
0 − 4.5
2
Solution = −
−4.5
(a) (i) Electromotive force is the to- r = 0.444Ω
tal work done is moving a charge
of one coulomb though out the Hence internal resistance is
electric circuit. 0.444Ω

(ii) internal resistance of a cell 45. (a) Draw sketch graphs of p.d
is the opposition to the flow V against current , I, for
of electric current through a the following;
cell or battery.
(i) a wire,
(b) from the given graph (ii) an electrolyte
(i) Emf = 2.0V i.e. it is the (iii) a semi-conductor diode.
value of voltage when I = 0A (b) Explain the differences be-
from the graph tween a voltmeter and an
(ii) Internal resistance , r ammeter in terms of their:
(i) construction
From E = I (R + r) (ii) use.
= IR + Ir (c) State three physical prop-
= V + Ir erties that affect the re-
=⇒ V = E − Ir sistance of a solid conduc-
= −Ir + E tor.
(d)

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 219 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
3.0V
V 6

2Ω

-
I
3Ω

Fig. 4

Two cells each of e.m.f 1.5V

and negligible internal re- (iii) for a semi-conductor diode
sistance connected in se- 6
V
ries across two resistors
of 2Ω and 3Ω as shown in
fig. 4. Calculate the cur-
rent.
-
I
(i) supplied by the cells,
(ii) that passes through (b) (i) in construction;
the 3Ω resistor. An ammeter has a low resis-
tance resistor in parallel with
the coil hence in general they
Solution have a low resistance.
A voltmeter has a high resis-
tance resistor in series with
(a) Voltage current graph the coil hence in general they
have a high resistance.
(i) for a wire (ii) in use;
A meters are connected in se-
6
ries with the device whose cur-
rent they are measuring and
V voltmeters are connected in
parallel with the device whose
potential difference they are
- measuring.
I

(c) Resistance of a solid conductor is

(ii) for an electrolyte affected by;

Physics; Problems and Solutions 220 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
• Cross-sectional area of the con-46. A cell of e.m.f E and internal
ductor resistance 1Ω is connected in
• Length of the conductor series with a 2Ω resistor and
a switch as shown in fig. 4.
• Temperature and
The voltmeter reads 1.5V when
• Nature of the material of the the switch is open.
conductor
(d) from question c c
X Y
Emf = 3.0V
¾»
V 2Ω
Total resistance, R ½¼ E
R1 × R2
R =
R1 + R2 Z
2×3
= Fig. 4
2+3
6
= (i) What is meant by e.m.f of
5
= 1.2Ω a cell?

(i) Current supplied by the cell, (ii) Find the value of E

I is (iii) What will the voltmeter
E read when the switch is
I = closed?
R
3 (iv) What will the voltmeter
=
1.2 read if X is connected to
= 2.5 Amperes
Z. Give reasons for your
(ii) Current through the 3Ω re- answer.
sistor.
Potential difference a cross the Solution
3Ω resistor is 3.0V
(i) Emf of a cell is the total work
done in moving a charge of
P.d.
Current = one coulomb throughout the
Resistance
3.0 circuit.
=
3.0 (ii) the value of emf is 1.5V
= 1 Ampere
(iii) when the switch is closed
It is 1 ampere. total resistance, R is

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 221 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
10V

R2 = 4Ω
Rtotal = r + R
R3 = 2.6Ω
= 1+2
R1 = 6Ω
= 3Ω
V Fig. 5
Current, I =
R A battery of e.m.f 10V and
E
= negligible internal resis-
Rtotal
tance is connected to re-
1.5
= sistors R1 , R2 and R3 of re-
3
= 0.5A sistances of 6Ω, 4Ω and 2.6Ω
respectively as shown in
But always the voltmeter reads fig. 5.
the potential difference across (i) Calculate the effective
the external resistance i.e. resistance of the circuit.
(ii) Find the rate at which
V = IR the electrical energy is
= 0.5 × 2 convert to heat energy
= 1V olt in R3

Hence the voltmeter reads 1 Solution

volt
(a) An experiment to measure the in-
(iv) When X - is connected to Z, ternal resistance of a cell.
the voltmeter reads 0 volts.
This is because it is reading • Apparatus; a voltmeter, am-
the potential difference across meter, connecting wires. Five
the wires which we assumed or more known resistors (R’s)
have zero resistance. and a battery of known emf
Since V = IR and R = 0V are required.
then V=0V that is why the • Connect them as shown be-
voltmeter reads 0 volts. low;

47. (a) Describe a simple exper- º· ¶³

A
iment to measure the in- ¹¸
V µ´
ternal resistance of a cell.
R
(b)

Physics; Problems and Solutions 222 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
• Read and record the readings 6×4
= + 2.6
of the voltmeter (V ) and the 6+4
ammeter (I) = 2.4 + 2.6
• Repeat the above procedure = 5Ω
with difference resistors(R0 s),
measure and record the read-
(ii) Power dissipated in the re-
ings of the voltmeter (V ) and
sistor, R3 ;
Ammeter (I) in the table as
Total current, I
shown below;
Emf
V(Volts) I(Amperes) I =
effective resistance
10
=
5
= 2A
Power, P, dissipated in the re-
sistor, R3 is;
• Plot a graph of V against I,
you will obtain a graph of the P = I 2R
form = 22 × 2.6
V
6
= 4 × 2.6
¼E
= 10.4 Watts
hence heat is generated in the
resistor R3 at a rate of 10.4
watts.
-
E
48. (a) .
r I
²¯
• Calculate the slope, s, of the A
±°
graph, it will be negative
∆V Battery
s= Vm
∆I ¸

• Internal resistance(r) of the Rheostat

Fig. 6
wire, will be obtained as:
An ammeter A and a volt-
r = −s
meter V are connected in
(b) (i) effective resistance, Rf a circuit as shown in fig.
parallel 6. What can you say about
Rf = + 2.6 these connections?
resistance
Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 223 Physics; Problems and Solutions
4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
(b) • The voltmeter in connected
6Ω in series yet it should be in
parallel hence no or very lit-
4Ω tle current flows in the cir-
3.6Ω ²¯ cuit.
A
±°
It can be corrected by exchang-
Fig. 7 ing the ammeter and the voltmeter.
Three resistors of 6Ω, 4Ω (b)
and 3.6Ω are connected to
eight identical cells of neg- Let the p.d. across the 6Ω and
ligible internal resistance 4Ω be V.
connected in series as shown 6Ω I6
I ¾ I
in fig. 7. If the ammeter /
4Ω I4
reads 2A when the switch
is closed, determine the: ¾ V -

(i) current through the 4Ω

resistor.
I = I4 + I6
(ii) e.m.f of each cell.
but p.d. across the 4Ω and
(c) Abbot paid an electricity
across the 6Ω are the same
bill of sh. 180 after using
since they are in parallel
two identical bulbs for 2
hours everyday for ten days V4Ω = V6Ω
at a cost of sh. 60 per unit. I4 × 4 = I6 × 6
(i) Determine the power 4I4 = 6I6
consumption by each of 6 3
the bulbs. I4 = I6 = I6
4 2
(ii) State the energy changes but I = I4 + I6
that occur in the bulb. and I = 2A

Solution
hence
(a) The connections are faulty because; I = I4 + I6
3
• The ammeter is in parallel 2 = I6 + I6
2
à !
yet it should be in series hence 3
it has to burnout or to blow. 2 = + 1 I6
2
Physics; Problems and Solutions 224 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
à !
3 2 = 2 × 3.6 + 1.2 × 4
= + I6
2 2 = 7.2 + 4.8
= 12V
5
2 = I6
2
2 5I6 but this total emf is the sum
=
1 2 of the emfs of each of the 8
⇒ 5I6 = 4 cells.
5I6 4
= If the emf of each cell is x,
5 5 then

4 8x = 12V
I6 = 8x 12
5 =
I6 = 0.8 8 8
3 3 x = 1.5V
I4 = I6 = × 0.8
2 2
= 1.2A
hence the emf of each cell is
1.5V
hence currernt through the
4Ω resistor is 1.2A (c) (i) Let the power consumption of
each bulb be x watts.
(ii) emf
Total emf is equal to the p.d. Total energy used, E is
across 3.6Ω + p.d. across 4Ω E = Power × time
and 6Ω
= x × No. of hours × 2bulbs
E = IR3.6 + I6 R6Ω = x W × 10 × 2 hrs × 2
= 2 × 3.6 + I6 × 6 = 40xW h
= 2 × 3.6 + 0.8 × 6 40x
= × 1000W h
1000
= 7.2 + 4.8 40x
E = 12V = KW h
1000
= 0.04xKW h

OR
A unit costs sh. 60
0.04x unit cost sh. 0.04x × 60
E = V3.6Ω + V4Ω 0.04x unit cost sh.2.4x
E = I × R3.6 + I4 R4 but the total cost or the bill

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 225 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
was sh. 180 (c) Describe the energy changes
hence which occur from the time
an electric bulb is switched
180 = 2.4x on.
2.4x = 180
2.4x 180
= Solution
2.4 2.4
x = 75w
(a) Current versus potential differ-
ence variations.
hence the power consumption
of each of the bulbs is 150Watts. (i) Metal wire
6
(ii) The energy changes that oc-
cur in the bulb are;
electricity energy → heat en- I
ergy in the filament → light
energy
-
49. (a) Sketch the current versus V
p.d variation for (ii) Semiconductor diode
(i) metal wire.
(ii) semi-conductor diode 6

(b)
I = 9A Cell
¾
I
6Ω

3Ω
X Y
2Ω

Fig. 4
-
Fig. 4 shows a cell of neg- V
ligible internal resistance
connected to a system of (b) from the diagram
resistors. Calculate:
(i) let the total resistance of re-
(i) e.m.f of the cell sistors in parallel be R
(ii) the current through the
1 1 1 1
3Ω resistor = + +
R R1 R2 R3
(iii) power dissipation in 1 1 1
the 3Ω resistor. = + +
6 3 2
Physics; Problems and Solutions 226 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY
1+2+3
=
6
6 P = I 2R
=
6 = 32 × 3
R = 1Ω
= 27 watts

Emf of the cell is equal to the

OR
p.d. across the 3 resistors

E = IV
= 9×1 P = VI
= 9V = 9×3
= 27 watts

(ii) Current through the 3Ω re-

sistor (c) The electric energy is changed to
The pd across 3Ω is equal to heat energy in the filament which
the p.d. across the whole par- then is changed to light energy
allel connection that comes from the bulb.

I3Ω R3Ω = 9V 50. The graph in figure 4.2 on page 230

I ×3 = 9 shows the variation of current
through a tungsten filament
3I = 9
9 with the p.d. across it.
I =
3 (i)Draw a suitable circuit di-
I = 3 Amperes
agram to show how the re-
sults in the graph can be
obtained.
(iii) Power dissipation in the 3Ω
(ii) State what happens to the
resistance of the filament
V2 as the current increases.
P =
R
(iii) Using the graph, deter-
92
= mine the resistance of the
3
= 27 watts filament when the current
is 0.7A

OR Solution

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 227 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
(i) . 1
=
slope
1
=
0.0706
= 14.167Ω

¶³
A Device
µ´

¶³
V
µ´

Where the current is registered

by the ammeter A and the volt-
age or potential difference is reg-
istered by the voltmeter V.
(ii) as the current increases the re-
sistance of the filament also in-
creases but tends to a constant
value. This is observed when you
measure the resistance at vari-
ous points on the graph.
(iii) when current is 0.7A, we draw
a tangent at that point on the
curve where I = 0.7A and then
get the slope. at I = 0.7A
¯ ¯
¯ ∆I ¯
¯ ¯
slope = ¯
¯ ∆V
¯
¯
at I=0.7A
1.54 − 1.06
=
10.8 − 4
0.48
=
6.8
= 0.0706AV −1

But Resistance, R
∆V
R, =
∆I
Physics; Problems and Solutions 228 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY

A GRAPH OF V AGAINST I
2

1.9

1.8

1.7

1.6
V/v

1.5

1.4

1.3

1.2

1.1
0 1 2 3 4 5
I/A

Figure 4.1: Graph of Voltage versus current

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 229 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.3. CURRENT ELECTRICITY CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM

1.6

1.4

1.2

1
Current (A)

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
P.d (Volts)

Figure 4.2: Graph of Current against Voltage

Physics; Problems and Solutions 230 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.4. MAGNETISM
4.4 Magnetism C. (i) and (ii) only
D. (i), (ii) and (iii). C
Section A (Objectives)
3.

1. Four bars of metal P, Q, R, S are

tested for magnetism Q attracts 6 6
K¸
both P and R but not S. S does 6 Y* 6

not attract P, Q or R. P and R ª 1 R

sometimes attract one another and 3 4

sometimes repel each other. Which µ 2 I
of the following statement is cor- 6 s + 6
6 6
rect about P, Q, R and S/ ¸ K

Fig.2
A. P, Q, R are magnet., S is mag-
netic.
Fig. 2 shows the superposition
B. P and Q are magnets. R and of the earth’s magnetic field and
S magnetic. the field due to a magnet. Iden-
C. P and R are magnets. Q is tify point marked 1,2,3 and 4.
magnetic, S is non magnetic.
1 2 3 4
D. P and R are magnets. Q and A.
B.
S pole
N pole
N pole
S pole
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
S are non-magnetic. C C. Neutral t Neutral N pole S pole
D. Neutral t Neutral S pole N pole

It is only magnets that can re- B

pel each other, the only sure test
for a magnet hence P and R are 4. Which of the following shows a
magnets. Hence C. piece of material in a magnetized
condition?
2. A magnet can be made to lose its - - ¾
strength by - ?? - ¾
-
- ?? 6 666
(i) Heating A. B.
¾ ¾
(ii) Throwing it violently ? ??? ¾ ¾
¾ ¾
(iii) Putting it in a solenoid car- 6 666 ¾ ¾
rying direct current C. D.

D
A. (i) and (iii) only
B. (ii) and (iii) only 5.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 231 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.4. MAGNETISM CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
7. List two ways by which a magnet
may lose its magnetic properties.
Á o
Á o 1. by heating
P Q

^
^ /
/ 2. by hammering it
3. by using a Solenoid car-
rying alternating cur-
Fig. 9
rent
In fig. 9 above name the polari- 8. .
ties P and Q.
B ¶³
steel
S nails
µ´ N
P Q
A. N pole S pole Fig. 7
B. N pole N pole
C. S pole S pole Fig. 7 shows an iron between
D. S pole Un magne- two opposite magnetic poles.
tized iron
bar. (i) Sketch the magnetic lines of
force on the diagram.
6. Which of the following statements (ii) Explain what happens to the
is not true about magnets? steel nails.
(i)
A. magnetic poles cannot be sep-
arated. ¾
¾
= ¶³
Y
+ steel Y
B. A paramagnetic material is a S ¼N
nails ¼
kµ´
} ¾
material from which a strong ¾
]
Iron ring
magnet can be made.
C. The neutral point in a mag- (ii)Nothing happens to
netic field is a point where them because they are
there is no force experienced. in a space magnetically
D. heating a magnet can reduce screened.
its magnetism. B 9. What is a soft magnetic material?
This is a magnetic material
Section B (Structured) that is easy to magnetize and
demagnetize.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 232 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.4. MAGNETISM
10. State two ways in which a bar (b) (i) to magnetize a steel bar by sin-
magnet can be demagnetized. gle touch method.
1. by heating it • Place the steel bar on a
wooden table and hold it
2. by placing it i a solenoid there firmly
carrying alternating
• Bring a known magnet and
current
stroke it on the steel bar
11. Explain why soft iron is preferred for a few number of times
to steel in making electromagnets as shown below
because
9 S
(i) it is easily magnetized o
strongly
(ii) it is easily demagnetized ?
1
N
Paper II (Essay) N Steel bar S
• The steel bar will be mag-
12. (a) (i) What is a magnetic field?
netized with the poles as
(ii) State the law of mag- shown above now the steel
netism? bar can attract other mag-
(b) (i) Explain with the aid of netic materials.
diagrams, how a steel / y W
wW y M 6̧- R À=
bar can be magnetized s º O
± KN
¼
¾
by the single touch method. 3 S 9N N °° ° N z
S ¾ Y
° W
¸ 6K ² ¸ M o
(ii) Sketch the magnetic (ii)
field pattern around two
bar magnets whose north 13. (i) Describe an experiment to
poles face each other. distinguish between soft
and hard magnetic mate-
Solution rials.
(ii) State one instance in which
(a) (i) a magnetic field is the space each of these materials is
where a magnetic material or used.
magnet experiences a force.
Solution
(ii) the law of magnetism states
that like poles of a magnet (i) An experiment to distinguish soft
repel and unlike poles attract. and hard magnetic materials

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 233 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.4. MAGNETISM CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
• Hold the two materials above B is the hard magnetic ma-
iron nails as shown below; terial because it is not eas-
ily magnetised ( it attracted
A B fewer nails) and not easily de-
magnetised (retained more nails
when the magnet was taken
away).
• Place a magnet on them, One (ii) Hard magnetic materials are used
will attract more nails than in making permanent magnets
the other. and soft magnetic materials are
used in making temporary mag-
Bar magnet
South pole nets like in the core of transform-
ers and to make magnets used in
the electric bell.
A B
14. (a) Explain how a piece of iron
can be magnetized by the
single touch method. Il-
what attracts more nails is lustrate your answer with
the material that is easily mag- a diagram.
netised. (b) How can you determine
the polarity of a magnet?
• Remove the magnet from them
(c) Explain why a magnet looses
its magnetism when placed
A B
in a coil of wire carrying
an alternating current.
(d) Describe the motion of a
beam of electrons directed
The material that remains with midway between the North
more nails is the one that is and South poles of a per-
not easily demagnetised. Hence manent magnet.
A is the soft magnetic mate-
rial because it is easily mag- Solution
netised ( it attracted more nails
(a) To magnetize an iron bar by sin-
with the magnet on it). And
gle touch method.
easily demagnetised ( because
it retained nearly no nails when • Place the iron bar on a wooden
the magnet was taken off). table and hold it there firmly

Physics; Problems and Solutions 234 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.4. MAGNETISM
• Bring a known magnet and (d) The electrons are negatively charged
stroke it on the iron bar for a hence they are considered to be
few number of times as shown like an electric current moving
below in the opposite direction. Since
an electric current in a wire be-
9 S
o
tween the magnets experiences
a force then also these electrons
will be deflected in a direction de-
?
1 termined by Fleming’s left hand
N
rule
N Steel bar S

• The iron bar will be magne- 15. (a) Distinguish between angle
tized with the poles as shown of dip (inclination) and an-
above now the iron bar can gle of declination.
attract other magnetic mate-
rials, i.e. it is magnetised. (b) Draw a diagram to show
the magnetic field pattern
(b)To determine the polarity of a bar
around a bar magnet placed
magnet, just freely suspend it (
in the earth’s magnetic field). It in the earth’s field with the
will rest pointing in the north- north pole of the magnet
pointing to the earth’s mag-
south direction. The side which
netic south.
points in the Geographical north
is the magnetic north pole of the
magnet and that which points in
the geographical south is the south
pole of the magnet. Solution

(c)A coil of wire carrying alternating

current produces an alternating
magnetic field that is a contin- (a)Angle of a dip is the angle made
uously changing magnetic field by the earth’s magnetic field to
hence when a magnet is placed the horizontal while angle of dec-
in the coil it gets magnetised and lination is the angle between the
demagnetised in reverse directions earth’s magnetic meridian and the
continuously and as a result of geographical meridian.
this, it looses its magnetism i.e
the magnetic domains are made
to point in random directions. (b)

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 235 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
(iv)The coil will come to rest with
PQ at right angles to mag-
M M ¸
6
] º ¸ N
netic field.
¼ j 6
=N~
6 A. (i), (ii) and (iii).
^ ® 6
w S À
B. (i) and (iii) only
± ¸ O K C. (ii) and (iv) only.
º M
6
D. (iv) only. B

2. .

4.5 Magnetic effect of I Wire

# ½
# ½
Section A (Objectives) # = ½
S
N I

DD
Fig. 5
1.
X
When a current, 1, flows through
S ¾ R
¡¡
¡ ¡¡
¡ ¡¡¡ a wire placed in between the
¡¡ ¡
¡ ¡
¡¡¡¡ poles of a U-magnet as shown
¡ I ? S
¡N¡ 6I ¡¡¡ in Fig. 5, the wire will move.
¡¡ ¡¡ ¡¡¡
¡¡¡ ¡ - ¡¡
P Q A. Upwards A
Y
Fig. 6 B. Downwards
C. Towards the south pole
The diagram in fig. 6 shows a
current-carrying coil PQRS piv- D. Towards the north pole
oted about XY between two mag- 3. A moving coil galvanometer
nets. Which of the statements can be used to
are true about the coil? A. Measure a direct current.
(i)The sides PS and QR shall ex- B. Convert alternating cur-
perience force. rent into direct current.
(ii)As seen from X the coil will C. Covert direct current to
rotate anticlockwise. alternating current.
(iii)The force on the coil can be D. Measure the peak value
increased by increasing the of an alternating current.
number of turns A

Physics; Problems and Solutions 236 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I
4. What energy changes take 7. The sensitivity of a moving
place when a switch of the coil galvanometer can be in-
electrical bell is pressed? creased by using
A. Chemical → electrical → A. smaller coil.
kinetic → magnetic → sound B. weaker magnet.
B. Chemical → electrical → C. weaker hairspring.
magnetic → kinetic → sound D. fewer turns of wire on the
C. Chemical → electrical → coil. C
sound 8. The strength of a magnetic
D. Electrical → magnetic → field between the poles of an
sound B electromagnet remain the same
5. Which of these factors affect if the
the magnitude of force on a (i) current in the electromag-
current carrying conductor in net winding is doubled
a magnetic field?
(ii) direction of the current
(i) The direction of current. in the electromagnet wind-
(ii) The amount of current. ing are reversed
(iii) The direction of the mag- (iii) the number of turns are
netic field. halved
(iv) The strength of the mag- A. (i) only
netic field. B. (ii) only
A. (i) and (ii) C. (i) and (ii) only
B. (ii) and (iii) D. (ii) and (iii) only B
C. (i) and (iii) 9 Which of the following factors
D. (ii) and (iv) D affect the strength of an elec-
6. A magnetic material can be tromagnet?
magnetized by (i) Changing magnitude of
(i) stroking with a perma- the current.
nent magnet (ii) Changing direction of the
(ii) using a direct current. current.
(iii) by induction. (iii) Doubling number of turns.
A. (i) only. A. (ii) only.
B. (i) and (ii) only. B. (i) and (ii) only.
C. (ii) and (iii) only. C. (i) and (iii) only.
D. (i), (ii) and (iii). D D. (ii) and (iii) only. C

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 237 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
10. Which of the following will D. carry the coil past its ver-
increase the force on a cur- tical position every half a
rent carrying wire? revolution. A
(i) Using a large current. 12. A moving iron meter
(ii) Using a stronger mag- A. measures only direct cur-
netic field. rent.
(iii) Using a shorter length B. has a permanent magnet.
of wire in the field. C. measures only alternat-
ing current.
(i) only.
D. has the pointer attached
(i) and (ii) only.
to the soft iron. D
(i) and (ii) only.
13. Which one of the following
(iii) and (iii) only. B diagrams represents the cor-
11. The diagram in fig. 6 shows rect magnetic field around a
a simple electric motor. straight wire carrying a cur-
rent?
? ?
­ @ ¡
­ @ ¡
N ­ ² °® @ ¡ UN W
­ S ¸± º O MK
­
? ?
A. B.
Magnet ?
¡ ?
¡
P R ¡ ¡
Q ¡ ¡² ° ® U N W
Fig. 6 O M K¸ ± º

? ?
The coil continues to turn in C. D.
the same direction because the B
commutator Q and brushes 14. Which of the following state-
P and R. ments are correct?
A. reverse current in the coil (i) The particles of magnetic
every half a revolution. materials are tiny magnets.
B. reverse current in the coil (ii) The particles in unmag-
every quarter of a revolu- netised iron arrange them-
tion. selves in closed chains.
C. reverse polarity of the field (iii)The particles in a mag-
produced by the magnet. netic are arranged in open

Physics; Problems and Solutions 238 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I
chains with N pole of one In each of the questions 16
particle against the S pole to 17 one or more of the an-
of its neighbouring parti- swers given may be correct.
cle. Read each question carefully
(iv)Groups of atoms form a and then indicate the correct
magnetic domain. answer A, B, C or D accord-
ing to the following:
A. (i), (ii) and (iii) only.
B. (i), (iii) and (iv) only. A. if 1,2,3 only are correct.
C. (ii) and (iv) only. B. If 1,3 only are correct.
D. (iv) only A C. If 2,4 only are correct.
15. Which one of the following di- D. If 4 only is correct.
agrams shows a correct mag- 16. Which of the following state-
netic field due to a current ments are true about mag-
flowing in a solenoid? nets?
-
1. Magnets always have op-
i
¾ CCCCCC
posite polarities.
9 CC CC CC CC CC CC
2. A magnet can be used as
a compass.
A. 3. Repulsion is the only sure
¾ test for a magnet.
i
4. Magnets attract all met-
¾ CCCCCC
9 CC CC CC CC CC CC als.
¾ A
B. 17. Which of the following state-
- ments is/are correct?

C C C C C C 1- 1. An electromagnet is a tem-
CC CC CC CC CC CC z porary magnet because it
- can be activated and de-
activated.
C.
¾ 2. The strength of the mag-
netic field increases as the
C C C C C C 1- current through a wire de-
CC CC CC CC CC CC z
creases.
¾
3. The strength of an elec-
D. D tromagnetic decreases with

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 239 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
the number of turns around 19. The diagram in fig. 11 shows
the core. a straight wire connected to
4. The magnetic field lines the terminals of a centre zero
form concentric circles about galvanometer.
the conductor. C

Section B (Structured)

18. A bar magnet is placed in the

earth’s magnetic field with its
north pole pointing to the ge- ¶³
ographical west as shown be- S N S N G
µ´
low.
N
6

N S Fig.11

(a) When the wire is moved ver-

(i) On the diagram, draw tically upwards out of the plane
the lines of the resul- of the paper. The galvanome-
tant magnetic field around ter deflects.
the magnet.
(i) In what direction does the
(ii) Mark the neutral point galvanometer deflect?
X.

(ii) Why does the galvanome-

6 O ter deflect?
6
O O

º js (iii) State one way by which

¸7 66
6 N S the deflection of the gal-
Uw 3 Áº
> vanometer can be reversed.
º
7 ¸ º (i) In either direction de-
pending on the direc-
6 6 tion of movement of
(i) 6 6 6 6
the wire in the mag-
(ii) The neutral points are netic field and how the
shown in the diagram galvanometer was con-
above as X nected.
Physics; Problems and Solutions 240 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I
(ii) Because an emf is in- 21. State two ways by which the ef-
duced in the circuit, fect of what was observed in (20)
this creates an induced (i) above can be increased.
current which the gal-
vanometer deflects to By winding more turns of
show. coils on the soft iron ma-
(ii) By moving the wire ver- terial.
tically down wards i.e.
in a direction opposite
22. .
the previous direction.

20. .

l
S µ
N
soft iron
Current carrying conductor
²# k TT
# Fig. 9
#
#
#
#
#
#
iron fillings
J
J
^
fig. 9 shows a straight conduc-
tor carrying current between the
Fig. 11 poles of a permanent magnet. Sketch
on the diagram above the resul-
A coil is wound on a soft iron rod tant magnetic field pattern.
as shown in Fig. 11. Describe
Direction of force
what is observe when the key, K,
6
is ¾ ¾
l
(i) Closed. S Y
+ N
iµ ¼
)
y
The iron nails are at- Current carrying conductor

tracted to the soft iron

rod
23. What is meant by;
(ii) Closed and then again opened

Some iron nails are at- (i) magnetic saturation?

tracted to soft iron on
closing and some fall off (ii) neutral point in a magnetic
on opening. field?

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 241 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
1. magnetic saturation is so that it does not affect the
when a magnet can current passing through the
not be magnetized any device, whose current the
more or it is when all ammeter is measuring
the magnetic domains
of a magnet are fully 26. A milliammeter has an internal
aligned in the same di- resistance of 4Ω and a full scale
rection. deflection of 0.015A. Calculate the
value of the resistor that must
2. A magnetic neutral be connected to the milliameter
point is a point in the so that a maximum current of 5A
magnetic field where a can be measured.
magnetic pole experi- p.d across shunt, Vshunt is
ences no force. equal to p.d. across amme-
ter, Vammeter
24. .
Vshunt = Vammeter
R × (5 − 0.015) = 4 × 0.015
¿ 4 × 0.015
R =
N l
S 4.985
ÁÀ = 0.012Ω

Fig. 11
27. A galvanometer has resistance of
5Ω and a range of 0 − 40mA. Find
the resistance of the resistor which
An iron ring is placed between must be connected in parallel with
two poles of two permanent mag- the galvanometer if a maximum
net as shown in fig. 11. Draw current of 10A is to be measured.
the magnetic field pattern set up By pass current
between the two poles.
= 10A − 40mA
= 10A − 0.04A
j ¿:
- :l- = 9.96A
N 1 z q S
ÁÀq
*
Common p.d

25. Why is an ammeter constructed V = 5 × 0.04

such that it has a low internal = 0.2V
resistance

Physics; Problems and Solutions 242 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I
required resistance N
V 0.2 ¶³
R = = C -
I 9.96 µ´
= 0.02Ω
31. S
28. What is a neutral point in a mag- Describe what happens to the com-
netic field? pass needle, C, as it is moved closer
This is a point in a mag- to the bar magnet along the dot-
netic field where the net ted line shown in Fig. 2.
magnetic field strength The pointer of the com-
in zero or a point where pass goes on deflecting
a magnetic north pole ex- towards the south pole.
periences no magnetism
force.
Paper II (Essay)
29. .
32. (a) With the aid of a diagram
r
m N S
explain, the use of keeper
Fig.8
to store magnets.
(b) (i) Describe using a labeled
The diagram in Fig. 8 shows a diagram how a telephone
straight conductor carrying cur- receiver works.
rent vertically upwards placed near (ii) State two ways by which
a bar magnet. Sketch the mag- the strength of an elec-
netic field pattern around the wire tromagnet can be increased
and the magnet.
i Solution
?À mr OkI N
^ S
: ª
6
U Neutral point (a) Magnetic keepers create a closed
30. What is an electromagnet? loop of magnetic field lines which
An electromagnet is is required to keep the strength
a solemid with a soft of the magnet intact because the
magnetic material in its magnetic domains are kept aligned
middle. When current in one direction or in a closed loop.
passes through it, it The magnetic keepers are used
behaves like a magnet. as shown below.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 243 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
Magnetic keepers
the resultant magnetic force
+ j
· ¡
acting on the diaphragm changes
¾
·
S ¸ N and hence the diaphragm is
6
? pulled towards the poles and
­ -
then released i.e. it is dis-
­ No S ¡
placed by a distance propor-
­ ¡
tional to the magnitude of the
Magnets
current and at a frequency
equal to that of the chang-
(b) (i) how a telephone receiver works;
ing current. As a result the
This is the piece of the tele- diaphragm moves in and out
phone handle that is placed of the permanent magnet’s port
near the ear. It converts elec- setting the surrounding air
tric energy to sound energy into vibration producing sound
like a loud speaker or it con- waves that have the same fre-
verts speech current along the quency as that of the sound
telephone line to sound waves that entered the microphone
in the air. Below is its circuit at the other end.
diagram;
Soft iron pole piece (ii) The strength of an electro-
magnet can be increased by;
Iron
­ diaphragm • Using a coil with more num-
­
W
­
À
­ ber of turns
Current from ª N - Sound
microphone
• Using a soft iron magnetic
o ¸S ± material as its core mate-
permanent ¾ Plastic case rial.
magnet
Coil
33. (a) Explain what happens when
When no current flows, the a magnet is
iron diaphragm is under ten- (i) dipped in iron filings
sional forces (i.e. it is not loose).
(ii) freely suspended in air.
When the varying current from
the microphone (via the am- (b)
plifier) passes through the coils
Magnet P
that acts as an electromag-
net wound around the per-
manent magnet, the tensional
Plastic
forces on the iron diaphragm Pin
Magnet Q

also change. This is because Fig. 3

Physics; Problems and Solutions 244 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I
A powerful magnet Q is placed like poles are close to each
on a soft board. Plastic other and they have to repel
pins are firmly stuck is the so they are repelling keeping
soft board around the mag- P floating above Q.
net. An identical magnet (ii) Plastic pins are used because
P is held in the space sur- plastic is not magnetic oth-
rounded by the pins above erwise if steel pins were used
the magnet Q. When the they would get magnetized and
magnet P is released it floats affect the magnetic field due
above the magnet Q as shown to the magnet
in fig. 3. (iii) P would rotate and then land
(i) Explain why P floats and rest on Q with unlike poles
above Q. close to each other.
(ii) Why are plastic pins
(c) When a magnet is stroked on a
used instead of steel pins?
steel bar, the magnetic domains
(iii)What would happen to in it are forced to align in the di-
magnet P if all the pins rection of the magnetic field from
were removed at the same the magnet, they do so and re-
time? main in that direction hence the
(c)Explain in terms of the do- steel bar gets magnetized.
main theory how a steel
34. (a) Draw the magnetic field pat-
bar gets magnetized by stroking.
tern due to an electric cur-
rent in:
Solution
(i) a circular coil
(a) (i) when a magnet is dipped in (ii) a solenoid.
iron filling it attracts them (b) With the aid of a labeled
with most of them concentrated diagram, describe briefly
at two points which are the the action of an electric
poles of the magnet. bell.
(ii) when a magnet is freely sus- (c) What is meant by the fol-
pended in air, it rests point- lowing:
ing in the north-south direc- (i) magnetic meridian
tion due to the earth’s mag- (ii) neutral point in a mag-
netic field. netic field?
(b) (i) P floats on Q because it has (d) Describe briefly how a steel
been arranged such that the bar may be magnetized.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 245 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
Solution This breaks the circuit at the con-
tact screw and current stops flow-
(a) Magnetic field pattern due to an ing, the electromagnet is demag-
electric current in netized as the hammer hits the
gong and sound is produced. The
(i) a circular coil
Current out of the paper
springy metal strip pulls the ar-
º· mature back touching the contact
q°
j
e screw completing the circuit, re-
~ ¹¸ >
z 1 peating the cycle, the hammer hits
:
º·
q the gong continuously at a fre-
~
> e
j
k
quency determined by the strength
¹¸
Current into the paper or tension in the springy metal.
(ii) a solenoid (c) (i) Magnetic meridian is the plane
¾ containing the magnetic axis
of a freely suspended mag-
¾
² net.
® O
K RRRRRRRR ¸ ¸ 3 (ii) neutral point in a magnetic
S k-
+
® N N N N N N N
-
U U s
N field is a point in the mag-
K
O ¾ ?² netic field where a magnetic
6 material or a magnetic pole
¾
does not experiences a mag-
(b) the circuit below is of an electric netic force.
bell (d) a steel bar can be magnetic by
battery or cells
switch positioning it at the centre of a
¾
- ? springy metal strip solenoid and connecting the ter-
UUUUU 6 = 6 minals of the solenoid to a direct
O }
current source as shown below;
? ± ]]]] ] contact screw
soft-iron armature Steel bar
6 y clapper
electromagnet¿ solenoid coils
w®hammer
Gong : °
ÁÀ
A
?W W W W W W W B
?
when the switch is closed the elec-
6
tric circuit becomes complete and k

current flows as indicated in the 7 o

Switch
Battery
diagram the electromagnet becomes
magnetized and attracts the soft close the switch and then open
iron armature. it. On testing the steel bar it at-

Physics; Problems and Solutions 246 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I
tracted the small pieces of iron Construction A moving coil loud
hence it has been magnetised. speaker is a device for convert-
ing electrical energy to sound en-
35. (a) State any two factors which
ergy. It is commonly used in ra-
determine the magnitude
dio receivers, record players, e.t.c.
of a force exerted on a cur-
It works by the principle of a force
rent carrying conductor.
exerted on a current carrying coil
(b) With the aid of a well-labelled situated in a magnetic field.
diagram, describe the struc-
Varying electric current which cor-
ture and mode of action
responds (in frequency) with the
of a moving coil loud speaker.
sound to be reproduced, is passed
(c) State the factors which de- through a short cylindrical coil
termine the pitch and loud- called voice coil. This coil is at-
ness of sound produced by tached on a paper cone that is
a moving coil loudspeaker. free to move in the radial mag-
(d) A D.C motor has an arma- netic field set up by a permanent
ture resistance of 4Ω . If pot-magnet.
it draws a current of 10A
when connected to a sup-
ply of 200V. Calculate the
(i) power wasted in the wind- Paper diaphragm
ings. Pot
Magnet : S
(ii) Efficiency of the mo- bbbbbb
6
tor. flexible N R
smal wire
bbbbbb
Solution R
K
to S
Amplifier
coils in a magnetic field
(a) factors are;
• The magnitude of current pass-
ing though it
• The strength of the magnetic
field This magnet produces a radial
magnetic field that cuts through
• The length of the conductor
the turns of the coil at right an-
in the magnetic field
gles, and consequently as the cur-
(b) structure and mode of operation rent passing through the coil varies,
of a moving coil loudspeaker. it will move to and fro in accor-

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 247 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.5. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF I CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
dance to Fleming’s left hand rule. 200 = Eb + 10 × 4
The coil is attached to a cone made 200 = Eb + 40
of a special material paper which Eb = 160V
moves with the coil and sets the
surrounding air in vibration pro- power delivered by motor is
ducing the suitable sound, hence
Pout = IV
converting a suitably varying cur-
rent to a suitable sound with a = IEb
frequency numerically equal to = 10 × 160
that of the original sound. = 1600W
power supplies to motor is
(c) pitch is determined by the fre-
Pin = IE
quency of the alternating signal
set to the loudspeaker and loud- = 10 × 200
ness is determined by the mag- = 2000W
nitude or amplitude of the cur-
The efficiency, E, is
rent passing through the loud-
speaker. Pout
E = × 100%
Pin
(d) For the d.c motor 1600W
= × 100%
R = 4Ω 2000W
= 80%
I = 10A whenV = 200V
(i) Power wasted in the wind- 36.
ings (a)
P = I 2R ¤
Q P
= 102 × 4 ¤

= 400W
(ii) Efficiency of the motor, is equal
to the ratio Power given out by the motor
Power supplied to the motor Fig. 3
Supplied Emf, E is equal to
the sum of back emf Eb and Fig. 3 shows how a magnetic
the P.d across the resistance material can be magnetized
coil , IR by electrical method.
(i) Indicate the direction of
E = Eb + IR current in the coil.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 248 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM
(ii) Name the polarities P and 3 hours if one unit of electricity
Q. costs Shs 70.
(b) Describe how you can deter- A. Shs 105
mine the polarity of a mag- B. Shs 175
net.
C. Shs 420
Solution D. Shs 525. D

(a) (i) direction of current is

Q º º ¤¤6
º :
N NN P P = 2kW + 500W
6
? = 2.5kW
¾ ¾ E = P t = 2.5kw × 3hr
Fig. 3 = 7.5kwh
(ii) Both P and Q are North poles cost = 7.5kwh × 70
= sh.525
(b) How to determine the polarity of
a magnet
• get the bar magnet 2. An electric bulb has a resistance
• freely suspend it on a thin of 960Ω. Find the electrical power
thread in air expended when connected across
• it will point in the Geograph- a 240 V supply.
ical north – south direction 960
A. 240×240
• the side that points in the north C. 960
240
is the north pole and that which
B. 240
960
points in the south is the south
pole. D. 240×240
960 D

V2
4.6 Electromagnetism P =
R
240 × 240
Section A (Objectives) =
960
3. The direction of induced current
1. Two appliance are rated 240 V, 2kW in a conductor moving in a mag-
and 240 V, 500 W. Find the cost netic field can be predicted by ap-
of running these appliances for plying

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 249 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
A. Faraday’s law A. total energy consumed by the
B. Maxwell’s screw rule lamp.

C. Fleming’s left hand rule B. Rate at which energy is con-

sumed.
D. Fleming’s right hand rule D
C. Total current flowing through
4. Power loss due to eddy currents the lamp. B
in the core of a transformer can D. Potential difference across the
be minimized by lamp.
A. laminating the core. 7. Which of the following is true about
B. using thick copper wires in both alternating current and di-
the windings. rect current?
C. Using a soft iron core (i) cause heating.
D. winding the secondary coil on (ii) can be stepped up or down
top of the primary coil. A with transformer.

5. A current of 10A flows through (iii) can be used to charge a bat-

an electric heater for 1 h. If 7.2 x tery.
106 J of electrical energy is con- A. (i) only.
verted to heat. Find the p.d. across
B. (i) and (ii).
the heater.
C. (ii) and (iii).
2
A. 2.0 × 10 V
D. (i), (ii), (iii). A
3
B. 2.0 × 10 V.
8. A transformer connected to 240V
C. 1.2 × 104 V.
a.c mains is used to light a 12V
D. 7.2 × 105 V. A 36w lamp. What current does
the lamp draw?
A. 20.0 A
E = V It
E B. 6.7 A
V =
It C. 3.0 A
7.2 × 106
= D. 0.33 A C
10 × 3600
= 200 = 2.0 × 102
P = IV
6. An electric lamp is marked 120W, P
240 V. What does 120W mean? I =
V
Physics; Problems and Solutions 250 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM
36 11. A 240V mains transformer has
=
12 1000 turns in the primary. The
= 3 number of turns in the secondary
if it is used to supply a “12V, 24W”
9. A bulb is rated 40V, 60W. Find its lamp is
resistance.
A. 2.0 × 104
A. 0.25Ω
B. 500.
B. 410Ω
C. 50.
C. 120Ω D. 20 C
D. 960Ω No Correct option

V1 N1
=
V2 V2 N2
P = V2
R N2 = × N1
V2 V1
R = 12
P = × 1000
402 240
= = 50
60
1600
= 12.
60
= 26.67Ω
-

10. A current of 2A flows through a X Y

coil of resistance 3Ω for one minute.
How much energy is converted
Gº·
into heat?
µ
¡
¡
¹¸
A. 6J. Fig. 1
B. 12J.
Fig. 1 shows a coil connected to
C. 360J. a centre zero galvanometer, G.
D. 720J. D The poles produced at the ends
X and Y of the coil when the North
pole of a magnet approaches it,
is
E = I 2 Rt
= 22 × 3 × 60 A. X - North pole Y - South pole
= 720 B. X - South pole Y - North pole

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 251 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
C. X - North pole Y - North pole V2
= t
D. X - South pole Y - South pole R
2002
= × 4hrs
A 10
= 16000wh
13. The device which disconnects
= 16kwh
the mains when there is a sud-
den increase in voltage is Cost = 16 × 35
= 560.
A. fuse
B. switch 16. The induced current in a gener-
ator
C. earth wire
D. circuit breaker D A. is a maximum when the coil
is vertical.
14. When transmitting electrical power B. is a minimum when the coil
over long distances, the voltage is horizontal.
is stepped up in order to
C. changes direction when the
A. transmit it. coil is horizontal.
B. reduce power loss. D. increases when the speed of
C. Increase current for transmis- rotation increases. D
sion. 17. How many kilowatt hours are
D. Prevent electric shocks B used to run

15. An electric heater is connected (i) 8KW cooker for 1 hour

to a 200V supply. The heating (ii) 3KW immersion heater for
element has a resistance of 10Ω. 40 min
The cost of using the heater for 4 (iii) 960W hair drier for 20 min?
hours if each unit of energy costs
Sh. 35 is A. 10.32kwh
A. Sh. 5600. B. 147.20kwh
B. Sh. 1400. C. 768.00kwh
C. Sh. 560 D. 971.00kwh A

D. Sh. 140. C Total energy, E, in wh is

40 20
E = 8k · 1 + 3k · + 960 ·
60 60
E = Pt E = (8k + 2k + 320)hr

Physics; Problems and Solutions 252 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM
E = (8k + 2k + 0.32k)hr 20. In fig. 6, when switch K is closed,
E = 10.32ki.e10.32kwh the two soft iron cores will
DDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
18. When a 240 V supply is con- DDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
nected across an electrical appli- k
ance, a current of 200 mA flows switch
in the circuit. What is the elec- 9V 9V
Fig. 6
trical power supplied to the ap-
pliance? A. Repel each other all the time.
A. 1.2W B. Attract each other all the time.
B. 48.0W C. Attract each other for just a
C. 48000.0W brief moment.
D. 120000.0W B D. Have no force of attraction or
repulsion between them. B

21. For safety in a house, a fuse and

P = IV a switch are connected to
= 200 × 10−3 × 240 Fuse Switch
A. Live wire Neutral wire
= 48. B. Neutral wire Earth wire
C. Live wire Live wire
19. The arrangement in fig. 1 is D. Earth wire Neutral wire A
used to produce an e.m.f. What
causes the e.m.f. 22. A rectifier is used to
Coil A. step up an a.c voltage.
N S
B. Amplify an a.c current.
Magnet
C. Change an a.c voltage to a.d.c.
²¯
M
voltage
±°
Fig. 1 D. Change a.d.c. voltage to an
a.c. voltage. C
A. The attraction between the
coil and the magnet. 23. A transformer is used to step
B. The magnetic field outside the down an alternating voltage from
coil. 240V to 12V. calculate the num-
ber of turns on the secondary coil
C. The magnet placed close to
if the primary coil has 1200 turns.
the coil.
D. The variation of magnetic field A. 3.
lines linking the coil. D B. 5

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 253 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
C. 60 C D
D. 100. 25. Which of the following statements
Np Ns are true about electric wiring?
=
Vp Vs (i) The fuse is always connected
Np Vs into the live wire leading to
Ns =
Vp a circuit.
1200 × 12
= (ii) The fuse is connected into
240
= 60 the neutral wire leading to a
circuit.
24. Which of the following graphs
(iii) When a fault develops in the
represents the output voltage from
circuit, it is the neutral wire
a d.c. dynamo?
which has to be disconnected.
6
A. (i) only

V B. (iii) only.
C. (i) and (ii) only.
-
D. (i), (ii) and (iii). A
A. t
6
26. An alternating current can be
changed to direct current by a
V A. transformer.
-
B. moving coil galvanometer.
B. t C. dynamo.
6
D. diode. D

V This process is called rectifica-

tion, it can be done by either 1
-
diode, 2 diodes or 4 diodes
C. t 27.
6

S N
V ±
º·
) µ
¡
¡
- ¹¸
D. t Fig. 8

Physics; Problems and Solutions 254 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM
A bar magnet is moved near a A. Sh. 1.44
coil as shown in fig. 8. which of B. Sh. 21.60
the following ways can be used
C. Sh. 960
to increase the size of the induced
e.m.f. in the coil? D. Sh. 1296 B

(i) Using a stronger magnet.

(ii) Moving the magnet at a higher E = P t = V It
speed. 40
= 240 × 15 × × wh
60
(iii) Reducing the number of turns = 2400wh
in the soil.
= 2.4Kwh
A. (i) and (ii) only. Cost = 2.4 × 9
B. (i) and (iii) only. = 21.6
C. (ii) and (iii) 30. A transformer cannot function
D. (i), (ii) and (iii). A normally with d.c. because a.d.c..
28. The transformer cores are lami- A. has extremely high heating
nated to effect.
A. reduce eddy currents. B. reduces the efficiency of the
transformer.
B. decrease the resistance of the
coils. C. cannot produce a changing mag-
netic field. C
C. determine the energy lost by
D. cannot provide high voltage
the transformer.
required for power transmis-
D. distribute the voltage output sion.
equally within the transformer.
31. .
. A
Diode
The laminations increase resis- ©©
HH
tance hence reducing the current ²¯ ²¯
a.c. Oscilloscope
in them, the eddy currents. S
±° Resistor ±°
Supply

29. An electric heater which oper- ©©

HH
ates from 240V mains draws 15A Diode
Fig. 1
for 40 minutes. Calculate the cost
of electricity, given that electric- In the circuit in fig. 1, what is
ity costs Sh. 9.00 per kilo watt observed on the oscilloscope when
hour. the time base is on?

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 255 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
¾» ¾»
C. Step-up step-down
A. ½¼ B. ½¼
¾» ¾» D. Step-down step-up C
u
C. ½¼ D. ½¼ Section B (Structured)
A
34. .
32. A transformer has twice as many
turns in the secondary coil as in
the primary coil. The a.c. input
to the primary is 4V.
Voltage (V)
Find the output. 340 6

A. 2V
B. 4V 0 0.01 0.02 0.04
-
0.03
C. 8V t(s)

D. 16V C
-340 Fig.11

Vs Ns The graph in fig. 11 shows the

= =2 variation of an a.c. with time.
Vp Np
Vs = 2×Vp Find;
= 2×4 (i) the peak value.
= 8 (ii) the frequency
33. Fig. 5 shows a transmission line (i) 340V
from a power station to a con-
sumer several kilometers a way. (ii) T = 0.02s, f = 1
= 1
=
T 0.02
several
km
50Hz
P ©
!©
!
% %
% %%
¶
¶
¶
¶ Q 35.
% consumer
Power station
Fig. 5 (a) What is a transformer?
a transformer are two or
Which one of the following is the more coils close to each
correct type of transformers at P other that work by mutual
and Q? induction or a transformer
are two coils such that when
A. Step-up step-up
current in one changes, an
B. Step-down step-down emf is induced in the other.
Physics; Problems and Solutions 256 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.
CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM
36. A transformer whose efficiency is In a.c generators, slip
80% has an output of 12W. calcu- rings are used while in dc
late the input current if the in- generators , split rings or
put voltage is 240V. commutators are used.
40. A 240V, 600W water heater is used
80% of input = output to boil water for 5 minutes.
80
× I × 240 = 12 (a) By what means does heat spread
100
12 × 100 through the water?
I =
80 × 240 By convection and con-
= 0.0625
duction
37. Explain briefly why bulbs in a build- (b) Calculate
ing are connected in parallel. (i) the current that flows in
• to ensure that the same the heater.
voltage can be supplied (ii) the electrical energy con-
to all bulbs verted into heat.

• to make sure that if (i) Current

one bulb blows or stops from P = IV
working, it does not P
affect the other bulbs I =
V
(they remain lighting) 600W
=
240V
38. State any two factors which de- = 2.5A
termine the magnitude of the e.m.f
induced in a coil rotating in a mag- (ii) the electrical energy,
netic field. E

(i) the speed of rotation E = Pt

(ii) the magnitude of the = V It
magnetic field = 240 × 2.5 × (5 × 60)
= 180000
(iii) length of the conductor
= 180KJ
in the magnetic field.

39. State two differences between a.c. 41. State one advantage of a.c over
and d.c. generators. d.c. in a mains supply.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 257 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
a.c can be stepped up and (i) State what is observed
down by the transformer un- when the N-pole of a bar
like d.c magnet is moved towards
the cable.
42. Explain briefly how a calculator
which operates on a 6.0V d.c can (ii) State two ways in which
draw power from a 240V mains the effect observed in
supply. (a) (i) can be increased.

By connecting a high re- (b) (i) With the aid of a labeled

sistance in series with diagram described how
the calculator so that the a simple a.c. general
sum of the p.d across it works.
and 6V is equal to 240V (ii) Sketch the variation of
the voltage from an a.c.
43. State three advantages of an al- generator and use it to
ternating current over a direct define the terms peak
current in power transmission. value and period.
• It can be stepped up (c) With the aid of a labelled
or down diagram, describe how full
• The ac generator wave rectification can be
is easy to construct obtained using four diodes.
compared with the
dc generator that re- Solution
quires accumulator.
(a) (i) the galvanometer deflects as
• It is not easy to use the magnet experiences an op-
a low voltage device posing force
on an ac mains than
(ii) this effect (of deflection) can
on adc mains.
be increased by;
Paper II (Essay) • Moving the magnet faster
• Increasing the number of
44. (a) A cable is connected to a turns in the coil and
centre-zero galvanometer, • Using a stronger magnet.
as shown in fig. 1.
+ coil (b) (i) How the simple ac generator
N S works.
A simple ac generator consists
Gl of a rectangular coil of wire
Fig. 1

Physics; Problems and Solutions 258 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM
which is rotated in the mag- produced by the Ac genera-
netic field provided by a per- tor.
manent magnet as shown be- Period is the shortest time
low: through which the Ac volt-
age repeats itself.
rotation
b
(c) The circuit which uses four diodes
N
ss
to rectify Ac is called the bridge
¸*s c
N
ss
s
)
rectifier circuit.
a
s s ®
s
º·
z
slip rings¾»
K
It consist of four diodes connected
¹¸ d
S as shown below;
½¼ s
Brush
1
A
R
©
Y ©© 1 2
D
q C +-
When the coil is rotated, it Input
p RL Output
3 4
cuts the magnetic field lines B
-
-
hence an emf is induced in
the coil a cross ab and dc ac-
cording to Faraday’s law. When an Ac voltage is connected
The direction of the induced to the input the terminals above,
current is determined by Flem- the following happens;
ing’s right hand-rule hence it
is from a, b, c, to d, if the coil • During the positive half cy-
is rotated in the direction shown cle when point A is positive
(ii) The Ac voltage is and B negative, diode 2 con-
ducts and diode 1 is reverse
biased. This makes point D
Period
positive.
¾ -

6
• During the negative half cy-
6
Peak value cle, When point A is nega-
¼
tive, point B is positive. diode
Voltage
? - 4 conducts and diode 3 is re-
Time
- verse biased, this makes point
?
D still positive hence point
D is kept positive and point
Peak value or peak volt- C negative and this is direct
age is the maximum voltage current or voltage.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 259 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
Soft magnetic material
The diagram below show the in-
'U $
put Ac voltage and the rectified
p q
Dc voltage primary N1 N2 secondary
p
circuit circuit
q
45. (a) Describe briefly the struc- & %
ture and action of an a.c
transformer when an alternating current is
(b) (i) State any three causes set into the primary terminals,
of energy losses in a trans- they create a changing magnetic
former field which is linked to the sec-
(ii) How are these losses ondary circuit by the soft mag-
reduced in a practical netic material.
transformer? This changing magnetic field in-
(c) Explain why it is an ad- duces an emf in the secondary
vantage to transmit elec- coil according to Faraday’s law.
trical power at high volt- This induced emf depends on;
age. • The number of turns is the
(d) Electric power is gener- secondary coil and
ated at 11kV. Transform- • The rate of change of the mag-
ers are used to raise the netic flux cutting or linking
voltage to 440kV for trans- to the secondary coil
mission over large distances
using cables. The output (b) (i) Causes of energy losses in a
of the transformers is 19.8MW transformer are
and they are 90% efficient. • Some energy is used to heat
Find the coils in the primary
and secondary circuit.
(i) the input current to the
transformers. • Some energy is used in the
process of magnetization
(ii) the output current of
and demagnetization in the
the cables.
soft magnetic material.
Solution • Not all the magnetic field
produced by the primary
(a) structure and action of a trans- coil is wholly linked to the
former secondary coil.
a transformer is made up of two • Due to the changing mag-
separate coils connected as shown netic field in the conduct-
below ing magnetic core an emf

Physics; Problems and Solutions 260 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM
is induced in the magnetic
core and this creates eddy stepped up voltage, Vs
currents that cause the heat-
ing effect in the magnetic Vs = 440kV
core = 440 × 103 V
(ii) The energy losses above are
reduced by Out put power, Pout
• Using thick wires with low P◦ = 19.8M W
resistance to reduce Joule
= 19.8 × 106 W
heating
• Using a soft magnetic ma-
terial which is easy to mag- Efficiency, E = 90%
netize and to demagnetize
(i) Input current Ip of the trans-
• By winding the primary former
and secondary coils on the from
same magnetic core to en-
sure maximum flux link- Pout = 90% × Pin
age. Pout
=⇒ Pin =
• by using laminated iron- 90%
19.8M W
core to reduce eddy cur- =
0.9
rents = 22M W
(c) At high voltage always current
is low for the same power trans- But Pin = IV = Ip Vp
mission. This is because from P =
IV =constant( same power trans- Ip Vp = 22M W
mitted) when V is large then I 22M W
Ip =
has to decrease or has to be low Vp
22M W
therefore power is transmitted at =
11kV
high voltage to ensure or reduce
22 × 106 W
heat loss due to joule heating since =
11 × 103 V
curent is low (Heat loss = I 2 R.
= 2000Amperes
(d) From the question
Unstepped voltage, Vp (ii) Output current to the cables
Vp = 11kV Pout = Is Vs
= 11 × 103 V

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 261 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
Pout Usually the fluorescent tube con-
Is =
Vs tains mercury vapour.
19.8M W How it works
=
440kV When the current is switched on
19.8 × 106 W by closing the switch, it passes
=
440 × 103 V though the starter and makes the
= 45 Amperes two filaments hot. The starter
breaks the circuit creating a back
46. (a) Describe the structure and
emf by self-induction by the coil
action of a fluorescent tube.
inside it. The electric current now
(b) Give one advantage of a passes through the mercury vapour
fluorescent tube over a fil- which produces ultra-violet radi-
ament lamp. ations. This ultra-violet radia-
(c) Describe the function of: tion strikes the fluorescent pow-
(i) a fuse. der on the inside walls of the tube
(ii) an earth wire. which absorbs the ultraviolet ra-
diation and then produces the vis-
(d) Describe briefly how power
ible light radiation we see.
is transmitted from a power
station to a home. (b) A fluorescent tube changes more
(e) Find the cost of running electric energy to light with an
two 60W lamps for 20 hours efficiency of about 50% compared
if the cost of each unit is to the filament bulb which has
sh.40. an efficiency of about 10%

Solution (c) The function of;

(i) a fuse, is to break the elec-
(a) Structure and action of a fluores- tric circuit in which it is con-
cent tube nected, when the electric cur-
Structure rent exceeds a certain value.
It is made up of two filaments at
the two ends of a gas filled tube (ii) an earth wire is to transfer
connected as shown below the excess charge that might
Glass tube coated inside with a fluorescent powder have accumulated in a device
º ·
to the earth so as to prevent
k mercury vapour µ
¹ ¸ an electric shock.
start switch
filament (d) How power is transmitted from
the power station to the domes-
r r
ac source main switch tic consumer.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 262 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM
Centre zero
• power generated at the power k Galvanometer
station by electromagnetic in-
duction in generators is stepped º·
P Z
ZS
up by step-up transformers G
¹¸
to high voltage (415V) for trans- LL
mission over long distances. Iron ring
Fig. 5
• Near the consumer, in vari-
ous regions or districts, it is The diagram in fig. 5 shows
stepped down to low voltages a model of a transformer
(240V) by step down trans- in which the primary coil,
formers, This low voltage is P is connected to d.c and
less dangerous and can be used the secondary coil, S is con-
by the domestic electric de- nected to a galvanometer.
vices. The stepping up is to (i) What is observed just
ensure low power loss dur- as the switch k is closed?
ing transmission. (ii) What would be the ef-
fect of closing switch k
(e) One electric unit of energy is the very fast in (i) above?
kilowatt hour KWh (iii) What is observed when
For one bulb the switch k is left closed?
(iv) What is observed just
Energy = Power × time as switch k is opened?
= 60W × 20hrs (v) What would be observed
= 1200W h if the d.c source is re-
1200 placed by an a.c source
= kW h
1000 of low frequency?
= 1.2kW h
(c) A transformer of efficiency
But 1Kwh = Sh.40 80% is connected to a 240V
1.2kW h = 1.2 × 40 supply to operate a heater
= Sh.48 of resistance 240Ω. If the
current flowing in the pri-
But this is for one bulb, for two mary circuit is 5A
bulbs the cost is 2×48 = 96 hence (i) Calculate the potential
the required cost is Sh. 96. difference across the heate
(ii) if the transformer is
47. (a) What is a transformer?
cooled by oil of specific
(b) heat capacity 2100Jkg −1 k −1

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 263 Physics; Problems and Solutions

4.6. ELECTROMAGNETISM CHAPTER 4. ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
and the temperature of (i) power out put =80% of power
the oil rises by 20◦ in 3 input
minutes. Find the mass VS2 80
of the oil in the trans- = I P × VP
R 100
former. 80
= · 5 · 240
100
Solution = 960W
(a) A transformer is a device which q

consists of two separate coils wound VS = {960 × R}

on a soft magnetic material such
that when current in one changes, q
according to Faraday’s law, an emf = (960 × 240)
is induced across the ends of the = 480V
other coil.
(i) the galvanometer deflects and (ii) The transformer is 80% ef-
then goes to zero deflection ficient meaning 20% of the
slowly. supplied energy is lost as heat
(ii) effect is a greater deflection in the transformer.
in the galvanometer In terms of power; power loss
(iii) the galvanometer deflection in transformer is equal to 20%
goes back to null or zero de- of the input power, this power
flection. heats the oil hence
(iv) The galvanometer deflects mc∆T
= 20% of Ip VP
again but now in the oppo- t
site direction according to lenzi’s 20
= · 5 · 240
law. 100
= 240
(v) The galvanometer pointer os- t
m = × 240
cillates to and fro about the c ∆T
zero deflection point.
(c) from the question 3 × 60 sec
= × 240
2100 × 20
Efficiency = 80% = 1.0286kg
Vin = 240V
Rs = 240Ω
hence mass of oil in the trans-
IP = 5A
former is 1.0286kg

Physics; Problems and Solutions 264 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

Chapter 5

Modern Physics

Element Neutrons Protons Electrons

Contents P 6 6 6
5.1 Atomic structure . . . . 265 Q 8 6 6
5.2 Cathode rays . . . . . . 267 R 2 2 2
S 2 3 3
5.3 X-rays . . . . . . . . . . . 275
5.4 Radioactivity . . . . . . . 277 The table above shows the struc-
ture of four atoms, P, Q, R and
S. which ones are isotopes of the
same element?
5.1 Atomic structure
A. P and Q
Section A (Objectives) B. Q and R
C. P and S
D. P and R A
1. A nickel nuclide, 60
28 Ni, contains
3. An atom contains 3 electrons. 3
A. 28 protons and 28 neutrons. protons and 4 neutrons. Its nu-
B. 32 Electrons and 28 neutrons cleon number is
C. 28 protons and 32 neutrons A. 3
D. 28 Electrons and 32 protons B. 4
C
C. 6
D. 7 D
Protons = 28
neutrons = 60 − 28
nucleons = protons + neutrons
= 32
= 3+4
2. = 7

265
5.1. ATOMIC STRUCTURE CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
X
4. A possible isotope of 73 Li has ¶³
À
A. 2 protons and 3 neutrons.
Y
B. 2 protons and 4 neutrons. *
=
T ¨¥
C. 3 protons and 4 neutrons. µ´
D. 4 protons and 2 neutrons. C
5. The atomic number of an element
The diagram above shows a thermionic
is the number of
diode. Name the parts labeled.
A. Protons in its atom.
(i) X
B. Neutrons in its atom.
(ii) Y
C. Electrons and protons in its
atom. (i) X - Anode
D. Neutrons and protons in its (ii) Y - Cathode
atom.
9. Describe briefly how electrons are
A made to move across the tube T.
By applying a high voltage
6. Isotopes are nuclides with the same
across X and Y , with X pos-
number of
itive and Y negative the elec-
A. protons but different number trons on the cathode are at-
of electrons. tracted to the anode.
B. protons but different number 10. One isotope of neon is denoted by
of neutrons. 20
10 N e. How many neutrons does
C. neutrons but different num- the isotope have?
ber of protons. 20-10=10 Neutrons
D. electrons and the same num-
11. What is meant by mass number?
ber of neutrons B
Mass number is the num-
Section B (Structured) ber of nucleons in the nu-
cleus of an atom.
7. What is thermionic emission?
Is the emission of electrons Paper II (Essay)
from the metal surface when
heated. 12. Describe a simple model of the
atom
8. .
Solution

Physics; Problems and Solutions 266 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.2. CATHODE RAYS
a simple model of an atom Ultraviolet radiation
An a tom is made up of a nu- Zinc cathode
Vacuum j ¶³
cleus which contain protons and r R
R
A
IRR µ´
neutrons. This nucleus is sur- Á
rounded by electrons moving around
it.
Electrons in their orbit Glass tube Tube
N
er- Fig. 2

¾» When the cathode was irradiated

f
f f ¾ Nucleous
f
with ultraviolet radiations, the
½¼
ammeter gave a reading.
(i) Explain why the ammeter gave
a reading.
The electrons are negatively charged. (ii) A gas was gradually intro-
The protons are positively charged duced into the glass tube. Ex-
and neutrons have no charge. plain what happened.

Solution
13. What is meant by the terms
(i) this is because the electrons
(i) Isotopes, were emitted by photoelectric
(ii) atomic number? effect by the zinc cathode, when
the ultra violet radiations fell
on it. These electrons com-
Solution pleted the circuit and current
had to flow hence the amme-
(i) Isotopes are atoms of an ele- ter gave a reading.
ment having the same atomic (ii) the ammeter reading decreases
number but different mass num- because not all the emitted
bers. electrons would reach the an-
(ii) Atomic number is the num- ode, since some would collide
ber of protons in the nucleus with the molecules of the in-
of an a tom. troduced gas.

14. A zinc cathode was enclosed in

an evacuated glass tube as shown 5.2 Cathode rays
in fig. 2.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 267 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.2. CATHODE RAYS CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
Section A (Objectives) A. X-rays.
B. Gamma rays.

1. How long does it take an alternat- C. Cathode rays.

ing p.d. of peak 10V and frequency D. Alpha particles. C
50Hz to make one cycle?
4. The process by which electrons
A. 0.02 s. are emitted from the surface of
B. 0.20s. a metal by application of heat is
known as
C. 5.00s.
A. photoelectric emission.
D. 500.00s A
B. electromagnetic emission.
C. thermionic emission.
1 1
T = = = 0.02s D. hear emission. C
f 50
5. Which of the following parts of
the cathode ray tube form the elec-
2.
tron gun?
+
- A. cathode, metal anode, heater,
Electron beam - grid.
Fig. 7 B. grid, metal anode, cathode,
Y-plates.
Fig. 7 shows a beam of electrons
incident mid way between two charged C. cathode, grid, heater, X-plates.
metal plates. Which of the fol- D. cathode, metal anode, grid,
lowing is correct? The beam heater, X-plates. A
A. is deflected towards the pos- 6.
¾»
itive plate. ¾ -
¾»
6
B. Is deflected towards the neg- A. ½¼
B. ½¼
?
ative plate. ¾» ¾»

C. Moves perpendicular to the C. ½¼ D. ½¼

plates.
Which one of the sketches above
D. Passes through the plates un-
represents the wave form observed
deflected. A
in a C.R.O connected across an
3. Streams of electrons moving at A.C. supply when the time-base
high speed are called of the C.R.O is on? C

Physics; Problems and Solutions 268 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.2. CATHODE RAYS
7. The phenomenon by which elec- D. (i), (ii) and (iii) C
trons are released from a metal
surface when radiation falls on 11. Which of the following are prop-
it is known as erties of Cathode rays?

A. radio activity. (i) They travel in straight lines

B. photoelectric effect. (ii) They can penetrate a thick

sheet of paper.
C. thermion emission.
(iii)They darken a photographic
D. reflection. B plate.
8. The brightness of the spot on a (iv)They are deflected by a mag-
C.R.O. screen is controlled by netic field.

A. X-plates. A. (i), (iii) and (iv) only.

B. Anode B. (i), (ii) and (iv) only.
C. grid. C. (i), (ii) and (iii) only.
D. cathode. B D. (iv) only A

9. The brightness on the screen of a 12. The cathode ray oscilloscope may
T.V set is determined by be used to

A. darkness in the room. (i) measure energy.

B. the size of the screen. (ii) measure potential difference.
C. the number of electrons reach- (iii) display wave forms.
ing the screen. A. (i) only.
D. the direction of the aerial. C B. (i) and (ii) only.
10. Which of the following are prop- C. (ii) and (iii) only.
erties of cathode rays? D. (i), (ii) and (iii) C
(i) they are electrically neutral 13. Which of the following repre-
(ii) they travel in straight lines sents an appearance on the screen
(iii) they are deflected by mag- of a cathode ray oscilloscope when
netic fields a d.c. voltage is connected across
the X-plates with the time-base
A. (i) and (ii) only switched on?
#Ã #Ã
B. (i) and (iii) only
C. (ii) and (iii) only A. "! B. "!

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 269 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.2. CATHODE RAYS CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS

w
Electron gun

C. B D. B

14. Deflection system

C
r
Fluorescent screen

(a) (b)
16. State the function of the part la-
Fig. 3
belled B
Fig. 3 (a) shows a spot on the To deflect the electron
screen of a cathode ray oscillo- beam vertically or hori-
scope. The spot can be turned zontally.
into a horizontal straight line as
shown in fig. 3 (b) by 17. .
A. Switching off the time base.
B. Switching on the time base.
C. Making one of the plates pos-
³
©
itive
ª
´ µ
D. Connecting an a.c voltage to T
the y-plates. B P Q R
Fig.11

Section B (Structured)
Fig. 11 shows the main parts of
15. . a cathode ray oscilloscope.

B
A (i) Name the parts labeled P, Q,
R and T.
C> P - Cathode
Fig. 12
Q - Anode
Fig. 12 shows the main features
R - Deflection plates
of a cathode ray oscilloscope (C.R.O).
Name the parts labelled A,B and T - Fluorescent screen
C (ii) State the functions of parts
A labeled Q and T

Physics; Problems and Solutions 270 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.2. CATHODE RAYS
Q - to focus the electron (b) With reference to the cath-
beam on the screen ode ray oscilloscope, de-
as a small spot. scribe
(i) the function of the time-
T - to show the point
base
where the electron
beam hits the screen (ii) how the brightness is
by fluorescence i.e regulated.
producing light at (c) A cathode ray oscilloscope
that spot. (C.R.O) with time-base switch
on is connected across a
Paper II (Essay) power supply. The wave-
form shown in Fig. 3 is
18. Fig. 1 shows the main parts obtained.
of a cathode ray oscilloscope.
Identify the parts labeled U.V
and X and briefly describe their
functions.
U V
A
B
±
b b
µ
X
Fig. 3
Fig. 1 Distance between each line
is 1cm.
Solution
(i) Identify the type of volt-
• U - electron gun age generated by the power
• V - deflection plates or deflec- supply.
tion system (ii) Find the amplitude of
• X - fluorescent screen the voltage generated
if the voltage gain is 5V cm−1
19. (a) (i) What is meant by cath- (iii) Calculate the frequency
ode rays? of the power source if
(ii) With the aid of a la- the time-base setting on
beled diagram, describe the C.R.O is 5.0 × 10−3 s
how cathode rays are cm−1 .
produced by thermionic
effect. Solution

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 271 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.2. CATHODE RAYS CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
(a) (i) Cathode rays are high speed so as to display the wave pat-
electrons tern of the voltage signal ap-
(ii) how cathode rays are produced plied to the y-plates.
by thermionic emission. (ii) the brightness is regulated
• Coat a metal filament with by increasing or decreasing
a certain metal oxide the anode voltage or filament
• Place it in an evacuated current.
tube with an anode ter- (c) (i) the type of voltage generated
minal at the other end as is an alternating voltage
shown below
(ii) the voltage gain is 5V cm−1 ,
it means that the bright spot
on the screen of the C.R.O can
be deflected vertically through
1cm by a voltage of 5V ap-
Cathode Filament vacuum
' Anode
$ plied to the y plates.
s ¨¥ +
¾ ª ? for the wave below the am-
¾
&
§¦
%
plitude is as shown.
- +r
q
Very High Voltage
? Amplitude
To ac voltage source
6
• When the filament is heated 6
°
by the low voltage Ac sup-
ply, it produces electrons ? -
by thermionic emission,
• When a high voltage dc
supply is connected across
the filament and the an- From the given graph
ode, the emitted electrons
(electron cloud) are attracted Amplitude = 2cm
to the anode at high speed
but 1cm is deflected by 5V
and these high speed elec-
2cm are deflected by 5 × 2V
trons are the cathode rays.
2cm are deflected by 10V
(b) About the cathode ray oscilloscope; hence the amplitude of the
(i) the function of the time-base voltage generated is 10V.
is to sweep the bright spot (iii) The time-base setting of 5.0×
(electron beam) horizontally 10−3 scm−1 means that it takes

Physics; Problems and Solutions 272 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.2. CATHODE RAYS
5.0×10−3 seconds for the time (a) (i) thermionic emission is the
base circuit to deflect the spot emission of electrons from a
horizontally through a distance metal surface when it is heated
of 1cm. (ii) Photoelectric effect is the
For the given waveform the emission of electrons from a
wave-length is 4cm and a wave- metal surface when it is ir-
length is the distance moved radiated with a suitable radiatio
by the wave in a period. i.e. a radiation with a fre-
Since 1cm is deflected in 5.0× quency above the cut-off fre-
10−3 seconds quency of the metal surface.
4cm are deflected in 4 × 5.0 ×
10−3 seconds (b) Photo-electric effect occurs if; The
4cm are deflected in 2.0×10−2 radiation has a frequency more
seconds than the cut-off frequency of the
metal surface.
since 4cm is the wave length,
then the period T of the wave 21. (a) .
is 2.0 × 10−2 second
but f = T1 A
º
a a
1 7
f = C
T M ±
1
= B
2.0 × 10−2 Fig. 5
= 50Hz The diagram in fig. 5 shows
hence the frequency of the volt- the main parts of a cath-
age is 50Hz. ode ray oscilloscope (C.R.O)
(i) Name the parts labeled
20. (a) What is meant by the fol-
A, B and C.
lowing:
(ii) Why is the C.R.O evac-
(i)thermionic emission, uated?
(ii) photo-electric effect (b) (i) Describe briefly the prin-
ciples of operation of
(b) State the conditions nec-
C.R.O
essary for photo electric
(ii) How is the bright spot
effect to take place.
formed on the screen?
Solution (c) Use the diagrams to show

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 273 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.2. CATHODE RAYS CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
what is observed on the • The moving electrons are
screen of a C.R.O when deflected, by the electric
(i) the C.R.O is switched fields between the deflec-
on and no signal is ap- tion plates.
plied to the Y-plates. • When the elections hit the
(ii) the time-base is switched screen, the fluorescent ma-
on and no signal is ap- terial on it emits visible
plied to the Y-plates light which enables one to
see the electron beam as
(iii) an alternating signal
a brigh spot.
is applied to the Y-plates
while the time-base is (ii) the bright spot is formed by
switched off. the electrons which hit the
(d) Give two uses of the C.R.O. fluorescent material that gives
out the visible light seen as a
bright spot, if the time base
Solution
is off.
(a) the parts of the C.R.O. (c) (i) C.R.O on, no signal on the y-
plates
(i)

A is electron gun
B are deflection plates
C is the fluorescent screen

(ii)C.R.O. is evacuated to reduce

the collisions the elections (cath- we see a horizontal bright line
ode rays) would make with
OR
the air molecules.
(b) (i) Principle of operation of a C.R.O.
is x

• electrons are produced by

thermionic emission by the
hot filament and acceler-
ated to a certain speed by a bright spot
the High voltage, the Ex- (ii) time base on, no signal on
tra High Tension (E.H.T). the y-plates, we see

Physics; Problems and Solutions 274 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.3. X-RAYS
(iv)travel in straight lines.

A. (i), (ii) and (iv) only.

B. (i), (ii) and (iii) only.
C. (ii), (iii) and (iv) only.
a horizontal bright line
D. (i), (iii) and (iv) only. D
(iii) Ac on the y-plates and time
base off 2. X-rays are

A. electrons of high velocity.

B. particles of negative charge.
C. neutrons of high velocity.
D. electromagnetic waves. D
we see a vertical bright line
3. The difference between hard and
(d) uses of the C.R.O are; soft X-rays is that
• to measure frequency of sig- A. hard x-rays travel faster than
nals soft x-rays.
• to measure Ac and Dc volt- B. hard x-rays penetrate more
ages than soft x-rays.
• to measure very short inter- C. hard x-rays are less danger-
vals of time. ous than soft x-rays.
D. soft x-rays are produced at
high potential differences. B
5.3 X-rays
Section B (Structured)
Section A (Objectives)
4. State two differences between cath-
ode rays and x-rays.
1. Which of the following are prop-
erties of X-rays? they 1. Cathode rays are nega-
tively charged yet x-rays
(i) carry no change. are not charged.
(ii) are longitudinal waves. 2. Cathode rays can not be
(iii) are not deflected by the mag- reflected but x-rays can
netic and electric fields. be reflected.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 275 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.3. X-RAYS CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
5. In the production of x-rays in an electric energy in the power
x-ray tube, why must the target supply
be cooled?
↓
To conduct away the heat
generated by the cathode heat energy at hot cathode or
rays filament

Paper II (Essay) ↓
kinetic energy of the
6. . accelerated electrons
↓
D
B A heat energy in the cooling
? C copper fins and the wave energy
W ® ®
in the x-rays

(c) x-rays are used to detect cracks

Fig. 2 in metals or engines like those of
(a) Name the parts labeled A, aeroplanes without opening them
B, C and D. 7. .
(b) List in order the energy
changes which occur in the qA r

x-ray tube.
B F
(c) Describe one industrial use C D
>
of x-rays
E
Solution Fig. 3

(a) For an x-ray tube, the parts la- The diagram in fig. 3 shows
beled are the essential parts of an x-ray
tube.
A = tungsten or hard metal target
B = hot filament (i) Name the parts labeled A,
B, C, D, E and F.
C = cooling copper fins or plate
(ii) State the function of each
D = vacuum
part.
(b) energy changes in x-tray tube are (iii) Describe how x-rays are
as follows produced.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 276 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.4. RADIOACTIVITY
(iv) What safety precautions (ii) how x-rays are produced.
must be taken in an x-ray The filament connected to the low
laboratory? voltage source heats up the cath-
ode which emits electrons by thermion
Solution emission. The emitted electrons
are accelerated to a very high speed
(i) the labeled parts are; by the E.H.T and they hit the hard
A - Extra High Tension (E.H.T) metal target. At the hard metal
or high voltage, B - Cooling cas- target 99% of the kinetic energy
ing or cooling fins, C - Copper of the electrons is changed to heat
casing, D - Hard metal or tung- energy that is conducted away from
sten target, E - Hot filament, F - the hard metal target by the cop-
Stream of electrons per cooling fins to the surround-
ing air and the rest (i.e 1%) is
(ii) Function of the labeled parts are; changed to x-rays.
A - The Extra High Tension is (b) Safety precautions taken in an x-
to accelerate the electrons to ray laboratory are;
the tungsten target.
1 - you should never over expose
B - Cooling fins are to radiate
your body to x-rays.
the heat in the copper casing
to the surrounding air. 2 - always stand behind thick
walls of concrete.
C - Copper casing transfer heat
from the tungsten target to 3 - always cover the x-ray tube
the cooling fins since copper walls with lead shields to pre-
is a good conductor of heat. vent stray x-rays.
D - Hard metal target to absorb
the heat generated by the elec-
trons, so it must be made from 5.4 Radioactivity
a metal with a high melting
point like tungsten. Section A (Objectives)
E - Hot filament, it produces elec-
trons by thermionic emission.
1. Which of the following statements
F - A stream of electrons, these
are true?
transfer their kinetic energy
to the heat and x-rays at the (i) protons and neutrons are found
tungsten target. in the nucleus of an atom.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 277 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.4. RADIOACTIVITY CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
(ii) Electrons and beta particles A. 24 10
are the same. B. 24 11
(iii) Protons and electrons occur C. 24 12
in equal numbers in all neu-
D. 24 13 C
tral atoms.
(iv) Alpha particles and beta par-
ticles are both positively charged. A+0 = 24
A. (i), (ii) and (iii). A = 24
B. (i) and (iii) only. Z −1 = 11
C. (ii) and (iv) only. Z = 12

D. (iv) only. A 4. The half life of a radioactive el-

ement is 2 minutes. What frac-
2. The activity of a radioactive ele-
tion of the initial mass is left af-
ment with a half life of 30 days
ter 8 minutes?
is 2400 counts per second. Find
the activity of the element after 1
A. 2
120 days. B. 1
4
1
A. 75 counts per second C. 8
B. 150 counts per second 1
D. 16 D
C. 300 counts per second 8
= 4 half lives. From
2
D. 600 count per second B Ã !n
1
M = M◦
2
à !n " #4
1 M 1
A = A◦ ⇒ =
2 M◦ 2
120 1
n = =4 =
30 16
à !4
1
A = 2400 5. The following equation represents
2
part of a radioactive series.
A = 150
234
90 T h ⇒ X + Radiation
3. A radioisotope of sodium atom de- Substance X and the radiation
cays by emission of a beta parti- in the equation above are
cle as shown in the equation be-
low; 24 A 0 A. 234
91 Pa and gamma.
11 N a ⇒ Z Y + −1 β Find the
values of A and Z. B. 230
90 Th and beta.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 278 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.4. RADIOACTIVITY
C. 234
90 Th and gamma. 9. When uranium 235 is bombarded
D. 234 with a neutron, it splits accord-
91 Pa and beta. C
ing to the equation.
6. Radium nucleus 22688 Ra decays to
235
Random (Rn) by α - particle emis- 92 U + 10 n −→ M 92 1
N P + 36 Kr + 30 n
sion. What is the nuclear equa-
tion for this reaction? M and N on P represent,
M N
A. 226 3
88 Ra → 2 He +
223
Rn A. 56 141
B. 226 4
88 Ra → 2 He +
222
Rn B. 141 56 A
C. 226 4
88 Ra → 2 He +
222
Rn C. 199 36
D. 226 223
Rn + 10 n D. 107 128
88 Ra → B
7. State the radiations that may be N = 92 − 36
emitted by a radioactive substance. = 56
M = 235 + 1 − 92 − 3
A. Alpha, gamma and x-rays.
= 141
B. Cathode, rays, x-rays and beta
C. Gamma, alpha and beta C 10. Which of the following radia-
D. Cathode rays, x-rays and al- tions is emitted from the nucleus
pha. of an atom?

8. The half-life of a radioactive sub- A. Cathode rays.

stance is 10s. How long will it B. Gamma rays.
take for a mass of 16g of that
C. Infra red rays
substance to reduce to 2g?
D. Ultra violet rays. B
A. 40s
B. 30s 11. The count rate from a radio ac-
tive source is 138 counts per minute
C. 20s
when the background rate is 10
D. 10s. B counts per minute. If the half
16 → 8 → 4 → 2 life of the source is 6 days, find
the count rate after 18 days.
3 halves = 3 × t 21
= 3 × 10 A. 16.0
= 30s. B. 17.25
³ ´n
OR 2 = 16 1 C. 26
2 , n = 3, t = 3×t 21 =
30 D. 42 A

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 279 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.4. RADIOACTIVITY CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
real or actual count rate is 138 − 15. Element X emits radiation r and
10 = 128 counts per minute 18 forms element Y as given in the
has 3 half lives of 6days hence equation.
1st 2nd 3rd
128 → 74 → 32 → 16 A
ZX −→ A
Z+1 Y + r

12. In an atomic bomb, energy is While A and Z are mass and atomic
produced by numbers respectively, radiation
r is
A. fusion.
A. alpha particles
B. fission.
B. beta particles.
C. radioactivity.
C. Gamma rays.
D. thermionic emission. B
D. X-rays B
13. Which of the following are at-
r = 0−1 β beta particles have mass
tracted towards the negative plate
zero and charge -1.
in an electric field?
16. Nuclear fission occurs when
A. Beta particles
B. Alpha particles. A. uranium is heated to a very
high temperature.
C. Gamma rays.
B. two deuterium (heavy hydro-
D. Neutron. B gen) atoms come together.
14. The equation below represents C. a hydrogen molecule splits into
an activity in which thorium de- two atoms.
cays and emits an alpha parti- D. nuclei of uranium atoms split
cle. 228 A
90 T h −→Z X + α Find value into lighter nuclides. D
of Z.
17. Background radiation is due to
A. 88.
(i) cosmic rays from the sun.
B. 89
(ii) microwaves.
C. 91. (iii) radioactive fall out.
D. 92. A (iv) radiations from T.V. set
228
90 T h −→ 224 4
88 X + 2 He A. (i), (ii) and (iv) only.
Z = 90 − 2 B. (i), (ii) and (iii).
= 88 C. (i), (iii) and (iv) only.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 280 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.4. RADIOACTIVITY
60
D. (ii), (iii) and (iv) only. C 21. 70 C0
is a radioactive isotope of cobalt
which emits a beta particle and
18. Two alpha particles are produced very high energy gamma rays to
when an unknown particle x is form an element X. Write a bal-
used to bombard lithium, 73 Li as anced equation for the nuclear
shown in the equation: reaction.
7
3 Li + x ⇒ 42 He + 42 He
60
What is x? 70 Co ⇒ 60 0
71 X + −1 e + γ

A. A beta particle. 22. What is a radioactive nuclei?

B. An alpha particle. This is an unstable nuclei
C. A neutron. that can emit either gamma,
D. A proton. D beta or alpha particles.

x = 11 x a proton, of hydrogen nu- 23. A radioactive element X decays

clei by emitting an alpha particle and
gamma rays. Write a balanced
19. A radioactive material decays to equation for the decay.
1
16 of its original quantity in 2 hours.
What is its half life? A A−4 4 0
Z X = Z−2 P + 2 He + 0 γ
A. 15min.
B. 24min 24. The symbol 235 92 U denotes a ura-
nium nucleus. What is the mean-
C. 30min.
ing of
D. 40 min. C
t1 t1 t1 t1 (i) 235?
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
1 → 2 → 4 → 8 → 16 hence they
(ii) 92?
are 4 half lives
2 × 60 (i) 235 is the number of nu-
t 12 = mins
4 cleons in this uranium
= 30min atom
Section B (Structured) (ii) 92 is the number of
protons in this uranium
20. Name any two radiations emit- atom
ted by radioactive substances.
25. Write down a balanced nuclear
1. alpha particles
equation showing the decay of 235
92 U
2. Beta particles or to a nuclide X by emission of an
Gamma rays alpha particle.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 281 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.4. RADIOACTIVITY CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS

235 • alpha particles

92 U → 42 He + 231
90 X
• Beta particles
26. A radioactive source emits radia-
tion which are directed between Note that Gamma rays
two positively charged metal plates are not particles.
as shown in fig. 12.

+ve A
Á
j - B
-ve ^ path 1
C
radioactive -
source
Fig. 12 Magnetic field

? ? ? ? ? ? ?
Name the radiation labeled, A, 30. Fig. 9

B and C.
A. Beta particles The path of one of the particles
B. Gamma rays in the above number through a
C. Alpha particles magnetic field is as shown in fig.
9. Identify the particle giving rea-
sons for your answers.
27. What can you deduce about the
charges of the radiations above?
A beta particles because
Beta particles as nega- they are always the most
tively charged deflected or alpha parti-
Gamma rays have no cles because they are al-
charge ways the least deflected
Alpha particles are posi-
tively charged
28. What happens when the radioac- 31. What is meant by radioactivity?
tive source is completely covered
with an ordinary sheet of paper? This is the spontaneous
decay of an unstable nu-
Nothing happen apart from
clei.
stopping only alpha parti-
cles it they are emitted by the
radioactive source.
32. A radioactive materials takes 50
29. Name the particles emitted by ra- hours for 93.75% of its mass to
dioactive materials. decay. Find its half-life.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 282 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.4. RADIOACTIVITY
(i) nuclear fission is the
The fraction left is splitting of an unsta-
ble nuclei into two or
100 − 93.75 more daughter nu-
= clei.
100
6.25
= (ii) one method of start-
100
625 ing the process in
= (a) (i) is by putting
10000
1 1 two radioactive ma-
= = 4 terials with mass
16 2
à !4
1 above critical size
=
2 close to each other
hence there are 4 half life or by putting it at
in 50hrs a very very high
temperature
50
half life = hrs
4 34. (i) Account for the energy released
1 in nuclear fission.
= 12
2
= 12.5hours (ii) State one use of nuclear en-
ergy.
(i) It is the energy
that holds the con-
stituents of the
nucleus (binding
energy).
(ii) In the production
of electricity in nu-
clear reactors or in
the treatment of dis-
33. (i) What is meant by nuclear fis- eases like cancer in
sion? radiotherapy

Paper II (Essay)

35. (a) State one example where

(ii) Give one method of starting nuclear fusion occurs nat-
the process in (a) (i). urally.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 283 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.4. RADIOACTIVITY CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
34 1
(b) State one use of nuclear (b)
(c) (i) 16 S+0 n→35 a
16 Y =b Y hence
fission. Y has 16 and 35 nucleous
(c) The following nuclear re- or 35 − 16 = 19 neutrons,
action takes place when (ii)
a neutron bombards a sul- Y →42 He + γ + X
phur atom.
34
The mass number decreases
16 S + 10 n → ab Y by 4 and the atomic num-
(i)Describe the composi- ber decreases by 2
tion of the nuclide, Y , (iii) • They are positively charged
formed. • They have a range of
(ii)The nuclide, Y , decays about 4 − 5cmin air.
by emission of an α−particle (d) 15 years have 15 = 3half litres
5
and a γ−ray. Find the
changes in mass num- 5yrs I I0yrs I 15yrs I
i.eI → → →
ber and atomic number 2 4 8
of the nuclide. th
hence 81 of the original sam-
(iii) State two properties ple remains after 15 years.
of α−particles.
(e) (i) To treat iodine by I − 131
(d)The half life of the isotope
(ii)Do not smoke near them,
cabolt−60 is five years. What
Not to touch them with base
fraction of the isotope re-
hands.
mains after 15 years?
36. (a) state two differences
(e) State:
between an alpha par-
(i) one medical use of ra- ticle and a beta parti-
dioisotopes. cle.
(ii) two ways of minimiz- (b) Give one example in each
ing the hazardous ef- case where nuclear fu-
fects of radiation from sion and nucllear fission
radioactive materials. occurs.
(c) The half-life of a radioac-
Solution
tive substance is 24days.
Calculate the mass of the
(a) In Uranium - 235 isotope atoms
substance which has de-
In nuclear bombs or produce cayed after 72 days if the
electricity in nuclear reactors. original mass is 0.64g.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 284 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.4. RADIOACTIVITY
Solution The mass that has decayed is given
by;
(a) differences between alpha and beta decayed mass = 0.64 − 0.08
particles = 0.56 grams
• Alpha particles are positively 37. (a) Define half-life of a radioac-
charged while beta particles tive substance.
are negatively charged
(b) The mass of a radioactive
• Alpha particles are Helium 1 th
substance decays to a 16
nuclei while beta particles are of its original mass after
high speed electrons 16 days.
(i) What is its half-life?
(b) nuclear fusion is what takes place
in a nuclear reactor or nuclear (ii) fraction of the origi-
bomb while nuclear fusion is what nal mass will have de-
takes place in the interior of the cayed after 20 days?
sun and in other stars. (c)
232 X - 228 Y - 228 Z - 228 Z
89
90 88 89

(c) From the question ? ? ?

A B C

t 12 = 24days (i) Identify the particles

Original mass, m◦ = 0.64g or radiation A, B and
Time of decay, t = 72 days C emitted in the decay
process shown above.
But in a time interval equal to (ii) State two differences
half-life, the mass decays to half between radiations A and
its initial value but how many B
half-lives are in 72 days? (iii) Name two health haz-
ards of radioactivity.
72
they are, n = (iv) What is the difference
24 between nuclear fusion
= 3 half-lives
and nuclear fusion.
t1
M◦ t 12 M◦ t 12 M◦
2
M → → → Solution
2 4 8
t1 t1 t1 (a) half-life is the time it takes for
2 2 2
0.64g → 0.32g → 0.16g → 0.08g
the mass or count rate of a ra-
hence after 72 days, we would be dioactive substance to decay to
left with 0.08 grams. half of its original value.

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 285 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.4. RADIOACTIVITY CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
1 th
(b) Mass delays to 16 of original mass(c) (i)
in 16 days. A is 42 A - Alpha particle

(i) how many half-lives are re- B is 0−1 B - beta particle

1 th
quired to remain with 16 of
the original mass? C is 00 C - gamma ray

(ii) differences between radiations

à !n A and B
1
M = M◦
2 • A is positively charged while
M 1 1 1 B is negatively charged
= = 4= n
M◦ 16 2 2 • A is very heavy compared
n = 4 to B
(iii) two health hazards of ra-
hence they are 4 half-lives in
dioactivity
16 days.
• They cause cancer
4t 21 = 16 • They cause genetic muta-
16 tion
t 12 = • They cause deep seated burns
4
= 4 days (iv) nuclear fusion involves the
joining of two or more light
Hence the half-life of the ra- nuclei to form one heavy nu-
dioactive substance is 4 days. clei while nuclear fission in-
(ii) What fraction will have de- volves the splitting of one large
cayed after 20 days. nuclide to two or more light
In 20 days, there are 20
= nuclide
4
5 half-lives 38. (a) (i) What is meant by a ra-
à ! dioisotope?
M 1 1
= = (ii) State one and one in-
M◦ 2 32
dustrial application of
1 th
hence in 20 days 32 of the radioisotopes.
original mass will be avail- (b) Describe what happens when
1 31
able, therefore 1 − 32 = 32 a beam of radiations con-
31
has decayed therefore 32 of sisting of α, β and γ rays
the original mass will have is incident on a thin sheet
delayed after 20 days. of lead.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 286 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.4. RADIOACTIVITY
Solution radiation are most likely
to be detected at
(a) (i) a radioisotope is an isotope of (i) position A,
a radioactive element which (ii) position B,
can emit either α particles, β (iii) position C?
particles or γ rays.
(c).
(ii) An example of a radioisotope
is a Uranium -235. It is used radiations

in nuclear reactors to gener- ®

- - -
ate electricity.
Aluminium
Cardboard Lead
(b) sheet sheet
Fig. 4

• Alpha - particles will be stopped A radioactive source which

by this thin sheet of lead. emits all the three radia-
• Beta - particles will be stopped tions is placed infront of
by this thin sheet of lead. cardboard, aluminium and
But lead sheets as shown in fig.
• Gamma rays will pass through 4. Name the radiation likely
this thin sheet of lead. to be between the;
(i) cardboard and the alu-
39. (a) What is an alpha particle? minium sheet
(ii) aluminium and lead sheets
(b) A radioactive source de- (d) Name any three precau-
cays by emission of all the tions which must be un-
three radiations. dertaken by one working
A
6 with ionizing radiation.
(e) Name one:
B -
+
+ *-
-
(i) industrial use,
+ -
+
+¾C -
- (ii) biological use of ra-
+ -
+
+
--
-
dioactivity.
+
Radioactive source
(f) A radioactive material of
mass 8g has a half-life of
Fig. 3
20 days. Find how much
The radiation enter nor- of it will decay after 60 days?
mally into an electric field
as shown in fig. 3. Which Solution

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 287 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.4. RADIOACTIVITY CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
(a) An alpha particle is a helium nu- (ii) Biological use; in the treat-
clei ment of cancer using Iodine
- 131
(b) (i) Gamma rays - because they
are not affected by electric fields(f) 60 days have 3 half-lives of 20
(ii) Alpha particles because they days i.e.
are the least deflected this is 8kg
because they are heavy or be- ↓ 20days
cause they are positively charged 4 kg
and are attracted to the neg- ↓ 20 days
ative plate. 2g
(iii) Beta particles, they are de- ↓ 20 days
flected most since they are the 1g
very light compared to alpha
particles or because they are i.e. after 60 days only 1g will be
negatively charged, they are left. hence 7g have decayed.
deflected towards the positive
plate. 40. (a) A radioactive sample has
a half-time of 3×103 years.
(c) (i) Beta particles and gamma rays (i) What does the statement
because they are not stopped half-time of 3×103 years
by cardboard mean?
(ii) Gamma rays because the beta (ii) How long does it take
particles were stopped by alu- for three quarters of the
minum sheet. sample to decay?
(d)Precautions (b) Give two uses of radioac-
tivity.
• never touch them with bare
hands.
Solution
• do not smoke near them
• keep them out of reach of chil- (a) Half-life = 3 × 103 years
dren.
(i)half life of 3×103 years means
(e) (i) Industrial use; in determining that the mass or activity of
amount of wear of an engine the radioactive sample decreases
part or in locating cracks in to half its original value in a
metals and machines like aero- time internal equal to 3 × 103
plane engines. years.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 288 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.

CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS 5.4. RADIOACTIVITY
(ii)For 34 i.e.three-quarters of the
radioactive sample to decay,
we must be left with 41 of it
and this requires two half lives
i.e.
m◦ → m2◦ → m4◦
i.e. alpha particles, form short thick
tracks
t = 2 × half - life
³ ´
= 2 × 3 × 103 years
= 6 × 103 years

(b)Uses of radioactivity beta particles, form faint thin tracks

• In treatment of cancer
• In treating goiter using iodine
-
• In generating electricity in nu-
clear reactors

41. (i) Name the particles emitted gamma particles, form thin short
by radioactive materials. tracks
(ii) Draw diagrams to show 42. (i) Name and state the nature
the paths of the particles of the emissions from ra-
named in (b) (i) in a cloud dioactive nuclides.
chamber.
(ii) What effects does each of
the emissions have on the
Solution parent nuclide?

Solution
(i) radioactive materials emit;

• alpha particles (b) (i) The emissions are 3;

• beta particles and • Alpha practicles; they are
helium nuclei.
• Gamma rays
• Beta - particles; they are
(ii) high speed electrons

Tunuura S. and Tusiime S. 289 Physics; Problems and Solutions

5.4. RADIOACTIVITY CHAPTER 5. MODERN PHYSICS
• Gamma rays; they are high
frequency electromagnetic
waves.
(ii) effect of radioactive emissions
on parent nuclide.
• Alpha particles - they lower
its mass number by 4 and
also lowers its atomic num-
ber by 2.
• Beta particles - these lead
to no change to atomic mass
but increase the atomic num-
ber by 1
• Gamma rays these have
no effect on the parent nu-
clei a part from either mak-
ing it more stable or un-
stable.

Physics; Problems and Solutions 290 Tunuura S. and Tusiime S.